Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
PROJECT MANUAL For
EATON PUBLIC LIBRARY EXPANSION 132 Maple Avenue Eaton, Colorado 80615 April 7, 2014
Thorp Associates, P.C. Architects and Planners 131 Stanley Avenue, Suite 100 PO Box 129 Estes Park, Colorado 80517 970.586.9528; 303.534.1378 970.586.4145 Fax www.thorpassoc.com
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
EATON PUBLIC LIBRARY EXPANSION
132 MAPLE AVENUE EATON, COLORADO 80615
THORP ASSOCIATES, P.C. ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS
April 7, 2014
PROJECT DIRECTORY
Eaton Public Library Expansion – Eaton, Colorado P# 1328 Eaton Public Library Owner 132 Maple Avenue Eaton, CO 80615 970.454.2819 Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners Architect Roger M. Thorp, AIA, LEED AP, Architect of Record Joseph E. Calvin, AIA, Project Architect 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100; PO Box 129 Estes Park, CO 80517 970.586.9528 Martin – Martin, Inc. Structural Engineer Ben Nelson, P.E., Vice President 12499 West Colfax Ave Lakewood, CO 80215-3720 720.544.2700 BCER Engineering, Inc. Mechanical, Electrical Mark R. Johnson, P.E. 5420 Ward Road Ste 200 Arvada, CO 80002 303.422.7400 BHA Design Inc. Landscape Design Jerod Huwa 1603 Oakridge Dr Fort Collins, CO 80525 970.223.7577 Interwest Consulting Group, Inc. Civil Engineer Robert Almirall, P.E. 1218 W. Ash, Suite C Windsor, CO 80550 970.674.3300 David L. Adams Associates, Inc. Acoustical Design Ben Seep 1536 Ogden St. Denver, Colorado 80218 303.455.1900 Sherman Design, LLC Interior Design Renee Sherman 933 East Ridgecrest Rd Fort Collins, CO 80524 970. 490.2850 Jamie LaRue Library Design Consultant 236 Johnson Ct Castle Rock, CO 80104 303.688.7656 Northern Colorado Geotech Inc. Geotechnical Engineer 2956 29th St #21 Greeley,CO, 80631 970.506.9244 Refer all questions during bidding and construction to: Roger M. Thorp, AIA, LEED AP, Architect of Record Joseph E. Calvin, AIA, Project Architect 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100 PO Box 129 Estes Park, CO 80517 970.586.9528V; 970.586.4145F; 303.534.1378 (Metro) [email protected] [email protected]
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR
PROJECT MANUAL Eaton Public Library Expansion
April 7, 2014
SPECIFICATIONS P#1328
TITLE PAGE
PROJECT DIRECTORY TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 11 16 Invitation To Bid 00 21 13 Instruction to Bidders
00 41 13 Bid Form 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form 00 52 13 Agreement Form 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Administrative Provisions
01 33 00 Submittals 01 40 00 Quality Control 01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01 66 00 Material and Equipment 01 70 00 Contract Closeout
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 32 00 Geotechnical Investigation Report No. 173-13, dated October 31, 2013, as
performed by Northern Colorado Geotech, Inc., 2956 29th St #21, Greeley, CO, 80631; 970.506.9244.
02 41 00 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete
DIVISION 04 MASONRY 04 01 20 Unit Masonry Restoration and Cleaning 04 21 13 Brick Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 METALS
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets 06 64 01 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panel System
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 00 Dampproofing 07 13 13 Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 07 19 00 Liquid Water Repellant 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 21 29 Sprayed Cellulose Acoustical Insulation 07 25 00 Air Barriers 07 53 00 Single Ply-Membrane Roofing 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 72 23 Roof Hatches 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 84 56 Construction Firesafing 07 92 00 Joint Sealers
DIVISION 08 DOORS AND WINDOWS
08 11 00 Steel Doors and Hollow Metal Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors and Frames 08 42 29 Sliding Automatic Entrances 08 45 23 Insulated Translucent Fiberglass Sandwich Panel System 08 52 13 Aluminum-Clad Wood Windows and Doors 08 70 00 Finish Hardware 08 80 00 Glass and Glazing
DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 20 00 Gypsum Wall Board and Ceiling Systems 09 30 10 Ceramic/Porcelain Tile 09 50 00 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 00 Resilient Flooring and Base 09 68 13 Tile Carpeting 09 72 13 Cork Wall Coverings 09 84 13 Acoustical Wall Panels 09 90 00 Painting and Staining
DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Systems 10 14 23 Sign System 10 26 13 Corner Guards 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 31 00 Gas Fireplaces 10 44 00 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets 10 51 13 Metal Lockers 10 75 00 Flag Poles
DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 51 16 Book Depositories 11 52 13 Electric Projection Screens
DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS
12 93 13 Bicycle Racks 12 93 14 Skateboard Storage System
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 00 00 Basic Plumbing Requirements 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 19 Meters and Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 22 11 19 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 22 14 13 Storm Drainage Piping 22 32 00 Water Heaters 22 33 00 Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING
23 00 00 Basic Mechanical Requirements 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 13 Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment 23 05 29 Supports and Anchors 23 05 53 Mechanical Identification 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 00 Mechanical Insulation 23 11 23 Natural Gas Systems 23 31 13 Metal Ductwork 23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories 23 34 13 Air Handling Fans 23 37 13 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 74 14 Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units 23 82 00 Terminal Units
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Basic Electrical Requirements
26 05 10 Electrical Remodeling Provisions 26 05 19 Building Wire and Cable 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding 26 05 29 Supporting Devices and Seals 26 05 32 Conduit 26 05 34 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 26 05 35 Cabinets and Enclosures 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 05 80 Equipment Wiring Systems 26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices 26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices 26 51 00 Interior Lighting 26 56 00 Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
31 23 00 Excavation and Fill
INVITATION TO BID 00 11 16 - 1
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 00 11 16 INVITATION TO BID Sealed Bids will be received by the Eaton Public Library Board of Trustees until !"#$%&'(' MDT, Tuesday, April 29, 2014!for the complete accomplishment of the construction of a 7,874 square foot addition to and remodel of the existing 3,926 square foot 1991 Addition of the Eaton Public Library, 132 Maple Avenue, Eaton, Colorado 80615. Sealed Bids will be opened and read aloud at the above stated time in the Eaton Public Library, 132 Maple Avenue, Eaton, Colorado 80615. All bids must be made on the Bid Form furnished in the Contract Documents. Any bid received after the above stated time will be returned to the Bidder unopened. Bids may be faxed to the attention of Mr. Jerry Krois, Director, Eaton Public Library at 970.454.2958 (Facsimile) prior to the stated time of the Bid Opening, followed by a signed original within 24 hours delivered to the offices of the Architect, Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners, at 131 Stanley Avenue, Ste 100, PO Box 129, Estes Park, Colorado, 80517. A Mandatory Pre-Bid Site Inspection will be held at the Jobsite indicated above at 9:00 a.m. MDT, Tuesday, April 22, 2014. At this meeting, the Architect and Owner will be present to generally outline the Work and answer questions. Only those General Contractors represented at this meeting will be eligible to submit bids. Plans and Specifications will be available for download from the Architect’s website through www.thorpassoc.com/unlisted/eaton-lib-exp or for a $100.00 non-refundable fee plus shipping costs on or after April 7, 2014 from the offices of the Architect, Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners, 131 Stanley Avenue, Ste 100, PO Box 129, Estes Park, Colorado 80517, 970.586.9528, and on file and open to public inspection at the locations listed below. All Bid Set Drawings and Specifications remain the property of the Owner and are returnable to the Architect when Successful Bidder has been determined.
Eaton Public Library 970.454.2189 132 Maple Avenue 970.454.2958 Fax Eaton, Colorado 80615 Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners 970.586.9528 131 Stanley Avenue, Ste 100, P.O. Box 129 970.586.4145 Fax Estes Park, Colorado, 80517 303.534.1378 Metro www.thorpassoc.com/unlisted/eaton-lib-exp
The complete accomplishment for construction of a 7,874 square foot addition to and remodel of the existing 3,926 square foot 1991 Addition of the Eaton Public Library, 132 Maple Avenue, Eaton, Colorado 80615 will be performed under a single General Contract. The new construction project includes some selective demolition as shown in the Contract Documents. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
END OF SECTION 00 11 16 - INVITATION TO BID
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 1
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion #1328 SECTION 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1.01 To be considered, Bids must be made in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders.
A. DOCUMENTS: Copies of the Contract Documents will be available on or after April 7, 2014 through
www.thorpassoc.com/unlisted/eaton-lib-exp or at the offices of the Architect, Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners, 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100, PO Box 129, Estes Park, Colorado 80517, 970.586.9528. All Bid Set Drawings and Specifications remain the property of the Owner and are returnable to the Architect when Successful Bidder has been determined. The Successful Bidder will be issued available sets of Drawings and Specifications Manuals. Additional sets of Drawings and Specification Manuals will be provided the successful bidder as necessary.
B. EXAMINATION: Before submitting a Proposal, Bidders shall carefully examine the Contract
Documents, examine the site and existing structures, attend a Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting, and fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and local codes, and shall include in the Proposal a sum to cover the cost of all items included in the Contract. The Work under this Contract will be as called for in these Instructions, the remainder of these Specifications, the Plans, as listed on the Drawing Index on Sheet A00 of the Plans, and any addenda prepared during the Bidding Process.
C. A MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING will be held at 9:00 a.m. MDT, Tuesday, April 22, 2014 at
the jobsite at 132 Maple Avenue, Eaton, Colorado, 80615. At this meeting, the Architect will be present to generally outline the Work and answer questions. Only those General Contractors represented at this meeting will be eligible to submit bids.
D. QUESTIONS: Any questions in the intent, or conflict in the Plans and Specifications shall be
submitted in writing to the Architect not less than 72 hours (excluding weekends or holidays) prior to the Bid Opening. Failure to do so will result in the Architect ruling as to the intent of the Contract Documents and the Work being done accordingly. All questions about the Contract Documents and site will be submitted to the Architect in writing. Replies will be issued in the form of Addenda to the Contract Documents and shall become part of the Documents. Contractor shall acknowledge all Addenda and supplementary drawings on his signed proposal. No oral, telephonic, telegraphic changes or modifications to the Contract Documents will be allowed unless confirmed in writing by the Owner or Architect before bids are submitted. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for oral clarifications. If conflicts between the Plans and Specifications are not questioned or resolved before the Bid opening, the more demanding of the articles will govern. Beginning of any Work indicates acceptance of all existing conditions and preceding Work.
E. SUBSTITUTIONS: Equipment and materials specified exclusively by trade name or catalog
reference shall form the basis for the Work and the Contract therefore. To obtain approval to use unspecified products, Bidders shall submit written requests using the Section 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form provided in this Project Manual, not less than five (5) days prior to the Bid Date, which shall clearly describe the product for which approval is sought, including all data necessary to demonstrate acceptability. Samples shall be provided if requested by the Architect. If acceptable, the Architect will approve the product in an addendum to all Bidders and Plan Holders.
F. PREPARATION OF BIDS: All Bids shall be submitted to Owner in accordance with the Instructions
to Bidders. Bid proposals shall be made on the form provided in this Project Manual. Numbers shall be stated in both longhand and numeric. The signature shall be longhand. The complete form shall be without alteration or erasure.
G. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND: PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND: A
Performance and Payment Bond, in the amount of One Hundred Percent (100%) of the Contract Price, with a corporate surety approved by the Owner, will be required for the faithful performance of the Contract. Refer to Section 00 72 00.
H. FEES AND PERMITS
1. The Owner agrees to procure and pay for any Municipal or County Fees and Permits related to the Project. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to Community Development Fees, Building Permit and Plan Check Fee, Utility Connection Fees, etc.
2. The Contractor to verify and pay any fees required from other than Municipal utility departments, such as telephone, gas, sewer, etc.
3. The General Contractor and all Subcontractors shall pay for all licenses as required to perform their Work and should include all Local, State and Federal sales taxes in their Bids, if applicable.
4. The Owner agrees to procure and maintain Builders Risk Insurance on the Project at all times. Contractor to verify coverage with Owner before starting Construction.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 2
J. CHANGES IN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS: Authorization for changes in Plans and
Specifications shall be only by Change Orders submitted by the Contractor, and approved by the Architect and the Owner. Any changes initiated by the Contractor without approval by the Architect or Owner will be done so at the Contractor’s own risk for code compliance and Owner approval, without any additional compensation.
K. TIME OF COMPLETION: The Bidder agrees to complete the entire Project within the number of
calendar days the Bidder indicates on the Bid Form. The time for completion of the Work is an essential condition of the Contract Documents. The Contractor will proceed with the Work at such rate of progress as to insure full completion within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the contract Time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climate and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the Work. The Contractor shall not be charged with any excess cost when the delay in completion of the Work is due to the following and the Contractor has promptly given Written Notice of such delay to the Owner. 1. To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the
Contractor, including but not restricted to, acts of God, or the public enemy, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, unforeseeable severe weather and acts of the federal or state government.
2. Provision for five (5) days of unusually severe weather should be included within the specified construction period indicated on the Bid Form. No further allowance for severe weather shall be made regardless of actual weather conditions, except for adverse weather of unprecedented severity as determined by the Owner. Contractor shall assume responsibility for adequate weather protection of work in progress and work in place, recognizing the inclement weather typical of the local environment and the season of the year.
L. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT: The Owner reserves the right to accept any Bid, to reject any or all
Bids, or to negotiate contract terms with the various Bidders when such is deemed by the Owner to be in their best interest. The competence and responsibility of Contractor and Subcontractors will be considered in awarding the Contract. The Owner does not obligate himself to accept the lowest or any Bid.
The accepted Bidder shall present to the Owner a formal Contract Agreement within five (5) days of Notice of Acceptance. Bidder shall cooperate with Owner in modifying Agreement until mutual agreement of terms is reached. Notwithstanding any delay in the preparation and execution of the formal Contract Agreement, each Bidder shall be prepared, upon written notice of Bid Acceptance, to commence work within ten (10 days following receipt of Notice to Proceed, or date stipulated in Notice.
Each Contractor or Subcontractor awarded the Contract shall furnish Certificates of Insurance, as specified in Division 1- General Requirements. Certificates shall be delivered to Owner prior to commencing Work. Each Bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Architect or Owner, to present evidence of his experience, qualifications, and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract.
Unless otherwise provided in any supplement to these Instructions to Bidders, no Bidder shall
modify, withdraw, or cancel his Bid or any part thereof for sixty (60) days after the time designated for the receipt of Bids. At completion of Project, and as a part of the final Application for Payment, final lien waivers from all Contractors and Subcontractors and Materials Suppliers shall be delivered to the Owner.
M. BID BOND: No Bid Bond is required for the Project.
END OF SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID FORM 00 41 13 - 1
BID FORM FOR GENERAL CONTRACT Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 OWNER: Eaton Public Library 132 Maple Avenue Eaton, Colorado 80615 CONTRACTOR Date of Bid Opening: 9:30 a.m. MDT, Tuesday, April 29, 2014 will be held at the Eaton Public Library, 132 Maple Avenue, Eaton, Colorado, 80615. Bid Form may be submitted in person in a sealed envelope at the site of the bid opening noted above or by facsimile to the attention of Mr. Jerry Krois, Director, Eaton Public Library at 970.454.2958 (Facsimile) prior to the stated time of the Bid Opening If bid is faxed, original copies of the Bid Form shall be delivered in a sealed envelope within 24 hours to the offices of the Architect, Thorp Associates, P.C., Architects and Planners, at 131 Stanley Avenue, Ste 100, PO Box 129, Estes Park, Colorado, 80517. THE UNDERSIGNED, having examined the Drawings, Specifications and related documents, the site of the proposed Work, being familiar with all of the conditions relating to the construction of the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in connection with or incidental to the construction of the above referenced Project in strict conformance with the Drawings and Specifications for the sum of: TOTAL PROJECT BASE BID: (Including demolition) Dollars ($ ) Base Bid includes the following major Subcontractors: If awarded a contract for this Project, Undersigned agrees to provide, within seven (7) days of Contract signing, a COMPLETE list of Sub-Contractors working on the Project. If a Notice to Proceed is received within thirty (30) days after date of this Bid, the Undersigned will substantially complete the Work within calendar days. The Undersigned acknowledges receipt of Addenda #(s) . The Undersigned acknowledges visiting the site and existing structure. Yes No The Undersigned recognizes the Owner’s right to waive informalities in the bidding and to accept or reject any or all Bids. Upon receipt of Notice of Award, the Undersigned agrees to submit a formal Contract for the Work within five (5) days of receipt of such notice.
Company
By S E A L ATTEST Date
END OF SECTION 00 41 13 - BID FORM
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 43 25 - 1
00 43 25 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Thorp Associates, P.C. Architects and Planners 131 Stanley Ave, Ste 100 970.586.9528 PO Box 129 970.586.4145F Estes Park, CO 80517 www.thorpassoc.com Project: Eaton Public Library Expansion Eaton, Colorado Date: Specification Section: Submitted by: Name: Company: Address: Telephone: E-mail: Product Name: Manufacturer: Model/Product #: Address: Telephone: Website: Product Description: Supporting Data Attached:
!Drawings !Product Data !Samples !Tests !Reports ! Other
Describe the reason for the proposed substitution: Describe what benefits the Client will receive from the proposed substitution: Describe all differences between the proposed and specified product (attach separate sheet if needed): Describe differences in dimensions and clearances that are affected by the proposed substitution: Indicate if the proposed product is available in the specified grade and finish, etc. If not, submit finish samples for selection: Describe differences if any in warranty between the proposed and specified products: Describe differences if any in maintenance, service and availability of parts: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will have on other trades: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will make to the project schedule: Describe what affect if any the proposed substitution will have to project cost: List local projects where the proposed substitute product is installed:
1. 3. 2. 4.
Approval if given will be in the form of a written Addendum issued to all Bidders.
AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 13 - 1
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 00 52 13 AGREEMENT FORM
A. Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum, AIA Document A101. Current Edition shall be used for Agreement on the Project.
END OF SECTION 00 52 13 - AGREEMENT FORM
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 1
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. General Condition of the Contract, AIA Document, A201. Current Edition shall apply to all Work on this Project.
END OF SECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1
DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT & CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.01 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION COVERAGE. The Contractor is responsible for providing
Workmen's Compensation Coverage for all of its employees to the extent required by law, and for providing such coverage or requiring its subcontractors to provide such coverage for the subcontractor's employees.
B. OCCUPATION LICENSE. The successful Contractor and subcontractors shall each acquire any
Occupation License required by the County or Municipality prior to the issuance of Notice to Proceed.
C. INDEMNIFICATION. To the extent authorized by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the Eaton Public Library Board of Trustees and the Town of Eaton (hereafter known as the Owner), its employees and agents, against any and all claims, damages, liability and court awards including costs, expenses, and attorney fees incurred as a result of any act or omission by the Contractor, or its employees, agents, subcontractors, or assignees pursuant to the terms of this Contract.
D. At all times during the performances of this Contract, the Contractor shall strictly adhere to all
applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations that have been or may hereafter be established.
E. INSURANCE: 1.1 GENERAL: Contractor agrees to procure and maintain, at its own cost, a policy or policies of insurance
sufficient to insure against all liability, claims, demands, and other obligations assumed by Contractor pursuant to this Agreement. Such insurance shall be in addition to any other insurance requirements imposed by law.
1.2 Contractor shall procure and maintain, and shall cause any subcontractor of Contractor to
procure and maintain, the minimum insurance coverages listed below. Such coverages shall be procured and maintained with forms and insurers acceptable to the Owner. In the case of any claims-made policy, the necessary retroactive dates and extended reporting periods shall be procured to maintain such continuous coverage.
1.2.1 WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE:
Worker's compensation insurance to cover obligations imposed by applicable law for any employee engaged in the performance of work under this Agreement, and Employer's Liability insurance with minimum limits of five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) each accident, five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) disease – policy limit, and five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) disease – each employee. Evidence of qualified self- insured status may be substituted for the worker's compensation requirements of this paragraph.
1.2.2 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE: Commercial general liability insurance with minimum combined single limits of one million dollars ($1,000,000) each occurrence and one million dollars ($1,000,000) general aggregate. The policy shall be applicable to all premises and operations. The policy shall include coverage for bodily injury, broad form property damage (including completed operations), personal injury (including coverage for contractual and employee acts), blanket contractual, independent contractors, products, and completed operations. The policy shall contain a severability of interests provision, and shall be endorsed to include the Owner and its officers, employees, and Contractors as additional insureds. No additional insured endorsement shall contain any exclusion for bodily injury or property damage arising from completed operations.
1.2.3 AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE:
Contractor shall procure and keep in force during the duration of this Agreement a policy of comprehensive automobile liability insurance insuring Contractor against any liability for personal injury, bodily injury, or death arising out of the use of motor vehicles and covering operations on or off the site of all motor vehicles controlled by Contractor which are used in connection with the Project, whether the motor vehicles are owned, non-owned, or hired, with a combined single limit of at least one million dollars ($1,000,000). The policy shall contain a severability of interests provision,
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 2
and shall be endorsed to include the Owner, its officers, employees, and Contractors as additional insureds.
1.3 Any insurance carried by the Owner, its officers, its employees, or its Contractors shall be
excess and not contributory insurance to that provided by Contractor. Contractor shall be solely responsible for any deductible losses under any policy.
1.4 PROOF OF INSURANCE
Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certificate of insurance, completed by Contractor's insurance agent, as evidence that policies providing the required coverages, conditions, and minimum limits are in full force and effect. The certificate shall identify this Agreement and shall provide that the coverages afforded under the policies shall not be cancelled, terminated or materially changed until at least thirty (30) days prior written notice has been given to the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to request and receive a certified copy of any policy and any endorsement thereto.
F. LEGAL ACTIONS
1.1 Failure on the part of Contractor to procure or maintain the insurance required herein shall constitute a material breach of this Agreement upon which the Owner may immediately terminate this Agreement, or at its discretion, the Owner may procure or renew any such policy or any extended reporting period thereto and may pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, and all monies so paid by the Owner shall be repaid by Contractor to the Owner upon demand, or the Owner may offset the cost of the premiums against any monies due to Contractor from the Owner.
END OF SECTION 00 73 00 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
END OF DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 10 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 10 00 ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Work Under This Contract includes all materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete the Work indicated, specified or reasonably inferred therefrom, including the complete construction of a 7,874 square foot library addition and 3,926 square foot remodel, with all site work, landscaping and utilities as indicated on the Drawings. The Work will be accomplished under a single contract with the General Contractor. General Contractor (GC) is responsible to coordinate general construction work and Schedule. Additional Work, including providing new library shelving units and furniture, shall be accomplished by others, and shall be coordinated by the G.C. Any conflicts between Drawings and Specifications, the more stringent shall govern.
B. WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT (Furnished and/or Installed by Others): This list supersedes all Notes on Drawings for NIC (Not Included in Contract): 1. Security System: Equipment & Installation by Others. 2. Computers, Telephones, Networks, Cables, etc.: Equipment and Installation by Others. 3. Exterior Signage: Products & Installation by Others. Electrical Contractor (EC) to coordinate
power requirements. 4. All Television, Satellite, CCTV, and Sound Systems: Product and Installation By Others. 5. Interior Window Coverings: Product and Installation by Others. 6. Library Furnishings including shelving, free-standing tables and chairs is Product and
Installation by Others. 7. Other items or materials on the Drawings noted as “By Owner”, “By Others”, or similar
wording. 8. Off-loading of Owner-supplied materials and equipment as well as trash removal of same.
1.02 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as “the Contractor shall”, “in conformity therewith”, “shall be”, “as noted on the Drawings”, “a”, “the”, are intentional. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when “NOTE” occurs on Drawings. Supply words “shall be” or “shall” by inference when colon is used within sentences or phrases. Supply words “on the Drawings” by inference when “as indicated” is used with sentences or phrases. “Provide” shall mean furnish and install unless specifically noted otherwise.
1.03 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit operations under this Contract to the area as shown on the Architectural Site Plan. The Site Staging Area shall be approved by Owner and/or Architect. Disruption of business activities around construction site will not be tolerated. Coordinate continual access during construction. GC to provide security fencing, barricades, etc., as required, to restrict public access to construction and staging areas.
1.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE
A. Failure to visit site will in no way relieve any contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Existing subsurface conditions including, but not limited to, soil boring data and any underground utilities shown on the plans and/or referred to in the Specifications are indicative and are for informational purposes only. It shall be the Contractor’s obligation to verify and augment such information and data to fully satisfy himself as to the conditions under which the Work will be done. The Contractor shall maintain in operating condition all active utilities encountered in this construction. He shall contact all public utilities and all pertinent contractors involved and have their representative locate their pipes, conduits, cables, or other facilities before construction is started. The Owner and Owner’s representative do not assume responsibility for location or disturbance of utilities or other existing subsurface features or conditions encountered on this Project. Where test boring logs indicating underground conditions or surveys of underground utilities are shown on the plans, such logs and surveys shall be considered only as indicative of conditions and the Owner and/or Architect shall not be held responsible for any variance in actual conditions encountered at the time of construction.
ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS 01 10 00 - 2
1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of
installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed or provided by Owner.
B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. Minimize penetrations of Building’s fire-resistant rated, sound controlling and/or thermal/moisture controlling assembles, firestop, fire block and/or damper, and such penetrations as necessary to maintain assembly rating or properties.
D. In finished areas conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
1.06 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines and levels by use of recognized engineering survey practices. Locate and protect control and reference points.
1.07 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Date of Signing of the Contract Documents except when a specific date is specified.
1.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Openings in construction which are required by other Contractors shall be left by crafts involved. It is the responsibility of various Contractors to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed information. In event of failure to supply this advance information, cutting as may be required shall be done only after concurrence of Architect and at the expense of the negligent party.
B. Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material penetrates or passes through fire resistant wall, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with fire resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor.
C. Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or material that is on constructed surfaces. Work shall be done by appropriate trade at expense of negligent party.
END OF SECTION 01 10 00 – ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS
SUBMITTALS 01 33 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROCEDURE
A. Submittal: The General Contractor shall make submittals to the Architect. Do not make submittals directly to the Architect’s consultants. Submittals made directly by Subcontractors or Suppliers will not be accepted. Submittals made by facsimiles will not be accepted. Submittals made by electronic mail will only be accepted if submitted and arranged for in advance in universal file formats such as Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) or Rich Text (.rtf). Proprietary formats such as .dwg, .doc and .xls will not be accepted.
B. Review: Architect and his Consultants will review submittals for conformity with design only. Quantities and dimensions are the responsibility of the Contractor. Proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of materials and work required by the Contract Documents but not indicated in submittals remain the responsibility of the Contractor. Review of submittals shall not be construed as approval from requirements of Contract Documents unless deviations from Contract Documents have been specifically noted on submittals.
C. Resubmittal: The General Contractor shall make resubmittals of rejected submittals until the concurrence of the Architect is obtained.
1.02 PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. Schedule: Form of a chart and indicate the start and completion of each of the elements on the Schedule of Values. The schedule shall indicate the major dependencies among elements on the schedule. The completion time shall be as specified in the Agreement. The Schedule shall be revised when the completion time is revised by Change Order.
B. Prepare and submit an estimate of partial payments as reflected by estimated Work progress with submittal of Construction Schedule.
C. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to be a usurpation of the Contractor’s authority and responsibility to plan and schedule the Work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
A. Shop Drawings: Submit four (4) plain paper copies or one (1) reproducible copy of all drawings. B. Product Data: Submit four (4) copies. C. Job Site Documents: Only accepted Shop Drawings or Product Data shall be kept at the job site. The
General Contractor shall keep a complete set of such documents on file at the job site. D. Field Measurements: Required field measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor and will be
made before Shop Drawings have been checked by the Architect, unless otherwise noted. 1.04 SAMPLES
A. The General Contractor shall assemble and deliver to the Architect a complete collection of required Samples, as indicated in the Construction Documents.
B. Upon receipt of a complete collection of Samples the Architect will, with reasonable promptness, make the selections and prepare and deliver to the General Contractor a schedule addressing items subject to selection.
C. The Architect reserves the right not to make individual determination or selections until all Samples are furnished.
END OF SECTION 01 33 00 – SUBMITTALS
QUALITY CONTROL 01 40 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 GENERAL
A. Maintain quality control over Suppliers, Manufacturers, Products, Services, Site Conditions, and Workmanship to produce Work of specified quality.
1.02 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The Owner will pay for testing laboratory inspections and tests. Coordinate with Owner. B. Cooperate with testing laboratory to furnish access, samples and temporary facilities as required.
Provide testing laboratory sufficient prior notice for services. 1.03 MOCK-UPS
A. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchoring devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
B. Required Mock-ups: 4 ft. wide x 6 ft. high exterior wall system to include brick veneer with head and sill units, and windows with installation clip on four (4) sides.
C. Accepted mock-ups are representative of quality required for the Work, including material color, finish, installation, flashing and detailing.
D. Remove mock-up at Project completion, or as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY CONTROL
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Service: The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide temporary electrical service to site for construction purposes. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide circuits, branch wiring and distribution boxes as required for temporary power and lighting. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide temporary lighting for each space.
B. The various Subcontractors shall provide extension cords and lamps as required to convey electricity to locations of Work and to provide task lighting to permit proper execution and inspection of Work.
C. After the permanent electric service is installed and permanent outlets are available, Contractors may use same. Each Contractor will be responsible for any damage done to permanent wiring or fixtures as a result of his use of same.
D. The Owner shall pay for electricity consumed. 1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES
A. The Contractor shall pay for temporary heat necessary for the execution of Work. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall install, maintain and operate temporary heating apparatus in such a manner as to facilitate the Work on the Project so Work can continue and the finished Work will not be damaged thereby.
B. The Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures as necessary for holding temporary heat such as enclosures for concrete work or for thawing frozen ground.
1.03 TEMPORARY WATER
A. The Owner shall pay to extend any required temporary water service for construction purposes from existing water service. The Contractor shall verify installation of water service in time for use for earthwork operations. The various Subcontractors shall provide all temporary connections and hoses necessary to convey same to places needed. The Owner shall pay for water consumed.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain, adequate chemical toilet facilities for the use of all Subcontractors engaged on the Work in compliance with applicable regulations.
1.05 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES
A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain protective devices and facilities for the protection of the public and the general protection of all workmen on the Project including but not limited to: 1. Danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding
nails, hoists, well holes, window opening, stairways, and falling materials. 2. Fire protection equipment. 3. First aid equipment. 4. Temporary walks, roadways, trench covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and
signals, etc. required for this work by Federal, State and Local safety laws and building codes.
B. The General Contractor shall maintain temporary protective facilities in good condition throughout the term of the Work. Repair and replace any Work damaged thereby.
C. Subcontractors shall be responsible for the adequacy or safety of ladders, scaffolding, shoring, bracing, tools, equipment, paint storage areas, cranes or hoists, ramps or runways, formwork, or other structure or devices provided.
1.06 FIELD OFFICE AND TELEPHONE
A. The General Contractor shall provide and maintain field office with telephone and internet service. Toll charges will be paid by the responsible party. The field office and telephone shall be available to the Architect.
1.07 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Each Contractor shall keep the building and site free of waste materials and rubbish. Each Contractor shall daily transport such material to a designated location on the site. The General Contractor shall periodically dispose of off site.
B. Each Contractor shall leave his Work clean at the completion of his Work. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2
1.08 REMOVAL A. The General Contractor shall remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction
prior to completion. END OF SECTION 01 50 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES & TEMPORARY CONTROLS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 66 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 66 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 1.01 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport products by methods to avoid damage. Deliver in undamaged condition in Manufacturer’s unopened containers or packaging, dry. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.
1.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with Manufacturer’s instruction, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by Manufacturer’s instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.
D. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed.
1.03 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Descriptions Only: Any product meeting those standards.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Substitute Paragraph: Submit a request for substitution for any Manufacturer not specifically named, minimum of five (5) days prior to Bid Date.
C. Products Specified by Naming one or more Manufacturer: Products of named Manufacturer meeting Specifications; no options, no substitutions allowed.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Submit Product Data and Samples as required. Use Substitution Request Form in Section 00 43 25.
B. Request constitutes a representation that Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds, in all respects,
specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be required for Work to be
complete in all respects, including revising details and any engineering. 4. Waives claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent.
C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawing or Product Data submittals without separate written request, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
D. Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitution and will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection in writing.
END OF SECTION 01 66 00 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00 - 1
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 SECTION 01 70 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.01 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean all windows inside and out and clean all mirrors. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces. Contractor shall perform final cleaning of entire building interior and areas of exterior addition and site improvement.
1.02 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Store documents separate from those used for construction. Mark any revisions or additions and locations of concealed construction and utilities. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any Work until required information has been recorded. At Contract Closeout, submit three (3) copies of As-Built Drawings and Specification documents to Architect.
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit three (3) copies of operation and maintenance instructions for equipment and systems in a loose-leaf binder. Include parts lists and local service agency.
1.04 SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION
A. Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Architect and Owner. Instruct in operation, and maintenance of equipment and systems.
1.05 WARRANTIES AND LIEN WAVERS
A. Provide three (3) notarized copies executed by Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in addition to that required for completion of Work. Deliver to Owner.
1.07 FEES AND PERMITS
A. The Owner agrees to procure and pay for any City Fees and Permits related to the Project. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to Community Development Fees, Building Permit and Plan Check Fees, any Plant Investment Fees, Utility Connection Fees, Use Taxes, Water Charges, etc.
B. The Contractor to verify and pay any fees required from other than Municipal utility departments such as telephone, gas, sewer, etc.
C. The General Contractor and all Subcontractors shall pay for all licenses as required to perform their Work.
D. The Owner agrees to procure and maintain Builders Risk Insurance on the Project at all times. Contractor to verify coverage before starting Construction.
1.08. CERTIFICATES
A. General Contractor shall provide Certificate of Substantial Completion, signed by appropriate parties. B. General Contractor shall provide Certificate of Occupancy and written approval from all required
approval agencies.
END OF SECTION 01 70 00 – CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
END OF DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION 02 32 00
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division.
SECTION 02 32 00 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION Geotechnical Investigation Report No. 173-13, dated October 31, 2013, as performed by Northern Colorado Geotech, Inc., 2956 29th St #21, Greeley, CO, 80631; 970.506.9244.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
PROPOSED ADDITION EATON LIBRARY
EATON, COLORADO
NORTHERN COLORADO GEOTECH PROJECT NO. 173-13
OCTOBER 31, 2013
Prepared for:
Eaton Library 132 Maple Avenue
Eaton, Colorado 80615 Attn: Dave Sloan
Northern
ColoradoGeotech
2956 29th Street, Unit 21 Greeley, Colorado 80631
Phone: (970) 506-9244 Fax: (970) 506-9242
Northern
ColoradoGeotech
October 31, 2013 2956 29th Street, Unit 21 Greeley, Colorado 80631 Phone: (970) 506-9244 Fax: (970) 506-9242 Eaton Library 132 Maple Avenue Eaton, Colorado 80615 Attn: Dave Sloan Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Eaton Library Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13 Northern Colorado Geotech has completed a geotechnical engineering exploration for the proposed addition to be located on the south side of the Eaton Library. The subsurface soils at the site consisted of silty clayey sand and silty sand with gravel to depths of 15 feet. The results of our field exploration and laboratory testing indicate that the soils have low expansive potential and low load bearing capabilities. Based on the anticipated construction and the results of our engineering exploration, it is our opinion that the proposed addition may be supported on a spread footing foundation system. Slab on grade may be utilized for the interior floor system. If you have any questions concerning this report or any of our consulting services, please do not hesitate to contact us. Sincerely, NORTHERN COLORADO GEOTECH Prepared by: Doug Leafgren, P.G. President Reviewed by: Gary G. Weeks, P.E. Vice President Copies to: Addressee (3)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
Letter of Transmittal .............................................................................................................. ii
SCOPE ................................................................................................................................. 1!
SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 1!
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................ 1!
SITE EXPLORATION............................................................................................................ 2!Laboratory Testing ....................................................................................................... 2!
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 3!Soil and Bedrock Conditions ........................................................................................ 3!Groundwater Conditions .............................................................................................. 3!Field Laboratory Test Results ...................................................................................... 3!
DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS .......................................................................................... 3!Foundation Design ....................................................................................................... 3!Footing Foundations .................................................................................................... 3!Surface Drainage ......................................................................................................... 4!Floor Slab Design and Construction ............................................................................. 5!General Earthwork ....................................................................................................... 5!
Site Preparation .................................................................................................. 6!Fill Materials and Placement ............................................................................... 6!
GENERAL COMMENTS ....................................................................................................... 7! ATTACHMENTS Boring Location Plan Logs of Borings Laboratory Test Results
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
PROPOSED ADDITION
EATON LIBRARY EATON, COLORADO
NORTHERN COLORADO GEOTECH
PROJECT NO. 173-13 OCTOBER 31, 2013
SCOPE This report contains the results of our geotechnical engineering exploration for the proposed addition to be located on the south side of the Eaton Library in Eaton, Colorado.
This report includes descriptions of, and geotechnical engineering recommendations relative to:
• subsurface soil conditions
• groundwater conditions
• foundation design and construction
• drainage
• floor slab design and construction
• earthwork
The recommendations contained in this report are based upon the results of field and laboratory testing, engineering analyses, and experience with similar soil conditions, structures and our understanding of the proposed project.
SITE CONDITIONS The existing library is a masonry building with approximately half the structure (west half) built as slab on grade and the eastern half the structure built with a basement. The area where the addition will be placed is currently occupied by an asphalt paved drive and an existing residence that will be removed in the near future. Overall surface drainage is fair to the south and east. The site is bordered to the west by an alleyway and additional residences.
PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION As we understand it, the project will consist of building a slab on grade addition on the south side of the existing library. Final site grades were not available at the time of the exploration, although we assume the first floor of the addition will match the existing slab elevation of the current library.
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
2
SITE EXPLORATION A total of two test borings were drilled on September 30, 2013. The borings were drilled to approximate depths of 15 feet at the locations shown on the Site Plan, Figure 1. The borings were advanced with a truck-mounted drilling rig, utilizing 4-inch diameter solid stem augers.
The borings were located in the field by pacing from property lines and/or existing site features. The accuracy of boring locations should only be assumed to the level implied by the methods used.
Lithologic logs of each boring were recorded by an engineering geologist during the drilling operations. At selected intervals, samples of the subsurface materials were taken by driving split-spoon and/or ring samplers. Standard penetration measurements were recorded while driving a split-spoon and/or ring sampler into the subsurface materials. The standard penetration test is a useful index in estimating the density of the materials encountered.
Groundwater conditions were evaluated in each boring at the time of subsurface exploration.
Laboratory Testing
The samples retrieved during the subsurface exploration were returned to our laboratory for observation by the project manager. The soils were classified in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System. At that time, the field descriptions were confirmed or modified and an applicable laboratory testing program was formulated. Boring logs were prepared and are attached with this report.
Laboratory tests were conducted on selected samples and are presented on the boring logs and attached laboratory test sheets. The test results were used for the geotechnical engineering analyses, and the development of foundation and earthwork recommendations.
Selected samples were tested for the following engineering properties:
• Water Content • Compressive Strength
• Dry Density • Expansion
• Consolidation
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
3
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Soil and Bedrock Conditions
Soils at the site generally consisted of silty clayey sand and silty sand with gravel to depths of approximately 15 feet. Summary boring logs are attached with this report.
Groundwater Conditions
Groundwater was not observed in any test boring at the time of field exploration. These observations represent groundwater conditions at the time of the field exploration, and may not be indicative of other times, or at other locations. Groundwater conditions can be expected to fluctuate with varying seasonal and weather conditions, and other factors.
Field Laboratory Test Results
Field test results indicate that the sand soils vary from loose to medium dense in relative density. Laboratory test results indicate that the soils have low expansive potential and low load bearing capabilities.
DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS Foundation Design
Based on the results of our subsurface exploration and the results of the laboratory testing, it is our opinion that a spread footing foundation system may be used for support of the proposed addition. The footings should be placed on undisturbed soils and/or engineered fill material.
Design and construction recommendations for foundation systems and other earth connected phases of the project are outlined below.
Footing Foundations
Based on the results of our subsurface exploration and laboratory testing, it is our opinion that a spread footing foundation system bearing upon undisturbed soil and/or engineered fill may be used for support of the proposed addition. The footings may be designed for a maximum bearing pressure of 2,000 psf. The design bearing pressure applies to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The design bearing pressure may be increased by one-third when considering total loads that include wind or seismic conditions.
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
4
Existing fill that will be encountered around the existing structure and on the adjacent site to the south where the existing residence will be removed should not be used for support of foundations without removal and recompaction.
Exterior footings should be placed a minimum of 30 inches below finished grade for frost protection and to provide confinement for the bearing soils. Finished grade is the lowest adjacent grade for perimeter footings.
Footings should be proportioned to reduce differential foundation movement. Proportioning on the basis of equal total movement is recommended; however, proportioning to relative constant dead-load pressure will also reduce differential movement between adjacent footings. Total movement resulting from the assumed structural loads is estimated to be on the order of 3/4 inch or less. Differential movement should be on the order of 1/2 to 3/4 of the estimated total movement. Additional foundation movements could occur if water from any source infiltrates the foundation soils; therefore, proper drainage should be provided in the final design and during construction.
Foundations and masonry walls should be reinforced as necessary to reduce the potential for distress caused by differential foundation movement. The use of joints at openings or other discontinuities in masonry walls is recommended.
Foundation excavations should be observed by Northern Colorado Geotech. If the soil conditions encountered differ significantly from those presented in this report, supplemental recommendations may be required.
Surface Drainage
Positive drainage should be provided during construction and maintained throughout the life of the proposed project. Infiltration of water into utility or foundation excavations must be prevented during construction. Planters and other surface features which could retain water in areas adjacent to the building or pavements should be sealed or eliminated. In areas where sidewalks or paving do not immediately adjoin the structure, we recommend that protective slopes be provided with a minimum grade of approximately 10 percent for at least 10 feet from perimeter walls. Backfill against footings, exterior walls, and in utility and sprinkler line trenches should be well compacted and free of all construction debris to reduce the possibility of moisture infiltration.
Downspouts, roof drains or scuppers should discharge into splash blocks or extensions when the ground surface beneath such features is not protected by exterior slabs or paving. Sprinkler systems should not be installed within 5 feet of foundation walls. Landscaped irrigation adjacent to the foundation system should be minimized or eliminated.
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
5
Floor Slab Design and Construction
Some differential movement of slab-on-grade floor systems is possible should the subgrade soils become elevated in moisture content. To reduce potential slab movements, the subgrade soils should be prepared as outlined in the earthwork section of this report.
Additional floor slab design and construction recommendations are as follows:
• Positive separations and/or isolation joints should be provided between slabs and all foundations, columns or utility lines to allow independent movement.
• Control joints should be provided in slabs to control the location and extent of cracking.
• Interior trench backfill placed beneath slabs should be compacted in accordance with recommended specifications outlined below.
• In areas subjected to normal loading, a minimum 4-inch layer of clean-graded gravel should be placed beneath interior slabs.
• Floor slabs should not be constructed on frozen subgrade.
Exterior slabs-on-grade, exterior architectural features, and utilities founded on, or in backfill may experience some movement due to the volume change of the backfill. Potential movement could be reduced by:
• minimizing moisture increases in the backfill • controlling moisture-density during placement of backfill • using designs which allow vertical movement between the exterior features and adjoining
structural elements • placing effective control joints on relatively close centers
General Earthwork
All earthwork on the project should be observed and evaluated by Northern Colorado Geotech. The evaluation of earthwork should include observation and testing of engineered fill, subgrade preparation, foundation bearing soils, and other geotechnical conditions exposed during the construction of the project.
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
6
Site Preparation
Strip and remove existing vegetation, debris, and other deleterious materials from proposed building and pavement areas. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions which could prevent uniform compaction.
Stripped materials consisting of vegetation and organic materials should be wasted from the site, or used to revegetate landscaped areas or exposed slopes after completion of grading operations.
Demolition of the existing residence to the south should include complete removal of all foundation systems within the proposed construction area. This should include removal of any loose backfill found adjacent to existing foundations. All materials derived from the demolition of existing structures and pavements should be removed from the site, and not be allowed for use in any on-site fills.
If unexpected fills or underground facilities are encountered, such features should be removed and the excavation thoroughly cleaned prior to backfill placement and/or construction.
It is anticipated that excavations for the proposed construction can be accomplished with conventional earthmoving equipment.
The individual contractor(s) is responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. All excavations should be sloped or shored in the interest of safety following local, and federal regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards.
Fill Materials and Placement
All exposed areas which will receive fill should be scarified to a minimum depth of eight inches, conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and compacted.
The placement of soils on the site should be observed by Northern Colorado Geotech. The fill should be assessed for suitability of use in the proposed fill and tested for placement including compaction percentage and moisture content.
Engineered fill should be placed and compacted in horizontal lifts, using equipment and procedures that will produce recommended moisture contents and densities throughout the lift. Recommended compaction criteria for engineered fill materials are as follows:
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
7
Clean on-site soils or approved imported materials may be used as fill material.
Imported soils (if required) should conform to the following:
Percent fines by weight Gradation (ASTM C136)
6" .......................................................................................................... 100 3" ..................................................................................................... 70-100 No. 4 Sieve ...................................................................................... 50-100 No. 200 Sieve ............................................................................... 50 (max)
Liquid Limit ....................................................................... 30 (max) Plasticity Index .................................................................... 5 (max)
Minimum Percent
Material (ASTM D698)
Scarified subgrade soils ......................................................................... 95
On-site and imported fill soils: Beneath foundations ................................................................... 95 Beneath slabs ............................................................................. 95
On-site or imported granular soils should be compacted within a moisture range of 3 percent below to 3 percent above optimum unless modified by the project geotechnical engineer.
GENERAL COMMENTS The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon data obtained from borings performed to obtain representative subsurface conditions at the site. Variations in the soil between borings will occur. Northern Colorado Geotech should be present during construction to observe the excavation and construction procedures and confirm or modify our recommendations.
The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any environmental assessment of the site.
Eaton Library Proposed Addition Northern Colorado Geotech Project No. 173-13
8
This report is intended exclusively for the use by the client. Any use or reuse of the findings and/or recommendations of this report by parties other than the client without the written consent of Northern Colorado Geotech is undertaken at said parties' sole risk.
This report has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices in this area at this time. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made.
!!
"!
!!
!!
#$
##
#%
&
#
$
'
(
#&
#$
#$
#$
%)))
#'
*
+
%
',-.!/0.12+,-3.!4-567"!4!8129-51.949-!.:;2<=->?-@A?B=C-DAE->?-F?GH>C-I??HJ->?-FJDGKFDJ=HJ
!8129-!.:;-L820-M".N412<=->?-AJDC-DAEC-I??HJ
36226O-6P-36"8:M
)Q#R-!BJII
)Q'
)Q&
#)Q)
#%Q)
#$)
5184:2
0.:;-/4:4S
2"6O424"-THU
!"#"$%&'
'("))*("+
,--(./&'
#*'S#'
L1 5O4S*%
."5082452V4:M8:44"
;O1
$0112*3*45*3
:7O34"
8:Q-;"8N4:
8:Q-"456N4"4;
-6474819*,99:2:4;
).+*.!*<.("#+*#4=*3
O68!27"4C-R
$W%+-$W>X-!>AJJ>C-7=G>-$#MAJJIJEC-5?I?A<D?-&)+'#/X?=JY--W*)S%)+SW$((P<ZY--W*)S%)+SW$($
29/4
3>?*@A7B1*,C1;D1&A24;E*F4B46A94
WV')V#'$G,(G&'
'("))*F.=
).++&'*<H
#F+*-(.I&FG*#.=
%
#)
#%
WV')V#'
/"6[452
&A24;*):J6A6K
LQ;Q
24!2!
316L!V#$,
:SN.174
0?IJ-PGIIJD-G=-.U>JA-3?AG=\
L,G&(*)&/&)*.<$&(/,G".#$
!824
[P
;4/20-]P2Q^
;AGIIG=\-4=\
;"9-;4:!829
/5P
!.O/14!
18_78;-18O82
/1.!285-8:;4`
/4"54:2-P8:4!
:?=J:?=J
#*'S#'QM/[
M"./085-16M
!!
"!
!!
!!
#$
#%
#&
#'
#
$
(
)
#&
#$
#$
#$
*+++
##
%
'
(
(,-.!/0.123,-4.!5-678"!5!912:-61.:5:-!.;<2=>-?@-AB@C>D-EBF-?@-G@HI?D-J@@IK-?@-GKEHLGEK>IK
!912:-!.;<-M920-N".O512=>-?@-BKED-EBFD-GKEHLG-EK>IK
47227P-7Q-47"9;N
+R)S-!CKJJ
+R(+R&
&R+
#'R+
##3
6195;2
0.;<-/5;5T
2"7P525"-UIV
!"#"$%&'
'("))*("+
,--(./&'
#%(T#(
M1 6P5T%'
."6092562W5;N9;55"
<P1
$0112*3*45*3
;8P45"
9;R-<"9O5;
9;R-"567O5"5<
-6474819*,99:2:4;
).+*.!*<.("#+*#4=*>
P79!28"5D-S
$*'3-$*?X-!?BKK?D-8>H?-$#NBKKJKFD-6@J@B=E@-&+3(#/X@>KY--*%+T'+3T*$))Q=ZY--*%+T'+3T*$)$
2:/5
3?>*@A7B1*,C1;D1&A24;E*F4B46A94
*W(+W#($G,(G&'
'("))*F.=
).++&'*<H
#F+*-(.I&FG*#.=
'
#+
#'
*W(W#(
/"7[562&A24;*):J6A6K
MR<R
25!2!
417M!W#$,
;TO.185
0@JK-QHJJKE-H>-.V?KB-4@BH>\
L,G&(*)&/&)*.<$&(/,G".#$
!925
[Q
<5/20-]Q2R^
<BHJJH>\-5>\
<":-<5;!92:
/6Q
!.P/15!
19_89<-19P92
/1.!296-9;<5`
/5"65;2-Q9;5!
;@>K;@>K
#%(T#(RN/[
N"./096-17N
!"
!#
!$
%
$
#
"
&
'%($ $ $%
!"#$"%&'()&"#*)+$)
)*+,-./01
,-.,-. //
)*+2))/0345
#6'70#6890)8:;;8/0<=>80#$?:;;@;A/0BC@C:DEC0F%7"$G9C=;H006I%!'%7!6#&&JDKH006I%!'%7!6#&#
B@>;=8H002D8C=0L>M:D:A000.NOM;:H0$I"!$"
G:CP;Q8H00G:CRC4;E0,EE>8>C=
LCQD8>C=H00$"#0SDR@;0,T;=N;
$0123*!14353*$467$0123*!14353*$467)R;Q>O;=0-E;=8>5>QD8>C= B@D44>5>QD8>C= SB1
89.89.,,******
$I"!$"(?GU
!"
!#
!$
%
$
#
"
&
'%($ $ $%
!"#$"%&'()&"#*)+$)
)*+,-./01
,,-,,- ..
)*+2))/0345
#6'70#6890)8:;;8/0<=>80#$?:;;@;A/0BC@C:DEC0F%7"$G9C=;H006I%!'%7!6#&&JDKH006I%!'%7!6#&#
B@>;=8H002D8C=0L>M:D:A000.NOM;:H0$I"!$"
G:CP;Q8H00G:CRC4;E0,EE>8>C=
LCQD8>C=H00$"#0SDR@;0,T;=N;
$/012*!03242*$356$/012*!03242*$356)R;Q>O;=0-E;=8>5>QD8>C= B@D44>5>QD8>C= SB1
789789::******
$I"!$"(?GU
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 20 41 00 - 1
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 02 41 00 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. Extent of demolition is shown on the Drawings as well as work required to accommodate new construction. Section includes but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Removal of portions of the exterior walls (including load-bearing and veneer masonry). 2. Removal of portions of roofing materials. 3. Removal of selected interior partitions. 4. Removal and/or rearrangement of some existing doors and hardware. 5. Removal of existing windows. 6. Cut and remove portions of existing concrete floor slabs. 7. Cut and remove portions of existing sidewalks, curbs and gutters. 8. Removal of existing Mechanical, Electrical, Lighting, and Plumbing Systems. Refer also to
Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Drawings. 9. Reconfiguration (in preparation for extension) to sanitary sewer system. 10. Removal of interior finishes including carpet and tile. 11. Removal of existing cabinetry as shown. 12. Removal and reconfiguration of portions of existing landscape irrigation system.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Remodeling and Expansion Construction Work and patching are included within the respective specification sections.
1.03 SCHEDULE
A. Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for demolition work to Owner and Architect for review prior to commencement of work. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for public and other tenant safety, dust and noise control. Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work. Refer also to the Work Sequence Information on the Drawings.
1.04 CONDITION OF STRUCTURES A. Owner and/or Architect assume no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be
demolished.
1.05 INSPECTION A. Prior to bidding and commencement of demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be
performed. Photograph existing conditions of structure, surfaces, equipment, or surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from demolition work; file with Owner prior to starting Work. Conditions existing at time of commencement of contract will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. Accept premises as found. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of building or site nor continuation in condition existing at the time of bidding or thereafter.
PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.01 PROTECTIONS
A. Provide, erect and maintain lights, temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect the general public and other tenants from injury due to demolition work, as required by traffic regulations and governing authorities.
B. Erect temporary covered passageways as required by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Provide proper protection for all undisturbed work. Wet down all dust and loose debris before
handling. D. Execute Demolition work in a manner to insure adjacent property and existing buildings to remain
against damage which might occur from falling debris or other cause. E. Remove completely all portions of existing structures’ pavements, slabs-on-grade and all other
materials required to be removed so that new work may be constructed or installed in accordance with the Drawings.
F. Remove materials in a careful manner so as not to damage work which is to remain or materials and/or equipment which is to be reused.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 20 41 00 - 2
G. Remove, as it accumulates, excess debris resulting from Demolition operations. Do not store or permit to accumulate on site. If the Contractor fails to remove excess debris promptly, the Owner reserves the right to cause same to be removed at Contractor’s expense.
H. The sale of existing building material at the site by the Contractor shall not be permitted. J. Contractor to coordinate and confirm shut off of all utility services to building with appropriate
authority and the Owner, before beginning Demolition work. K. Contractor to maintain and protect existing gas, sewer, and water service main lines to building. L. Contractor to remove topsoil in areas of vegetation, where building construction to occur. General
Contractor to coordinate.
2.02 DAMAGE A. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work at no additional cost to
Owner.
2.03 UTILITY SERVICES A. Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.
1. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over.
2. Comply with Local governing jurisdiction codes and requirements. 3. Coordinate utility work with utility companies and authorities having jurisdiction.
2.04 DEMOLITION A. Perform demolition work in a systematic manner. B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements which conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without delay.
2.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally dispose of materials off site. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollution.
2.06 CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR A. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site.
Remove protections and leave clean. B. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return structures and surfaces to remain to
condition existing prior to commencement of demolition work. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work.
END OF SECTION 02 41 00 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
END OF DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 1
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: 1. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project Site. 2. Submit substantiating data for each concrete mix design contemplated for use to the Architect
no less than four weeks prior to first concrete placement. Data for each mix shall include the following: a. Mix identification number (unique for each mix submitted). b. Statement of intended mix use. c. Mixture proportions. c. Water/cementitious materials ratio. e. Wet and dry unit weight. f. Total air content. g. Design slump and allowable range after additions of all admixtures. h. Compressive strength tests.
3. Shrinkage testing per ASTM C 157. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. 1. Show all reinforcing, top and bottom profile of concrete element, supports below, including
beams, columns and walls, grade beams, concrete walls, joists, etc. framing into element. 2. Provide one continuous elevation at 1/4” (1:48) scale for all beams, joists or walls in a
continuous line. Show pockets and openings in shear walls, structural slabs, beams, elevations of top of beams, walls, columns, sections through beams, pilasters, columns, and placing sequence of reinforcing for items with more than one reinforcing layer.
3. Show locations of approved construction joints, locations of pour strips, splices of reinforcing, type of splice used and splice location. Identify all ASTM A706 and epoxy coated reinforcing locations.
D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of Architect.
E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by Manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Waterstops. 7. Curing compounds. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Vapor retarders. 10. Repair materials.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 2
G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: 1. Aggregates: Submit test reports indicating that aggregates are not potentially reactive based
on the ASTM C295 or ASTM 1260 testing limits set forth in Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). Alternatively, submit ASTM C1567 test reports indicating that the combination of mix ingredients reduces the expansion due to Alkali aggregate reactivity such that the mix complies with Section 5.2 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). All tests for submitted reports shall have been performed within one year of the submittal date.
H. Minutes of preinstallation conference if held. J. Placement Notification: Submit notification to Architect at least 24 hours in advance of placement. K. Certification of chloride screen effectiveness for penetrating sealers. L. Proposed location of saw cut joints not indicated on Drawings. M. Curing compound data demonstrating specified moisture loss performance. N. Evaporative retarder product and application data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician,
Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. 2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing
Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.
3. Personnel inspecting concrete reinforcing steel have current certification as an ACI Concrete Construction Inspector or have experience in concrete construction acceptable to the Architect.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same Manufacturer’s plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single Manufacturer.
E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, “Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.”
F. Formwork: Contractor shall be responsible for design and engineering of formwork. Design of formwork and preparation of formwork drawings shall be performed under supervision of a qualified engineer registered in the state of the Project.
G. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, “Specifications for Structural Concrete,” Sections 1 through 5. 2. ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.”
H. Mockups: Only required for exterior colored slabs to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately ten (10 sq.ft.) sq. ft. slab-on-grade in the location indicated or, if
not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion. J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following: a. Contractor’s superintendent. b. Ready-mix concrete Manufacturer. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Retain first subparagraph below if special concrete finishes are included in Project. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor. f. Owner’s Testing/Inspection Agency.
2. Review as applicable to Project special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 3
concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.
3. Minutes of the meeting shall be recorded by Contractor and distributed to all parties within five days. Provide one copy to Owner’s representative and Architect.
K. Record of Work: Maintain a record listing time and date of all structural concrete placement. Such record shall be kept until completion of Project and shall be available to Architect for examination at any time.
L. Pre-Placement Inspection: Formwork installation, reinforcing steel placement and installation of all items to be embedded or cast into concrete shall be verified by Contractor prior to placement.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement if present.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and
as follows: a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that will produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. Provide factory-made sections with curved, closed faces around drilled piers. Curved face diameter shall match drilled pier diameter. Void forms intended to remain in place after concrete placement shall degrade sufficiently within three months after concrete placement.
F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum. G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or
adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
J. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 1/2” inch to the plane of
exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or
waterproofing. 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than twenty-five (25%) percent.
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 4
C. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed, where welding of reinforcement or field bending is noted on Drawings.
D. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 ASTM A 706/A 706M for bars that may be field bent, deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M or ASTM A 934/A 934M for bars that are prefabricated, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.
E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn F. Epoxy-Coated Wire: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A, Type 1 coated, as-drawn, plain steel wire, with
less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch wire length. G. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn
steel wire into flat sheets. H. Epoxy-Coated Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated, Type 1, plain
steel. 2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.
B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.
C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.
D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice,” of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire
bar supports. E. Mechanical Connectors: Mechanical couplers shall develop in tension or compression, as required, at
least 125% of bar yield strength. Connectors shall comply with ICC-ES acceptance criteria, ACI 133. 2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, Type I/II, gray. Alternate cementitious materials
when proposed to control alkali-silica reactions and tested as part of a representative concrete mix in accordance with ASTM C1567, may be used Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: Subject to approval. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F or C.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years’ satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. All course and fine aggregate shall be tested per ASTM C 295 or ASTM C 1293 in accordance with Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). 1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.05 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by Manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 7. Mid-Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
C. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 5
reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and not containing more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CN-CI. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete CNI. c. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; ARRMATECT, EUCON BCN,
or EUCON CIA. d. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI.
D. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Rheocrete 222+. b. Cortec Corporation; MCI- 2000 or 2005NS. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI-S. d. Sika Corporation; FerroGard 901.
2.07 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. VOC Content: Liquid floor treatments shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. Shall not be less than 40% silane or 9% polysiloxane or shall be 20% siloxane. Provide certification of 90% chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with the procedure in NCHRP Report Number 244 “Southern Climate Exposure”.
C. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces. Shall not be less than 40% silane or 9% polysiloxane or shall be 20% siloxane. Provide certification of 90% chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with the procedure in NCHRP Report Number 244 “Southern Climate Exposure”.
D. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment for Vehicular Surfaces: Material suitable for application on horizontal surfaces subject to vehicle traffic shall contain not less than 40% silane. Provide certification of 95% chloride screen effectiveness when tested in accordance with procedure of NCHRP Report Number 244 “Southern Climate Exposure” at Manufacturer’s recommended rate of application. Also provide certification that product meets Alberta Transportation and Utilities BT-003 at 45% relative moisture results greater than 85% both initial and post abrasion performance.
2.08 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm. b. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm. d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm. e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm. g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar. h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid. j. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin. k. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. m. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. n. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM. p. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm. q. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film. r. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid. s. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. t. Unitex; PRO-FILM. u. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 6
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,
dissipating. Film must chemically break down in a four to six week period. Provide data from independent laboratory indicating maximum moisture less than 0.30 kg/m2 at 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.
F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. Shall have test data from an independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture less than 0.30 kg/m2 at 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156.
1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A. Shall have test data from an independent laboratory indicating a maximum moisture less than 0.30 kg/m2 at 72 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM C 156. 1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.09 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene
butadiene. C. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill
or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab
anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment Manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment Manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in
thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as
defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping Manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and
application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by
topping Manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. 1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on
laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland
cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent.
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 for reinforced concrete exposed to chlorides in service, 0.30 for other reinforced concrete, and 1.00 for reinforced concrete that will be dry and protected from moisture in service, percent by weight of cement.
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 7
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete where indicated. E. Performance and Design Requirements:
1. Shrinkage: Shrinkage strain, determined in accordance with ASTM C 157 as amended and modified herein, shall not exceed the values below for each concrete class: a. Amendments and modifications to ASTM C 157:
1) Storage: After initial 24 hour comparator reading, specimens are placed back in lime saturated water until age of seven days. At seven days another comparator reading is taken. This reading is used as the base reading which is used to calculate percent shrinkage. The specimens are stored at 50% humidity and 73° F .
2) Test Reports: Report gage length (average of three) after 4, 7, 14, 28, and 56 days. In addition to the information required by ASTM C 157, Section 11, shrinkage test reports shall include gage lengths (initial length measurements) used to determine reported shrinkage strains.
b. 28 Day Shrinkage Strain: Shrinkage strains shall not exceed the following: 1) Concrete for slab-on-grade placed directly on vapor barrier: 0.046%. 2) Concrete for bearing walls (basement walls excluded) and/or columns:
0.046%. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Proportion structural normal-weight concrete mixture as noted on Drawings, unless aggregates are “potentially reactive” with alkalis based on the ASTM C 295 or ASTM C 1260 or ASTM C 1293 testing limits of Section 5.1 of “Guide Specification of Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association). When aggregates are “potentially reactive”, compliance with Section 5.2 of “Guide Specification for Concrete Subject to Alkali-Silica Reactions” (2007 Portland Cement Association) must be established through ASTM C 1567 testing for proposed alternate concrete mixture. Submit test reports in accordance with Part I of this Specification.
2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice.” 2.14 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. Concrete adjacent to elevator hoistway shall be installed to tolerances required by elevator Manufacturer.
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces. 3. The permissible irregularity is a cumulative value due to all sources including layout,
plumbness, member size, formwork offsets, joints, and member levelness. The permissible irregularity shall also apply between adjacent concrete surfaces on opposite sides of construction joint, expansion joint or shrinkage pour strip if present.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide
crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 8
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges between horizontal and vertical surfaces of permanently exposed concrete. Do not chamfer corners and edges between adjacent vertical surfaces.
J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.
K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to Manufacturer’s written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
N. All formwork surfaces that support concrete exposed to view must be accepted by Architect prior to concrete placement.
3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances
in Section 7.5 of AISC 303 “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” a. Tolerance of Embedded Items: Comply with ACI 117.
1) Anchor Rods: a) Plumbness: Within +/- 1/16 inch over anchor rod projection.
2) Embedded Plates and Weldments: a) Location: +/- 1 inch vertical, +/- 1 inch horizontal. b) Plumb and Alignment: 1/4 inch in 12 inches (1:48).
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. Where masonry or veneer intersects concrete, provide one vertical dovetail slot for each 8 inches of masonry thickness. Where concrete serves as the backup, space slots at 16 inches on center.
3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50°F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. 1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that
supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
3. Leave formwork and shoring in place a minimum of 15 days after concrete placement unless reshoring is used.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.
3.05 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with CRSI’s “Manual of Standard Practice” for placing reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would
reduce bond to concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 9
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. 1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.
D. Size, length, number and placement of supports shall be sufficient as to maintain reinforcing position within specified tolerances during construction traffic and concrete placement.
E. On vertical formwork, use approved bar chairs or spacers as required to maintain concrete cover and bar position. Do not staple or use any other metallic fastener to secure bolsters, chairs, etc. to formwork for concrete surfaces exposed to exterior.
F. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
H. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/D 3963M. Use epoxy-coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy-coated steel reinforcement.
3.06 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in
girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders
and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside pilasters integral with walls,
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. Locate at centerline of support or middle third of span.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each
edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
3. Interior Slabs-on-Grade to Receive Carpet or Wood Floor Covering: Construct slabs as large a placement area as practical. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, locate construction joints on column centerlines. Provide control joints at column centerlines and at intervals not more than 30 feet each way.
4. All Other Interior Slabs-on-Grade: Unless noted otherwise on Drawings, locate construction joints on column centerlines. Locate control joints where shown on Drawings. If not shown, provide control joints at column centerlines and at intervals not more than 10 feet each way.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below
finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 07 92 00 “Joint Sealants,” are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.
3.07 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.
B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 10
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and
in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface
plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40º F for three successive
days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.
F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90º F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor’s option.
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.08 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.
C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.09 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction. 1. No scratch finish on this Project.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 11
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or
sheet waterproofing. D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or
power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view and those to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly
trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with
minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.
b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs except for slabs supported by metal deck.
c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and no limit for levelness, F(L); with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of no limit for levelness, F(L); for suspended slabs supported by metal deck.
3. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch.
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-
bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.
C. What did the fish say when he hit a concrete wall? Dam!
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to Manufacturer’s written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 12
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. Moisture-retaining-cover shall be inspected each day by Contractor. Any areas which do not show condensation on underside of cover or any slab areas which are not wet shall be immediately rewetted and cover replaced to prevent moisture loss. a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive
penetrating liquid floor treatments. c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining
cover or a curing compound that the Manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to Manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound Manufacturer.
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to Manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect’s approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning and that are unacceptable to Architect. Allow Architect and Structural Engineer to observe concrete surfaces upon removal of forms and prior to repair of surface defects. Defects in structural concrete shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Structural Engineer. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2
inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete’s durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. Submit proposed repair to Architect for review prior to commencement of work. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects that are unacceptable to Architect. Surface
defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 30 00 - 13
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to Manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to Manufacturer’s written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect’s approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect’s approval. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings and in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 40 00, Quality Control.
3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 45 00 - 1
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 03 45 00 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install all precast concrete window sills, anchoring devices and other pieces in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer shall have at least five (5) years experience in manufacturing architectural precast concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Comply with recommended practices and procedures of Prestressed Concrete Institute (PCI), “Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual,” current edition, and as herein specified. 1. Section 3.5.14 “Architectural Trim Units” 2. Section 4.4 “Reinforcement” 3. Section 4.5 “Connections” 4. Section 5.4.7 “Weather Resistance” 5. All other application sections.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals, and provide the following: 1. Layout, dimensions, and identification of precast units. 2. Details of inserts, connections, joints, and special reinforcement and lifting devices necessary
for handling, erection, and anchoring. B. Samples shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00,
Submittals. C. Submit full-size of each type precast unit required, delivered to job site. Acceptable samples may be
incorporated in construction. Architect’s review will be for color, texture, finish anchoring and general condition only.
D. Manufacturer’s Data 1. Manufacturer’s Data shall be submitted in accordance with Division 01 - General
Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 2. Submit Manufacturer’s specification with installation instructions for proprietary materials
including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixture, joint materials, hardeners, curing materials, and other as requested by Architect.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Deliver precast units to Project Site in such quantities and at such times to assure continuity of installation. Store units to prevent cracking, warping, staining or other damage. Lift and support precast units only at designated lifting or supporting joints.
1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Work shall not begin until the substrate has been completed. B. Work shall be in sequence with surrounding brick and concrete block masonry.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Precast Concrete Units 1. Produce standard-weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregates, admixtures, and
water to produce the following properties: a. Compressive strength not less than 5000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days b. Total air content not less than four (4%) percent nor more than six (6%) percent.
ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE ! ! ! ! ! ! 03 45 00 - 2
2.02 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 B. Low-Allow Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706 C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767 D. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185 E. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 F. Grout: ASTM C476, IBC Sections 2103 and 2104
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Verify shapes and sizes at Project Site prior to fabrication. Coordinate with other trades as required.
3.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate precast concrete units complying with PCI MNL-116 for structural units and MNL-117 for architectural finished exposed units, including dimensions tolerances.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Set and build into precast units anchorage and connection devices, and other items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by precast units.
3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Comply with ACI 301 “Specification for Structural Concrete.” B. Place concrete in continuous operation to prevent formation of seams or planes of weakness in precast
units, using internal and external vibration for consolidation. C. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping,
so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into forms. D. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes during mixing,
placement, and curing. E. Provide permanent markings in precast units to identify lifting points and orientation in structure.
Imprint date of casting on each unit where it will not show in finished structure. F. Cure precast units by low-pressure stream, steam vapor, radiant heat and moisture, or other similar
process. G. Fabricate units to provide finishes in exposed surfaces to match acceptable control samples.
3.05 ERECTION
H. Do not erect precast units until concrete has attained its design ultimate compressive strength. I. Place units plumb, level, and in alignment. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to
hold units in position until permanently connected. Set units on appropriate bearing pads where required.
J. Provide necessary bolts, clips, hangers and other accessories required for installation of precast units, galvanized after fabrication.
K. Anchor units in final position by bolting, welding, and grouting as required to safely secure the units. L. At bolted connections, use lock washers or other acceptable means to prevent loosening of nuts. M. At welded connected, apply touch-up paint of primer on painted surfaces and galvanizing repair
material on galvanized surfaces. 3.06 PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
A. In addition to Quality Control tests and evaluations, precast units may be rejected for any of the following: 1. Defects as listed in PCI “Architectural Precast Concrete Design Manual.” 2. Exposed-to-view surfaces with finish deficiencies. 3. Damaged during construction operations. 4. Excessive dimensional variations. 5. Units which have not been properly secured.
B. Repair or replace unacceptable precast units as directed by Architect.
END OF SECTION 03 45 00 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE
END DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
UNIT MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04 01 20 - 1
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 04 01 20 UNIT MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Restoration cleaning of exterior masonry brick and split-face block surfaces by use of chemical restoration cleaners and paint strippers.
B. See Drawings for specific location. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Product Data accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator. 1. Certification that applicator is experienced in the application of the specified products. 2. List of recently completed exterior masonry restoration cleaning projects, including project
name and location, names of owner and architect, and description of cleaning products used, substrates, environmental regulations, and application procedures.
C. Environmental Regulations: Describe testing, handling, treatment, containment, collection, transport, disposal, and discharge of hazardous wastes and cleaning effluents. Submit applicable local environmental regulations.
D. Protection: Describe methods for protecting surrounding areas, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and nonmasonry surfaces during the work from contact with chemical restoration cleaners and paint strippers, residues, rinse water, fumes, wastes, and cleaning effluents.
E. Surface Preparation: Describe surface preparation to be completed before application of restoration cleaners and paint strippers.
F. Application: Describe application procedures of restoration cleaners and paint strippers. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Experienced in the application of the specified products. 2. Employs persons trained for the application of the specified products.
B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting two (2) weeks before the start of exterior masonry restoration cleaning. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, applicator, and PROSOCO representative. Review environmental regulations, test area location, protection of surrounding areas and nonmasonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and coordination with other work.
C. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations regarding testing, handling, treatment, containment, collection, transport, disposal, and discharge of hazardous wastes and cleaning effluents.
1.04 TEST AREA
A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine the suitability of product for the specific surfaces. Apply each restoration cleaner to test area to determine dilution rates, dwell times, number of applications, compatibility, effectiveness, application procedures, effects of pressure rinsing, and desired results.
B. Apply restoration cleaners to test area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow 48 hours or until test area is thoroughly dry, before evaluating final appearance and results. Do not begin full-scale application until test area is inspected and approved by the Architect. 1. Size: Minimum 4 feet by 4 feet each. 2. Location: As determined by the Architect. 3. Restoration Cleaners: Number of test panels as required to completely test each restoration
cleaner with each type of substrate and with each type of material or stain to be cleaned. C. Test all cleaning effluents generated by the restoration cleaning and paint stripping of the test area to
determine any hazardous characteristics. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations regarding testing, handling, treatment, containment, collection, transport, disposal, and discharge of hazardous wastes.
UNIT MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04 01 20 - 2
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, Storage, and Handling shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
B. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.
C. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a cool, dry, well ventilated place, out of the sun. Store away from all other chemicals and potential sources of contamination. Keep lights, fire, sparks, and heat away from containers. Do not drop onto or slide across sharp objects. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not clean masonry surfaces when temperatures are below freezing or will be overnight, to avoid harm to masonry. Clean masonry surfaces only when air and masonry surface temperatures are 40°F and above. Allow adequate time for masonry to thaw if freezing conditions exist prior to application.
B. Inspect area to be cleaned prior to Work. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. PROSOCO, Inc., 3741 Greenway Cir, Lawrence, KS 66046, 800.255.4255. Contact: Ed Nagel, Nagel & Associates, 720.490.5922. B. Approved Substitute.
2.02 RESTORATION CLEANERS
A. Restoration Cleaner: “Sure Klean Light Duty Restoration Cleaner”. General-purpose mildly acidic restoration cleaner for brick, terra cotta, sandstone, granite, and many other masonry surfaces. Product is safer for surrounding building materials, landscaping and the environment compared to heavy-duty cleaners. 1. Form: Clear, gelled liquid. 2. Total Solids: N/A. 3. pH: 1.5 – 2.0. 4. Specific Gravity: 1.12. 5. Flash Point: None.
6. Freeze Point: 5º F. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION
A. Protect surrounding areas, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and nonmasonry surfaces during the work from contact with chemical restoration cleaners and paint strippers, residues, rinse water, fumes, wastes, and cleaning effluents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Test window glass not specified to be replaced for compatibility with chemical cleaning products to determine required protection.
C. Divert and protect pedestrian and auto traffic. D. Avoid wind drifting of spray of chemical cleaning products, residues, and rinse water.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Before applying, read “Preparation” and “Safety Information” sections in the Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet for Light Duty Restoration Cleaner. Do not dilute or alter.
B. Application: Masonry 1. Prewet the surface with clean water. 2. Apply cleaner using a brush or roller. Gently scrub to improve results. 3. Let cleaner dwell for 5 to 15 minutes. Gently scrub heavily soiled areas. Don’t let cleaner dry
on the surface. If drying occurs, lightly wet treated surfaces with fresh water. Reapply the cleaner in a gentle scrubbing manner.
4. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. The best combination of rinsing pressure and water volume is provided by masonry washing equipment generating 400-1000 psi with a water flow rate of 6-8 gallons per minute delivered through a 15-45 degree fan spray tip. Equipment should be adjustable to reduce water flow rate and rinsing pressure as required for controlled
UNIT MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING 04 01 20 - 3
cleaning of more sensitive surfaces. See also “Equipment” section of the Product Data Sheet. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 above if necessary.
C. Direct Sunlight - Application to surfaces exposed to direct sunlight or high winds may cause rapid drying. When possible, clean when surfaces are shaded from direct sunlight. Wet hot surfaces with fresh water immediately before applying cleaner to remove loose soiling and reduce surface temperature. Do not let cleaner dry on the surface. If drying occurs, lightly wet treated surfaces with fresh water and reapply the cleaner in a gentle scrubbing manner.
END OF SECTION 04 01 20 – UNIT MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
BRICK MASONRY 04 21 13 - 1
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 04 21 13 BRICK MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS
A. Comply with recommendations of Brick Industry Association (BIA). B. American Standard Test Methods
1. ASTM C652 Hollow Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C216 Standard Specification for Facing Brick. 3. ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for masonry units, cementitious products for mortar and grout, coloring pigments, and masonry accessories. Submit samples of exposed masonry units and colored pigmented mortar. Submit accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.03 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide units of size indicated and in special shapes for applications where forms, size or finish cannot be produced from standards shapes.
1.04 DELIVER, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Install mock-up wall panel prior to installation of masonry Work. Erect panel minimum 4’-0” wide x 6’-0” high to indicate proposed color range, bond, mortar and workmanship. Include installation of all components to include accessories, precast concrete, and other masonry units as indicated in this Specification. Do not begin masonry Work until Architect has accepted sample panel. Panel shall be used as standard for quality of appearance, materials, and construction. Demolish sample panel at completion of Project and dispose of all materials.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Grade SW Type FBX. 1. Texture and Color: Match Existing. 2. Size: 4”x2-2/3”x8” nominal). Verify match existing. 3. Shape: Hollow Unit and solid bricks for exposed ends and cut locations.
B. Mortar Materials and Mixes: Provide Type N mortar complying with ASTM C 270 Proportion Specification for material and mortar types of composition indicated below: 1. Cementitious Material: Portland Cement Type I, II, or III natural color as required to produce
mortar color as selected by Architect. 2. Aggregate: Natural or manufactured sand. 3. Use Type S hydrated lime. 4. Do not add admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 5. Mortar color shall be selected from Solomon Colors iron oxide pigments Type N, “A” Series
colors, or Approved Substitute. C. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices: Hot-Dip Galvanized Wire ASTM A 82 for
uncoated wire. 1. Joint Reinforcement: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods
and plain cross rods straight lengths of not less than ten (10’) feet and of widths to fit wall thicknesses indicated, with prefabricated corner and tee units. Provide ladder design with single pair of side rods, min. 9 ga.
2. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Two piece assemblies consisting of 0.1875” diameter wire tie section and 0.1046” thick sheet steel anchor section, with latter incorporating strap stamped into center of anchor section, for min. 2” embedment. a. Product: Submit to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products: 1) DW-10; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
BRICK MASONRY 04 21 13 - 2
2) D/A 213 Assembly; Dur-O-Wall, Inc. 3. Masonry wire Ties: 3/16” cold-drawn steel wire, with 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coating, Z-shaped
for solid unit masonry or rectangular shape for hollow unit masonry. 4. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated form 16-gauge steel sheet or 3/8” steel rod, 1.5
oz. hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication. D. Flashing Materials:
1. Rubber Masonry Flashing, formed into a 20 mil flexible sheet, for concealed applications. 2. Galvanized metal flashing for non-concealed applications.
E. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber with corner and tee accessories (to maintain lateral stability of wall), 60-80 Shore A hardness.
F. Wall Opening Weeps by Masonry Technology Inc. (MTI), 800.879.3348, Product No. WOW9095 or CV 5010 as conditions necessitate or Approved Substitute.
G. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, 30 lb. Type. H. Mortar Net: 1 in. thick, continuous row at bottom of wall, or at intermediate wall locations at lintel
and weep locations as indicated on Drawings. Install per Manufacturer’s instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERLAYMENT
A. Install horizontally, one (1) layer lapping succeeding courses by minimum 2 inches. B. Lap bottom layer of underlayment over flashing where it occurs.
3.02 BRICK INSTALLATION A. Lay brick plumb and true to lines. B. Install masonry units in the running bond pattern indicated. C. Cut exposed masonry units, where necessary, with a power saw. Avoid the use (by proper layout) of
less-than-half-size units. D. Wet brick of high absorption, prior to laying. E. Lay with completely filled mortar joints. F. Do not furrow bed joints. G. Butter ends of brick with sufficient mortar to fill head joints. H. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against two adjacent brick in place. J. Hold uniform joint sizes as indicated, or if not indicated, hold joint sizes to suit modular size of
masonry units. K. Fill vertical, longitudinal joints, except in cavity walls. L. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings. M. Provide open cavities as shown on the Drawings. N. What do you get when you cross a chicken and a cement mixer? A bricklayer.
3.03 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Joint Reinforcement: Reinforce horizontal joints with continuous masonry joint reinforcement, spaced 16” vertically, except spaced 8” in parapet walls, and immediately above and below openings, for a distance of 2 feet beyond jambs of opening. Do not bridge control and expansion joints in the wall system.
B. Ties: Install ties spaced 16” vertically and 24” horizontally. Provide additional ties at openings, maximum spacing 8”O.C. and within 12 inches of opening.
C. Anchors: Bond ends of walls to structure with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 2’-0”, except as otherwise shown.
D. Movement Joints: Provide control and expansion joints at locations shown, and keep clean of mortar droppings.
E. Flashing: Provide flashing in exterior masonry work as indicated, with weepholes in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing, maximum 2’-0” o.c. Fold flashing to be continuous around openings and corners.
F. Sealant Recesses: Leave joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames and other wall openings. 1. Depth: Uniform 3/4”. 2. Width: 1/4” to 3/8”.
G. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other Work, and grouting for secure anchorage.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Comply with BIA Specifications regarding job conditions relating to protection of Work and cold weather construction.
BRICK MASONRY 04 21 13 - 3
B. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Use experienced mechanics with workmanlike manner. Do not injure the strength or appearance of finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for the purpose of building-in members not allowed.
3.05 FINAL CLEANING
A. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and non-metallic scrape hoes or
chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire masonry
work. 3. Clean brick masonry by bucket and brush hand cleaning methods described in BIA
“Technical Note #20 Revised” using detergent cleaner.
END OF SECTION 04 21 13 - BRICK MASONRY
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES
A. Concrete masonry construction shall conform to all requirements of “Specification for Concrete Masonry Construction, ACI 531.1-79,” published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Mich., except as modified by the supplemental requirements below, and with the recommendations of the National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).
B. Structural Masonry shall also conform to IBC, Chapter 21. C. Comply with recommendations of National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA).
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop Drawings for fabrication, bending and placement of reinforcing complying with ACI 315, and accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N1, Light weight 1900 psi units in modular size 4”x8”x16” split-face in color to match existing, with accessory units as required.
B. Specified compressive strength (f`m) of structural units shall be substantiated according to International Building Code (IBC) Section 2105.2.1.
C. Mortar: 1. Mortar Materials and Mixes: Provide mortar complying with ASTM C 270 Proportion
Specification for material and mortar types of composition indicated: Type S as shown on the Drawings. Minimum cube strength of 1800 PSI.
D. Joint Reinforcement, Ties and Anchoring Devices: Hot-Dip Galvanized Wire ASTM A 82 for uncoated wire. 1. Masonry Veneer Anchors: Two piece assemblies consisting of 0.1875” diameter wire tie
section and 0.1046” thick sheet steel anchor section, with latter incorporating strap stamped into center of anchor section. a. Product: Submit to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following
products: 1) DW-10; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2) D/A 213 Assembly; Dur-O-Wall, Inc.
2. Miscellaneous Masonry Anchors: Fabricated form 16-gauge steel sheet or 3/8” steel rod, 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coating after fabrication.
E. Reinforcement: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed bars and as noted. F. Grout: ASTM C476, minimum compressive strength 2000 psi. Grout shall be supplied by Transit
Track.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Follow ACI 305R-77 (Rev. 1982) for “hot” weather procedures and ACI 306R-78 for “cold” weather procedures.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 1. Level 1 Special Inspection per Table 1704.5.1 of the 2006 IBC shall be provided at all
structural masonry walls. 2. Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C780. 3. Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C1019. 4. Prisms: Tested per ASTM C1314. 5. Testing Frequency: Mortar, grout and prism tests performed during construction for each
5000 sq.ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 2
3.03 GROUTING A. Low lift grouting shall be allowed used according to 2006 IBC and the recommendations of NCMA. B. High lift grouting will not be allowed unless first reviewed and approved by Structural Engineer.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. Remove all dirt, ice, loose rust and scale from walls and reinforcing prior to installation.
3.05 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, lay CMU in running bond.
1. Lay all masonry plumb and true to lines. Provide full mortar joints. Mortar beds shall be
spread smooth or only slightly furrowed. 2. In laying masonry, avoid over-plumbing and pounding of the corners and jambs to fit
stretcher units after being set in position. 3. Where an adjustment must be made after the mortar has started to harden, remove mortar and
replace with fresh mortar. 4. Where cutting of units is necessary, make cuts with a motor-driven masonry saw. Avoid the
use of less-than-half-size units by proper layout. 5. Joints shall be plumb or level. Tool exposed joints. 6. Adjust masonry dimensions and install starter units as required to eliminate small cuts and to
maintain bond. B. Cutting and Patching: Cut and patch masonry wherever necessary for other trades. Use experienced
mechanics with workmanlike manner. Do not injure the strength or appearance of finished work. Cutting of finished masonry for the purpose of building-in members not allowed.
3.06 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Anchors: Bond ends of walls to structure with masonry units or provide anchors spaced 2’0”, except as otherwise shown.
B. Movement Joints: Provide control and expansion joints at locations shown, and keep clean of mortar droppings.
C. Flashing: Provide concealed flashing in exterior masonry work, with weepholes in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing, maximum 2’0” O.C.
D. Sealant Recesses: Leave joints around outside perimeters of exterior doors, window frames and other wall openings. 1. Depth: uniform 3/4” (19 mm). 2. Width: 1/4” (6.4 mm) to 3/8” (9.5 mm).
E. Build other work into the masonry work as shown, fitting masonry units around other work, and grouting for secure anchorage.
F. Reinforcing: Install in grout filled cells as indicated, secure against displacement, splice by lapping. 3.07. PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protection of Completed Work from Physical Damage: Protect projecting masonry liable to damage from setting.
B. Replace any masonry work showing damage or disfiguration during the progress of work in its entirety. Patching or hiding of defects not permitted.
3.08 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Provide flush mortar joints and tool slightly concave. B. Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar. Dry brush masonry
surface after mortar has set at end of each day’s work and after final pointing. Clean exposed masonry to comply with masonry manufacturer’s directions and applicable NCMA “Tek” bulletins. Test cleaning methods on sample panels before proceeding with cleaning of entire masonry wall.
C. Upon completion of pointing and cleaning, leave the work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken masonry, ready for sealer by others.
D. Cleaning process should be accomplished with Fabrikleen masonry cleaner, or approved substitute. Do not use muriatic acid.
END OF SECTION 04 22 00 – CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
END OF DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1
DIVISION 05 – METALS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: 1. Provide connections as shown or noted on Drawings. Design of connections not shown or
noted shall be provided by Structural Engineer-of-Record upon request. 2. Alternate connections may be submitted by the Contractor with prior approval of Structural
Engineer-of-Record. Connections shall be designed for loads indicated on drawings or provided by Structural Engineer-of-Record. Loads indicated are developed using Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) load combinations unless noted otherwise. One set of calculations for all alternate connections signed and sealed by a qualified engineer shall be submitted with or in advance of applicable shop drawings.
3. Construction: Refer to the Drawings for description of lateral load resisting system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Shop and Erection Drawings: Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
A. Show location, fabrication, and assembly of structural-steel components. 1. Location of each piece or detail within the structure. 2. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 3. Include embedment piece and setting drawings. 4. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and
show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.
5. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.
6. Drawings submitted in multiple packages shall contain individual submittals complete with all applicable erection drawings, details, and piece drawings.
7. Reproduction of Contract Documents is not permitted. 8. Provide schedule for submittal of shop and erection drawings.
B. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel,” for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing
C. Charpy V-Notch testing results for heavy sections and weld metal when required. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and Fabricator. E. Welding certificates. F. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers,
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. G. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. J. Product Test Reports: For the following if present on project:
1. Revise list below to suit Project. Insert alternative design bolts if required. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Tension-control, high-strength bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 2
C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC’s Sophisticated Paint Endorsement or SSPC-QP 3, “Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators.”
D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.”
E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303 as amended below:
a. Section 3.2: Replace entire section with the following: “Requirements for structural steel including quantities, sizes, locations, arrangement, and details shall be shown or noted in the overall Contract Drawing package. Fabricator is responsible for incorporating all such information from structural, architectural, mechanical, and electrical drawings, as well as those of other disciplines.”
b. Section 3.5: Remove all text after first sentence. c. Section 4.4: Revise second sentence to read the following: “The shop and erection
drawings shall be returned in accordance with the schedule defined in Division 1 of the project Specification. In the absence of such schedule, the Owner’s Designated Representative for Design shall return submittals within 14 calendar days of receipt from the Owner’s Designated Representative for Construction.”
2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.”
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
C. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with Manufacturer’s labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner’s testing and inspecting agency observes
repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with Manufacturers’ written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating
ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. 1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating Manufacturers’ recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than twenty-five (25%) percent.
B. W-Shapes: As indicated on Drawings. C. Channels, Angles, Shapes: As indicated on Drawings. D. Plate and Bar: As indicated on Drawings. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: As indicated on Drawings. F. Steel Pipe: As indicated on Drawings or in Section 05 50 00, Metal Fabrications. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements, 70 Series
1. Conform to Charpy V-Notch test requirements of AISC 360. 2. What is a happy smiling structural engineer's philosophy? I-beam therefore I am.
2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Use Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies whenever possible unless indicated otherwise.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 3
B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C,) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain.
D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain.
E. Headed Anchor Rods: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain.
F. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain.
G. Rebar: Rebar used for welding shall meet the requirements of ASTM A-706. Minimum bend diameters per ACI 318.
H. Expansion Anchors, Screw Anchors, and Adhesive Anchors: Size and Manufacturer as indicated on Drawings. Complete assemblies with required rods, nuts, washers, and adhesive system as applicable. Installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Current ICC approval and published ICC Research Report required. 1. Finish for use in conditioned environments free from potential moisture (interior): Plain or in
accordance with Manufacturer’s standard. 2. Finish for use in exposed or potentially wet environments and for attachment of exterior
cladding materials: Galvanized in conformance with ASTM A 153 or stainless steel, Series 300.
2.03 PRIMER
A. Primer: Where steel is to be field painted, provide fabricator’s standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20. 2.04 GROUT
A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength = 6000 psi.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. Minimum compressive strength = 6000 psi. Required where grout is exposed to view or weathering.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and AISC 360. 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings
until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming
operations, if applicable. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.
1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal
surfaces. Do not enlarge bolt holes by burning. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 4
E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel
surfaces. G. Splices: Splicing of members to obtain required lengths is not permitted without prior approval of
structural Engineer-of-Record unless indicated on the Drawings. H. Substitutions: Where exact sizes and weights indicated on Drawings are not readily available, secure
approval of alternate sizes from Structural Engineer-of Record in time to prevent Project delay. 2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.
2.07 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to
a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded, including top flange of beams to receive steel headed stud
anchors. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces not otherwise indicated to be painted that are not exposed to view or weather in the
final condition. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter,
slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to either of the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning.” 2. SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.”
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to Manufacturer’s written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.
2.08 GALVANIZING
A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes in closed sections (HSS or Pipe) that will be exposed in the finished
Work unless they will function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.
2. Galvanize lintels and shelf angles located in exterior walls. 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other
embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 5
design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.
1. Coordinate installation of non-structural steel items that load the temporarily supported steel frame such that temporary supports are adequate to resist all imposed loads.
3.03 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate where indicated on Drawings. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Clean and moisten surfaces to receive grout. Immediately remove any remaining free water. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with Manufacturer’s written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.”
D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean
temperature of 70° F when structure is completed and in service. E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Structural Engineer-of-Record. Finish
thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be
enlarged to admit bolts. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary
connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated on Drawings, back gouge, and grind
steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes
without exceeding tolerances in AISC’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings and in Division 01–General Requirements, Section 01 40 00, Quality Control.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 1
DIVISION 05 – METALS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 05 21 00 STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. SJI’s “Specifications”: Steel Joist Institute’s “Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders.”
B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by Manufacturer to support nonuniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI’s “Specifications.”
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00,
Submittals. 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection
locations and details; and attachments to other construction. C. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer. D. Welding certificates for field welders. E. Manufacturer certificates. F. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. G. Calculations: Submit 1 set of calculations for record for the design of all non-uniformly loaded joists.
Calculations shall demonstrate compliance with the governing building code and with all requirements in the Contract Documents. Calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state of the project.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A Manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI’s “Specifications” 1. Manufacturer’s responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for
designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI’s “Specifications” and SJI’s “Technical Digest 9, Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders” and in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. 1. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level. 2. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live-load deflections no greater than the
following: a. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span, or as indicated.
B. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than sixty (60 %) percent.
2.02 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to “Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series” in SJI’s “Specifications,” with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chords, or as indicated. 1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists and KCS-type K-series steel joists.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 2
B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to “Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series” in SJI’s “Specifications,” with steel-angle or -channel members.
C. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI’s Type S top-chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI’s “Specifications.”
D. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI’s Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI’s “Specifications.”
E. Camber joists according to SJI’s “Specifications” or as indicated. F. Equip bearing ends of joists with Manufacturer’s standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope
exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.03 LONG-SPAN STEEL JOISTS
A. Manufacture steel joists according to “Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series” in SJI’s “Specifications,” with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members; of joist type and end and top-chord arrangements as indicated.
B. Camber long-span steel joists according to SJI’s “Specifications” or as indicated. C. Equip bearing ends of joists with Manufacturer’s standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope
exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.04 PRIMERS
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or Manufacturer’s standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.
2.05 JOIST ACCESSORIES
A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI’s “Specifications” for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span or as schematically indicated; detailed and fabricated according to SJI’s “Specifications”. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability.
B. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction for loads indicated. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated.
C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain.
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. E. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist Manufacturer to
complete joist assembly. 2.06 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.
B. Do not prime paint joists and accessories to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials unless sprayed materials have adequate adhesion with primer.
C. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 0.8 mil thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting
construction according to SJI’s “Specifications,” joist Manufacturer’s written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists
are stabilized during construction.
STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 - 3
4. SJI cautions that a rigid connection of bottom chord to column be made only after application of dead loads. Revise subparagraph below to suit Project. Insert other limitations as required.
5. Bottom chord extension shall not be rigidly connected to supports or other elements unless specifically indicated. Where indicated, delay rigidly connecting bottom chord extensions until substantial dead loads, including metal deck, slabs-on-deck-, roofing materials, and other loads indicated on drawings have been applied.
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates or framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with Research Council on Structural Connection’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts” for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.
E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION
A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and Manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer, to ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 21 00 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 1
DIVISION 05 – METALS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Roof deck. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Shop and Erection Drawings: Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.”
B. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its “Approval Guide, Building Materials” for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. 1. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage,
and handling. 2. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI’s “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.”
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer
recycled content not less than twenty-five (25%) percent. 2.02 ROOF DECK
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Asc Profiles, Inc.; A Blue Scope Steel Company. 2. Canam United States; Canam Group Inc. 3. CMC Joist & Deck. 4. Consolidated Systems, Inc.; Metal Dek Group. 5. Cordeck. 6. DACS, Inc. 7. Epic Metals Corporation. 8. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 9. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 10. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Group. 11. Roof Deck, Inc. 12. Valley Joist; Subsidiary of EBSCO Industries, Inc. 13. Verco Manufacturing Co.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 2
14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corp. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with “SDI
Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck,” in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), grade, thickness
and profile as indicated, shop primed with Manufacturer’s standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. Use at interior locations. a. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), grade, thickness and profile as indicated, G60 zinc coating. Use at exterior locations not indicated to be painted and exposed to view.
3. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), grade, thickness and profile as indicated, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with Manufacturer’s standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. Use at exterior locations indicated to be painted and exposed to view. a. Color: Manufacturer’s standard.
4. Span Condition: As indicated. 5. Side Laps: Overlapped.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide Manufacturer’s standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized closed cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not
less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.
F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated but not less than recommended by SDI Publication No. 31 for overhang and slab depth.
G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.
H. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0747 inch thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inchminimum diameter.
J. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. K. Repair Paint: Manufacturer’s standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, Manufacturer’s written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
B. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. C. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and
bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
D. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. E. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or
adjacent to deck. F. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of
deck, and support of other work. 1. Refer to Drawings for opening sizes requiring reinforcement and typical reinforcement
options. 2. Miscellaneous openings not shown on the Drawings such as those required for vents, risers,
conduits, etc. shall be cut and reinforced if necessary, by the trade requiring the opening.
STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 - 3
G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck with prior written approval of Structural Engineer-of-Record. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck Manufacturer’s written instructions.
3.03 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION
A. Fasten roof-deck panels as indicated on drawings. Provide weld washer at each location where uncoated deck of thickness 0.028 inches or less is being fastened to supporting members by welding.
B. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing length as indicated, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped as indicated.
C. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck Manufacturer’s written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.
D. Sound-Absorbing Insulation: Installation onto bottom of deck at exposed location. Refer to Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section 07 21 29, Sprayed Cellulose Acoustical Insulation.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: As indicated on Drawings. 3.05 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Where deck is exposed to weather or moisture, prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and Manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Repair Painting: Include wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Do not use deck units for storage or as a working platform until permanently secured in
position. 2. Contractor shall assure that completed deck is not damaged by use as a runaway, storage of
materials or subsequent work. 3. Contractor shall assure that construction loads are not allowed which exceed the safe carrying
capacity of the deck.
END OF SECTION 05 31 00 - STEEL DECKING
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 1
DIVISION 05 – METALS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL STUD FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. 3. Soffit framing.
1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site if necessary. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with requirements of the Division 01 - General
Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency. D. Welding certificates. E. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by Manufacturer and witnessed by
a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.
F. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, “Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.”
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. California Expanded Metal Products Co. 3. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. 4. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 5. Craco Mfg., Inc. 6. Custom Stud Inc.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 2
7. Design Shapes in Steel. 8. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Co. 9. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 10. MarinoWARE. 11. Nuconsteel; a Nucor Co. 12. Olmar Supply, Inc. 13. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 14. SCAFCO Corporation. 15. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 16. State Building Products, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 19. Steel Structural Systems. 20. Steeler, Inc. 21. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 22. Telling Industries, LLC. 23. United Metal Products, Inc. 24. United Steel Manufacturing.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 40 00, Quality Control to design cold-formed steel framing.
B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall
height. b. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span for live loads and
1/240 for total loads of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the
insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120º F.
4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall: Upward and downward movement of 1/2 inch. b. Interior Non-Load-Bearing Wall: Upward and downward movement of 2 inches.
5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.
C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design: AISI S213.
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory” or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency. 2.03 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than twenty-five (25%) percent.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).
C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 3
2.04 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness Typical: 0.0451 inch. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness for Studs Supporting a Brick Ledge: 0.0713 inch.
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer’s standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AllSteel & Gypsum Products, Inc. b. ClarkWestern Building Systems, Inc. c. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. d. MarinoWARE. e. SCAFCO Corp. f. Steel Network, Inc. (The). g. Steeler, Inc.
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural design. 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures.
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer’s double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges
designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural design. b. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for one-story structures
2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural design. b. Flange Width: Equal to sum of outer deflection track flange width plus 1 inch.
F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer’s standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure.
2.05 INTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths shown on Architectural Floor Plan, punched, with 1-5/8” stiffened flanges. 1. At the Contractor’s option, 3-5/8” studs may be used in substitution for 4” studs shown.
Contractor is responsible coordination of dimensional changes in all materials that follow from such substitution.
2. Studs shall be of the following minimum gauges: a. 6” web depth = min 20 gauge b. 4” web depth = min 20 gauge c. 3-5/8” web depth = min 18 gauge
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer’s standard U-shaped steel track of web depth to receive studs, unpunched with straight flanges of minimum 1-1/4” flange width, and minimum uncoated-steel thickness matching steel studs.
C. Deflection Track: Manufacture’s standard U-shaped slotted track of web depth to receive studs, unpunched with slotted flanges to allow for 2” maximum deflection, minimum 16 gauge.
D. All walls are full height to bottom of structure above except there otherwise indicated. Walls that are not full height are to be diagonally attached to structure above for perpendicular stability. 1. Diagonal support wire: 12 gauge 2. Light-gauge channels or other rigid members may be used in place of wire either diagonally,
or horizontally to opposite or perpendicular walls
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 4
2.06 CEILING JOIST FRAMING A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths required by
structural design, punched with standard holes, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural design. 2. Flange Width: As required by structural design. 3. Section Properties: As required by structural design.
2.07 SOFFIT FRAMING
A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer’s standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths as required by structural design, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by structural design. 2. Flange Width: As required by structural design. 3. Section Properties: As required by structural design.
2.08 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B. Provide accessories of Manufacturer’s standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates.
2.09 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Anchor Bolts: As indicated. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, Manufacturer’s standard elsewhere.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B. Refer to ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Reference Specification Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Reference Specification Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing. D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from Manufacturer’s standard
widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI’s specifications and standards, Manufacturer’s written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 5
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch .
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire-resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.
C. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.
B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to Manufacturer’s written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,
true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or
riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying
with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or
tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to
those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.
G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints.
H. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section 07 21 00 “Thermal Insulation,” in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. 1. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of Manufacturer’s
approved or standard punched openings.
COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00 - 6
J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.
3.04 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As required by structural design.
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12
inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.
3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to Manufacturer’s written instructions.
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. As indicated on drawings. 3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and Manufacturer’s written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer, to ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 40 06 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1
DIVISION 05 – METALS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welders: AWS certified.
1.02 REFERENCES A. Metal Fabrication Work: Comply with AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. Exposed Metal Fabrication Work: Comply with Section 10 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel
of AISC Code of Standard Practice. C. Welding: Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code - Steel D1.1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show details of fabrication, assembly and installation including templates for anchor
bolt placement and submit in accordance with Division 01– General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Samples: Show samples of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. C. Submit certification by Fabricator that handrails and guardrails have been designed by a Structural
Engineer licensed in the state of Colorado, and that the completed handrail installation conforms to ASTM E985 for structural performance base on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E894 and E935.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Material to be Installed by Others: Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices which are embedded in cast-in-place concrete construction or masonry construction to the project site in time to be installed before the start of cast-in-place concrete or masonry work. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for the installation of anchor bolts and other devices. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: For work exposed to view, use materials selected for their smoothness and freedom from surface blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36. C. Steel Bar Grating: ASTM A569 or A36. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, or ASTM A501. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, type and grade as required for design loading (if applicable), black finish
unless galvanizing indicated; standard weight Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated. F. Pipe Bollards: Schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe sections for filling with concrete. G. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30. H. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A47. J. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type as indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either galvanized
ferrous castings, malleable iron, coast steel; with steel bolts, washers and shims; hot-dip galvanized. K. Non-Shrink Grout: Refer to Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing. L. Fasteners: Provide bolts, nuts, lag bolts, machine screws, wood screws, toggle bolts, masonry
anchorage devices, lock washers as required for application indicated and complying with applicable Federal standards. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners for exterior applications to comply with ASTM A153.
M. Shop Painting: Apply shop primer to surface of metal fabrications except those embedded in concrete or galvanized; comply with SSPC-PA1 and requirements indicated below:
1. Shop Primer: Fabricator’s standard, fast-curing, lead-free, “universal” primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.
2. Stripe paint edges, corners, crevices, bolts, welds and sharp edges. 3. All interior ferrous metals shall be prime painted, unless noted otherwise.
N. Galvanizing
METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2
1. ASTM A386 for assembled products. 2. All exterior ferrous metal shall be galvanized for painted finish, except for lintels, which shall
be prime painted. 3. ASTM A123 for rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips 1/8” and
thicker. 4. Galvanizing repair paint: MIL-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20, Type I Inorganic.
2.02 FABRICATION A. General
1. Use materials of size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of required size, grade and thickness to produce strength and durability in finished product. Shop-paint all items not specified to be galvanized after fabrication. a. Weld corners and seams continuously; grind exposed welds smooth and flush. b. Form exposed connections with hairline, flush joints; use concealed fasteners where
possible. B. Rough Hardware
1. Furnish custom-fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes for framing and supporting and anchoring woodwork.
C. Ladders 1. Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, and anchorages as
indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3 and OSHA Title 29, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Loose Bearing Plates 1. Provide for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete, as indicated. Drill plates to receive
anchor bolts. E. Loose Steel Lintels: Galvanize and fabricate to sizes indicated on Architectural and Structural
Drawings. F. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports
1. Provide as required to complete Work and not included with structural steel framework. Fabricate of welded construction in as large units as possible; drill and tap as required to receive hardware and similar items. Include required anchors for building into other Work; spaced not more than 24” O.C.
G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim 1. Fabricate to shapes and sizes as required for profiles shown; continuous welded joints and
smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. 2. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages; coordinate assembly and installation with other
Work. H. Steel Pipe Railings
1. Fabricate to dimensions shown, with smooth bends and welded joints using 1 1/4” diameter steel pipe, unless otherwise indicated. Secure posts and rail ends as indicated. Fabricate as detailed to comply with ADA and ICC/ANSI A117.1 accessibility requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation; set Work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for installation to other Work.
B. Set loose items on cleaned bearing surfaces, using wedges or other adjustments as required. Solidly pack open spaces with commercial non-shrink grout material.
3.02 TOUCH-UP
A. Touch-up shop paint after installation. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply same type paint as used in shop. Use galvanizing repair paint on damaged galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00 – METAL FABRICATIONS
END DIVISION 05 - METALS
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES
A. Wood Framing, Blocking, and Furring: Comply with requirements of International Building Code (IBC) and “National Design Specifications for Wood Construction”, 2005 Edition as published by American Forest and Paper Association (AF&PA).
B. Lumber: Comply with “Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber” published by Western Wood Products Association. Each piece of lumber shall be grade stamped.
C. Plywood: Comply with U.S. Product Standard PS 1-07 for Structural Plywood and Plywood Design Specification of the American Plywood Association (APA). Each panel shall be identified with the grade trademark of the APA.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store material off the ground and cover with waterproof covering. B. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division
01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit material certificates for dimensional lumber indicating compliance with selected minimum
design values in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements,
Section 01 33 00, Submittals. C. Submit wood treatment data including treatment plants certificate with indicated requirements in
accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Manufacture lumber, S4S and grade stamped, to comply with Standard PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSC’S Board of Review. 1. Provide lumber with maximum 19% moisture content at time of dressing and shipment, for
sizes 2” or less in thickness. 2. For exposed lumber, apply grade stamps to ends or back of each piece or omit grade stamps
entirely and issue certificate of grade compliance. 2.02 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Provide necessary bolts, screws, nails, clips, plates, straps, hangers, etc. necessary for the completion of rough carpentry. Use correct material of proper size and strength for the purpose intended. Conform to the requirements of this Specification, the notes on the Drawings and applicable building codes. Hot dip galvanize accessories for Work exposed to weather or in ground contact to comply with ASTM A153.
2.03 FRAMING LUMBER
A. Blocking and Furring: Hem-Fir Standard Grade or Better. B. 2 x Treated Framing: Hem-Fir S4S #2 Grade or better. Treat with water-borne preservatives to
comply with AWPA C2 and C9. C. Concealed Boards: Standard grade, any species graded Under WWPA rules or #3 grade Southern
Pine graded under SPIB rules. D. Lumber for Miscellaneous Uses: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Standard grade furring,
grounds, stripping and similar members.
2.04 SHEATHING A. Exterior Walls
1. APA rated C-C 2. 48/24 span rating 3. Thickness as indicated. Refer to Structural Drawings.
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2
2.05 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Provide necessary bolts, screws, nails, clips, plates, straps, hangers, etc. necessary for the completion
of rough carpentry. Use correct material of proper size and strength for the purpose intended. Conform to the requirements of this Specification, the Notes on the Drawings, and applicable building codes. Hot dip galvanize accessories for work exposed to weather or in ground contact to comply with ASTM A153.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL
A. Cooperate with other trades. Provide wood grounds, blocking, backing and framing required for other trades. Cut and patch rough carpentry as required. Cut to fit – beat into place.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install rough carpentry work to comply with “Manual of Framing” by American Forest and Paper Association. (AF&PA) and with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA), unless otherwise indicated. For sheathing, underlayment and other products not covered in above standards, comply with recommendations of Manufacturer of product involved for use intended. Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and cut to fit.
B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates and supporting members using fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or receive finish materials. Install fasteners without splitting wood; fasten panel products to allow for expansion at joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide wood framing members of size and spacing indicated; do not splice structural members between supports. Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking not less than 2” thick, if not blocked by other framing members.
.END OF SECTION 06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 -1
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY _ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Samples 1. Submit samples of the following items:
a. Lumber machined to stock and custom patterns, 2’-0” long x pattern width and thickness, for each configuration, species and grade indicated.
b. Finish one side and one edge of samples for transparent finished items. c. Plywood for transparent finish, 2’0” panel width, finish applied to upper half of each
piece. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Lumber 1. Comply with AWI quality standard for material and fabrication. Manufacture to sizes and
profiles to match existing. 2. Interior Standing and Running Trim for Transparent Finish: Oak Graded Custom under
AWI standard in sizes and shapes to match existing. B. Faced Plywood
1. Provide panels as indicated complying with PS 1/ANSI A199.1. 2. Plywood for Transparent Finish: Oak, Premium Grade, with clear heartwood face veneers
and smooth finished surface, plain face pattern, panel dimensions as indicated. C. Closet and Utility Shelving for White Melamine Veneer Core Plywood. D. Fasteners and Anchorages
1. Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of type, size, material and finish suitable for intended use and required to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible. Hot-dip galvanize fasteners for work exposed to exterior and high humidities to comply with ASTM A 153.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Trim: Extruded flat shaped, finish; self-locking serrated tongue; of width to match
component thickness; color to match top. C. Safety Glass: Clear fully tempered; 1/4” thick minimum. D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. F. Can you get cornered in a round room?
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of one-sixteenth inch
(1/16”). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to
match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. 3.03 FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces and of
types recommended for applied finishes.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06 20 00 -2
D. Finish Work in accordance with AWI - Section 1500 System #6, #7, #8. E. Provide two (2) samples of finished trim, minimum 12” length, for Architect’s approval prior to
commencing staining. 3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.05 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings and fixtures and other debris in accordance with
Division 01- General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION 06 20 00 – FINISH CARPENTRY
PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 1
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 06 41 16 PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES
A. Minimum standards for Work within this section shall be in conformity with the Architectural Woodworking Institute (AWI) Architectural Woodworking Standards (AWS), latest edition, Standards of the Architectural Millwork Industry, as adopted by the Architectural Woodworking Institute.
B. Refer to Sheet A20 for a schedule of plastic laminate selections. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in conformance with AWS Section 1, “Basic Requirements for Architectural Millwork Shop Drawings.
B. Submittals: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
C. Samples: 1. Submit two (2) samples of each laminate and melamine finish to be used, on minimum size
substrate of 6”x12”, in finishes and patterns as selected. 2. Submit a sample of each item of cabinet hardware, in the job specified finish, visible at
exposed surfaces when the cabinet doors and drawers are closed.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance shall be in accordance with Custom Grade of the AWI Architectural Woodwork
Standards, latest edition. B. Qualifications: Contractors and their personnel engaged in the Work shall be able to demonstrate
successful experience with Work of comparable extent, complexity and quality to that shown and specified.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials only when the project is ready for installation and the GC has provided a clean, dry storage area.
B. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate all fabrication, delivery and installation Work with the General Contractor, and other applicable trades.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Millwork shall be Style A: Custom, and Construction Type I: Multiple Self Supporting (and wall-mounted) Units.
B. Cabinets are to be fabricated to the size illustrated, as adjusted to fill the intended area, with trim and fillers as required for flush appearance.
C. Exposed surfaces are to be plastic laminate as selected by the Interior Design Drawings. Interior color to be White, unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
D. Door and drawer front style shall be solid, flat slab, in Type I Flush Style. E. Door and drawer edges are to be Doellken or Approved Substitute edge tape: Machine applied.
Matching color of door and drawer faces. F. Substrate to receive melamine or plastic laminate shall be min 48 pcf particle board. G. Cabinet Construction: Cabinets shall be constructed to dimensions matching so as to align with
existing cabinets to remain. All height, depth, toe space, door and drawer dimensions of existing cabinets are to be verified for purposes of matching.
H. Casework hardware shall be the desired type, Manufacturer, and finish listed as follows: 1. Shelf Pilasters and Rests: Heavy-duty slotted metal pilasters. 2. Shelf Brackets: Heavy-duty brackets for open shelving applications only. 3. Drawer and Door Pulls: Ives 3-1/2” wire pull, US10 finish. 4. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Flush mounted of suitable durability. Key per Client.
PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 2
5. Catches: Magnetic Touch Latch - E.B. Bradley or Approved Substitute. 6. Drawer Slides: Blum Tandem plus Blumotion full-extension concealed, Blum Standard 230M
Series, or KV MuV self-close undercount drawer slides. 7. Hinges: Blum or Approved Substitute 170 deg., self-closing. 8. Other: Blum or Approved Substitute Leveler Legs, as required.
J. Fabrication shall comply to First Class Workmanship, as defined by the AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards
K. Adhesive used shall be Type II. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify the adequacy and proper location of any required backing or support framing. B. Verify that mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other building items (supplied by others) effecting
Work in this section is in place and ready. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install all Work in conformance with AWS, Custom Grade. B. All Work shall be secured in place, square, plumb and level. C. All Work abutting other components shall be properly scribed. D. All mechanical fasteners at exposed and semi-exposed surfaces, excluding installation attachment
screws, shall be countersunk. E. Method of attachment, including the type, size, frequency, and/or spacing of anchoring devises and
fasteners shall comply to AWS minimum requirements or as indicated on the Drawings. F. All installation including attachment of casework shall be in compliance with AWS minimum
requirements. G. Work must meet the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC), ANSI A117.1
Accessibility Guidelines, and the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Before completion of the installation, the Installer shall adjust all moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the installation, Installer shall wipe down all millwork surfaces and shall clean all items installed of pencil or ink marks and broom clean the area of his operations, depositing debris in containers provided by the General Contractor.
END OF SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM 06 64 01 - 1
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 06 64 01 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide and Install at the following locations: 1. All interior walls of Janitorial Rooms to a height of 4’-0” above finish fllor. 2. Full Height behind roof ladders. 3. Behind electric hand dryers, down to floor and 24” wide where hand dryers are installed on
walls not scheduled to receive tile. 4. Where restrooms are not scheduled to receive tile, install full height and width on wall behind
and/or adjacent to toilets, urinals, and lavatories. Do not allow panel edges or joints/trim to interfere with flush mounting of mirrors.
B. Fiberglass reinforced plastic “F.R.P.” panels and trim pieces as required.
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples of panels and trim for color and finish approval in accordance with Division 01-
General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Provide Shop Drawings for layout approval in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. USB Interiors B. Panolam FRP C. Approved Substitute.
2.02 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass reinforced panel “Tufliner” #9121, embossed finish, Minimum Class “C”, Color: Ivory.
Provide PVC moldings at top, panel connections and all corners. Color to match panels. Verify color with Architect prior to ordering.
B. Smooth finish at hand dryer locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Erection of tablet to be as recommended by Manufacturer. B. General: Erect plumb, level and true and securely attached to walls and floors. Exercise particular
care to avoid damage to the finished partitions, walls or floors. C. Panels that are dented, scratched or otherwise damaged will be cause for rejection and replacement.
END OF SECTION 06 64 01 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANEL SYSTEM
END OF DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTICS
DAMPPROOFING 07 11 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 11 00 DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install asphaltic dampproofing at the outside face of all exterior foundation walls,. Start at top of footing and extend up to 6” below finish grade or bottom of sidewalk or paving.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall include spray-applied dampproofing including related caulking, grouting accessories, flashing at all terminations, penetrations, and joints in the substrate.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: System applicator shall have at least five (5) years experience in the application of fluid applied dampproofing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s literature for all products furnished in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials in sealed, undamaged containers, each identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Storage: Store materials in cool dry area out of direct sunlight. Storage area temperature shall not exceed 90° F.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials in accordance with safety and weather conditions recommended by the Manufacturer or as required by local, State and Federal authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Work shall not begin work until the substrate has been completed and all penetrations have been installed so membrane will not be penetrated or damaged by subsequent work.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Completed installation shall be warranted jointly by the Manufacturer and Applicator against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years following completion of the membrane.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPPROOFING
A. Dampproofing shall be cold-applied, emulsified asphalt coating applied to all concrete surfaces (including outside face of concrete tilt-up panels below grade) that will be in contact with earth or backfill. Reference ASTM D1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION
A. The Waterproofing Applicator shall inspect preceding Work before starting application and shall report all unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing. He shall not proceed until conditions which would adversely affect the Work have been corrected.
B. Concrete surface shall be substantially cured, dry, clean, smooth, and free from projections and holes, as required by Manufacturer’s application instructions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Concrete Surfaces
DAMPPROOFING 07 11 00 - 2
1. All differences between adjacent materials exceeding 1/4” out of plane shall be corrected by grinding or chipping of the high spots.
2. Remove laitance, loose material on the surface, grease, oil and other contaminants which will affect bond of the coating. Surfaces shall be vacuum cleaned or clear water washed.
B. Expansion, Control, and Construction Joints: Fill with sealant and backer rod. Seal joint between wall and footing as recommended by the Manufacturer.
C. Cracks: Rout or sawcut cracks exceeding 1/16” in width and fill with sealant as directed above. D. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants which may adversely affect the adhesion or performance of the
coating system and apply metal primer. E. Protect adjacent surfaces, not to receive coating, from overspray.
3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply dampproofing material with approved spray equipment. Extend coating over all previously
sealed and detailed areas. Use non-flow coating material for vertical surfaces. Do not apply if there is a threat of rain or temperature below 40ºF within 24 hours. Allow coating to dry completely before backfilling.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean stains from adjacent surfaces. Wet or damp coating can be removed with water.
END OF SECTION 07 11 00 - DAMPPROOFING
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 13 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 13 13 BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install fluid bituthene system 4,000 waterproofing system at the following locations: 1. Outside face of all exterior foundation walls and where exterior grade is above interior floor
line. Start at outside edge of footing and extend up to 4” below finish grade or bottom of sidewalk or paving.
2. At exterior planters above grade adjacent to building. B. The following work is specified in this section:
1. Waterproofing Membrane 2. Protection Board
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System shall include a completely watertight membrane including related caulking, grouting
accessories, flashing at all terminations, corners, penetrations, and joints in the substrate joints in the membrane and protection board cover.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General 1. Obtain all materials listed in Part 2 - Products from a single manufacturer. The Manufacturer
must have been actively marketing a self-adhesive modified bituminous sheet waterproofing system in the United States for a minimum of fifteen (15) years. A full-time employee of the Manufacturer who is trained in the application of self-adhered rubberized asphalt waterproofing shall be available for consultation and periodic jobsite visits.
B. Applicator Qualifications: System applicator shall have at least five (5) years experience in the application of membrane waterproofing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Samples
1. Submit samples of membrane and samples of protection board. 2. Submit Manufacturer’s technical product data, installation instructions and Volatile Organic
Compound (VOC) content of each component of the waterproofing system.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 -
General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver materials in sealed, undamaged containers, each identified with material name, date of
manufacture and lot number. C. Storage: Store materials in cool dry area out of direct sunlight. Storage area temperature shall not
exceed 90ºF. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate 1. All surfaces shall be properly prepared to receive waterproofing in accordance with
Manufacturer’s recommendations. All concrete shall be properly cured and dried. B. Environmental Requirements
1. All components of the waterproofing system must comply with applicable Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) regulations.
2. Apply Bituthene System 4000 in dry weather when air and surface temperatures are 40ºF or above.
C. Compatibility 1. All joining materials must be compatible with Bituthene System 4000.
D. Protection 1. Protect all vertical waterproofing with Bituthene Protection Board. 2. Protect all horizontal waterproofing with 1/8” Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard.
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 13 - 2
1.07 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Work shall not begin until the substrate has been completed and all penetrations have been installed so membrane will not be penetrated or damaged by subsequent work.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. Completed installation shall be warranted jointly by the Manufacturer and Applicator against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three (3) years following completion of the membrane.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM
A. Waterproofing shall be the Bituthene System 4000 as manufactured by W.R. Grace & Co., CN. The components of Bituthene System 4000 shall be: 1. Bituthene System 4000 Waterproofing Membrane
a. A self-adhesive, cold-applied, composite sheet product consisting of a cross-laminated polyethylene film and a unique rubberized asphalt specifically formulated for use with System 4000 Surface Conditioner.
2. Bituthene System 4000 Surface Conditioner a. Specifically formulated to prepare concrete surfaces for Bituthene System 4000.
3. Bituthene Mastic a. A rubberized asphalt-based mastic.
4. Bituthene Protection and Drainage Board a. W.R. Grace & Co Hydroduct 220 b. A 3/8” thick lightweight, hollow studded expanded polystyrene board with a needle-
punctured polypropylene filter fabric on one side and a smooth polymetric sheet on the other.
c. Connect drainage sheet into foundation drain system using Hydroduct Coil 600. B. All materials shall meet the physical properties listed in the Bituthene General Waterproofing
Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE
A. General 1. The Waterproofing Applicator shall inspect preceding Work before starting application and
shall report all unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing. He shall not proceed until conditions which would adversely affect the Work have been corrected.
B. Moisture Content 1. All concrete shall be properly cured and dried (minimum seven (7) days for normal structural
concrete and fourteen (14) days for lightweight structural concrete). Never apply Bituthene System 4000 over insulating concrete.
2. Concrete surface shall be dry and pass a four hour rubber mat test (no condensation) prior to application of the membrane system. Verify that curing methods used for concrete are compatible with the membrane system.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Concrete Surfaces: All differences between adjacent materials exceeding 1/4” out of plane shall be corrected by grinding or chipping of the high spots.
B. All surfaces to receive waterproofing shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate, sharp protrusions, coarse aggregate, grease, oil, wax, dust, dirt, and debris, as described in the Bituthene General Waterproofing Specification. Surfaces shall be vacuum cleaned or clear water washed.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. General 1. Bituthene System 4000 Surface Conditioner Application
a. The Surface Conditioner is supplied as a concentrate and must be diluted prior to use. b. Apply diluted Surface Conditioner by fine mist. c. Allow Surface Conditioner to dry completely and thoroughly prior to Waterproofing
Membrane application. The Surface Conditioner is considered dry when the substrate returns to its original color. Allow a minimum of thirty (30) minutes drying time.
B. Foundation Walls and Vertical Surfaces
BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 13 - 3
1. Membrane Installation a. Apply Waterproofing Membrane vertically in lengths of seven (7) feet or less. On
higher walls apply two (2) or more lengths of membrane with the upper length overlapping the lower length by at least 2-1/2”. Roll entire membrane completely and firmly with a handroller as soon as possible.
2. Sealing Edges a. Seal all vertical and horizontal terminations with Bituthene Mastic.
3. Formation of Seams a. All edges and end laps must be overlapped at least 2-1/2”. Patch misaligned or
inadequately lapped seams with Waterproofing Membrane. Seal the edges of all patches with a troweling of Bituthene Mastic or Liquid Membrane.
4. Formation of Corners a. Prepare inside corners by installing a 3/4” fillet of Liquid Membrane. Extend Liquid
Membrane 6” in each direction from the corner. b. Outside corners must be free of sharp edges. Prepare outside corners by installing a 12”
wide strip of Waterproofing Membrane centered on the corner. c. Install Waterproofing Membrane over treated inside and outside corners.
5. Details a. Consult the Grace Waterproofing Products Manual for complete details.
6. Protection a. Bituthene Protection Board shall be installed as per Manufacturer’s recommendations
only at locations shown on the Drawings. C. Horizontal Surfaces
1. Membrane installation a. The Waterproofing Membrane shall be applied to the conditioned surface starting at the
low point. Successive sheets should overlap preceding one by 2-1/2”. Roll entire membrane as soon as possible.
2. Details a. Consult the Grace Waterproofing Products Manual for complete details.
3. Testing a. Testing shall be accomplished by flooding entire waterproofed area with a minimum of
2” of water. D. Limitations
1. Bituthene System 4000 Waterproofing Membrane is not designed to be permanently exposed to sunlight.
2. Use of thin set mortar is not recommended. 3. Do not apply when ambient or surface temperatures are below 40ºF (5º C).
END OF SECTION 07 13 13 - BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
LIQUID WATER REPELLANT 07 19 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 19 00 LIQUID WATER REPELLANT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. All surfaces of brick or masonry exposed to weather shall receive an application of liquid water repellant.
B. Apply product to all new and existing exterior masonry. 1.02 TEST AREA
A. Test a minimum 4 ft. by 4 ft. area on each type of masonry. Use the Manufacturer’s application instructions. Let test area protective treatment cure before inspection. Keep test panels available for comparison throughout the protective treatment project.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit copies of Manufacturer’s literature for all products, furnished in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. For maximum effectiveness, surface and air temperatures should be above 40ºF and below 95ºF. Application on windy days may cause rapid evaporation of the solvent carrier and should be avoided.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s representative must visit the site prior to installation and review existing surface conditions and installation procedures with applicators.
B. Architect will make visual inspection after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. Water repellant shall be SureKlean WeatherSeal H-40. B. Manufacturer shall be PROSOCO, Inc., represented by Nagel & Associates, Aurora, CO 720.490.5922,
or Approved Substitute. C. The Active material content shall be minimum 40%, with a flash point of 108ºF per ASTM D 3278, and
freeze point of < minus 22ºF. Total solids shall be minimum 20.5%. D. Substitutions permitted only after documentation per Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01
66 00, Material and Equipment, has been submitted and approved by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION
A. Before applying, read “Protect” and “Precautionary Measures” sections in the Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheet. Refer to the Product Data Sheet for additional information about application. Do not dilute or alter.
3.02 VERTICAL APPLICATION INSTRUCTIONS
A. For best results, apply “wet-on-wet” to a visibly dry and absorbent surface. B. Spray from the bottom up, creating a 6” to 8” rundown below the spray contact point. C. Let the first application penetrate for 5-10 minutes. Re-saturate. D. For Brush or Roller saturate uniformly. Let protective treatment penetrate for 5 to 10 minutes. Brush
out heavy runs and drips that do not penetrate the surface. 3.03 DENSE SURFACES
A. Apply enough product in a single coat to completely wet the surface without creating drips, puddles or rundown.
LIQUID WATER REPELLANT 07 19 00 - 2
B. When repeated cycles are applied to strengthen deteriorated surfaces, projected coverage rates should be reduced by as much as fifty (50%) percent.
END OF SECTION 07 19 00 - LIQUID WATER REPELLANT
BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and Install rigid insulation on outside face of foundation walls (over dampproofing) from top of footing to maximum 4” below grade or top of paving or sidewalk.
B. Furnish and install blanket insulation at all exterior framed walls from finish floor to the underside of structural deck above and at other locations as shown on the Drawings.
C. Furnish and install one layer sound attenuation batts at interior walls, including restrooms, mechanical rooms, offices, work rooms, meeting rooms, and equipment rooms, and as shown on the Drawings.
D. Refer to Section 07 53 00, Single Ply Membrane Roofing for roof insulation at “Flat” roof locations. E. Apply spray cellulose acoustic insulation to inside face of deck of areas of exposed roof structure
(Children’s Library). Refer to Section 07 21 29, Spray Applied Acoustical Insulation. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data for each form and type of insulation indicated in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 33 00, Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide insulation blankets in sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from Manufacturer’s standard thicknesses and widths.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Perimeter Foundation Rigid Insulation. 1. Dow Chemical Co. 2. ACH Foam Technologies. 3. Approved Substitute.
B. Sound Attentuation Insulation/Blanket Insulation 1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2. Certaineed Corp. 3. Approved Substitute.
C. Roof Rigid Insulation, recover board and associated products, accessories and systems from a single manufacturer. 1. Carlisle. 2. Firestone. 3. Atlas. 4. Approved Substitute.
2.03 MATERIALS A. Rigid Insulation: Thicknesses shown x 24” wide polystyrene extruded with square edges at exterior
face of foundation walls and other locations shown. B. Sound Attenuation Insulation: Owens-Corning unfaced batt insulation in thickness to fill wall cavity.
Friction fit. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size recommended by insulation Manufacturer. C. Blanket Insulation: Owen-Corning unfaced thermal batt insulation with R-values as noted on the
Drawings. Friction Fit. 1. Mechanical Anchors: Size and type recommended by insulation Manufacturer.
D. Sill Sealer: Owens Corning 5-1/2” at all exterior framed walls. E. Rigid Roof Insulation: Provide polyisocyanurate and tapered polyisocyanurate boards as indicated on
Drawings, as manufactured by Carlise, Firestone, Atlas, or Approved Substitute. F. Vapor Barrier: Clear, 6 Mil thick Clear Polyethylene, typical at warm side of all exterior walls and
ceilings. NOTE: At exterior walls where 6 inch furring and insulation extend above required height of drywall, polyethylene vapor barrier may not be exposed. At GC’s option, he may choose either of the following alternates: 1. Install foil faced insulation throughout or just above drywall. 2. Extend drywall up to roof deck.
BUILDING INSULATION 07 21 00 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General 1. Comply with insulation Manufacturer’s instructions for installation of insulation. 2. Support insulation units by adhesive or mechanical anchorage or both as applicable to location
and conditions indicated. B. Thermal and Sound Attenuation Fiberglass Batt Insulation
1. Install in framed partitions, full height of partition. 2. Install insulation in small openings, inaccessible for full blanket widths. 3. Install behind electrical outlets and around any and all structural obstructions, jambs, etc., so as
to leave NO VOIDS. 4. Friction fit tight to adjoining Work and adjoining insulation for a tight enclosure free from open
joints, holes, cracks and voids. Attach insulation in manner to ensure stability and eliminate sagging and continuity of vapor barrier. Provide mechanical attachment if necessary. Repair any punctures or tears in the facing by taping.
C. Rigid Roofing Insulation: Apply in thicknesses as indicated Drawing, adhered to surfaces per Manufacturer’s recommended method.
END OF SECTION 07 21 00 - BUILDING INSULATION
SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTIC INSULATION 07 21 29 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 21 29 SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTIC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Apply sprayed cellulose acoustical insulation at locations shown on the drawings. B. Extend insulation across roof deck and beams the full extent of the room bound by walls up to or through
the roof structure. C. Insulation is to be continuous above duct work, light fixtures, clouds, cantilevered and suspended soffits,
etc. D. Sprayed cellulose acoustical insulation is to be applied to only to the top chord of open web bar joists. The
lower chord and web members are to be painted to match the color of the acoustical insulation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other attachments to spray bases are to be placed by other trades prior
to the application of sprayed insulation. B. Ducts, piping, conduit or other suspended equipment shall not be positioned until after the application of
sprayed insulation. C. Roof penetrations to be installed prior to application. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a current listing with ICC. B. Manufacturer shall be in compliance with the current International Building Code. C. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2008 Certified. D. Applicator shall be licensed by Manufacturer. E. Manufacturer must subscribe to independent laboratory follow-up inspection services of Underwriters
Laboratories or Factory Mutual. Each bag shall be labeled accordingly. F. Mock-up: Apply a 100 square foot representative sample to be reviewed by the Architect or Interior
Designer and Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00 Submittals. B. Submit product data that the product meets or exceeds the following specified requirements.
1. Bond strength shall be greater than 100 psf per ASTM E 736. 2. Product shall be Class 1 Class A per ASTM E 84/ UL 723. 3. Non-corrosive per ASTM C 739. 4. Bond Deflection per ASTM E 759: 6” Deflection in 10’ Span – No Spalling or Delamination. 5. Comply with IBC 803.3 and IBC 803.10 stability requirements for interior finishes.
C. Manufacturer's written certification that product contains no asbestos, fiberglass or other man-made mineral fibers.
D. Copy of Manufacturer’s ISO 9001:2008 Certification. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Refer to Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. B. Deliver in original, unopened containers bearing name of Manufacturer, product identification and
reference to U.L. testing. C. Store materials dry, off ground, and under cover. D. Protect liquid adhesive from freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. International Cellulose Corporation - 12315 Robin Boulevard - Houston, Texas 77045 88.444.1252. B. Approved Substitute. 2.02 APPROVED APPLICATORS
A. Approved applicators shall be listed with ICC: 800.444.1252.
SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTIC INSULATION 07 21 29 - 2
2.03 MATERIALS A. K-13 Spray-On-Systems. 1. Color: White. 2. Comply with local Building Code requirements.
3. Material to have been tested in accordance with ASTM E 1042. Testing laboratory must be NVLAP accredited.
4. Minimum Fiber Recycled Content to be 75%. 5. Cannot contain any Urea-Formaldehyde Resins. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions are corrected. B. Verify surfaces to receive spray insulation to determine if priming/sealing is required to insure bonding
and/or to prevent discoloration caused by migratory stains.
3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide masking, drop cloths or other satisfactory coverings for materials/surfaces that are not to receive
insulation to protect from over-spray. B. Coordinate installation of the sprayed cellulose fiber with work of other trades. C. Prime surfaces as required by Manufacturer’s instructions or as determined by examination. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install spray-applied insulation according to Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Install spray-applied insulation to a thickness of 2" to achieve an average NRC of 0.98. C. Cure insulation with continuous natural or mechanical ventilation. D. Remove and dispose of over-spray. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provision of Division 01- General Requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 21 29 - SPRAYED CELLULOSE ACOUSTIC INSULATION
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 25 00 AIR BARRIERS PART 1 – GENERAL: NOTE: This Section applies only to enclosed conditioned spaces for this Project. 1.01 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM D 882: Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting B. ASTM D 1117: Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-Woven Fabrics C. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials D. ASTM E 96: Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials E. ASTM E 1677: Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls F. ASTM E 2178: Test method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit each item in this Article in accordance to the conditions of the Contract and Division
01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product specifications, technical data and installation instructions of
Manufacturer equaling or exceeding those specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer shall have experience with installation of Tyvek weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations. C. Provide weather barrier system and accessories produced by single Manufacturer. D. Provide Manufacturer’s executed 10-year (ten year) warranty form with authorized signatures and
endorsements indicating date of Substantial Completion, at Project Closeout. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Tyvek/DuPont, Wilmington, DE 1.800.44.TYVEK. 2. Approved Substitute.
2.02 MATERIALS A. Tyvek ThermaWrap: Spunbonded olefin, non-woven, non-perforated weather resistant barrier. B. Performance Characteristics (Values listed are nominal values measured by an accredited third party
lab.): 1. Effective R-value: R-2 (including 3/4” minimum airspace), as designated on ASHRAE tables,
ASTM Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 25- Table 3. 2. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 1.57 psf, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. 3. Basis Weight: 2.6 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 4. Tensile Strength: 29/27 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 882, Method A. 5. Tear Resistance: 12/7 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1117. 6. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Flame
Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 20.
2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: DuPont Tyvek Metalized Tape or other tape recommended by the Manufacturer,
minimum 3” wide. B. Fasteners:
1. At wood construction: Tyvek Wrap Caps, as distributed by DuPont: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners or 1-inch cap staples.
2. At steel framing construction: DuPont Tyvek Wrap Caps, screws 1-5/8” rust-resistant with 2” diameter plastic caps.
3. At masonry construction: Masonry tap-con fasteners with Tyvek Wrap Caps as distributed by DuPont: 2-inch diameter plastic cap fasteners.
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2
C. Sealants: Commercial sealants recommended by the weather barrier Manufacturer. D. Adhesives: Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier Manufacturer.
1. Liquid Nails® LN-109 2. Denso Butyl Liquid 3. 3M High Strength 90
E. Primers: Provide flashing Manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install air barrier over exterior side of exterior wall sheathing. 1. Install air barrier after sheathing is installed and before windows and doors are installed. Install
lower level barrier prior to upper layers to ensure proper shingling of layers. 2. Overlap air barrier vertical seams by a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Overlap air barriers at building corners by a minimum of 12 inches. 4. Ensure barrier is plum and level with foundation, and unroll extending air barrier over windwo
and door openings. 5. Ensure barrier is applied over back edge of weep screed for proper water drainage. 6. Opening Preparation
a. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. b. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose
8” of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.
7. Tape all horizontal and vertical seam of air barrier with tape. 8. Seal all tears and cuts in air barrier with tape.
B. Flashing 1. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12” longer than width of sill rough opening. 2. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to
rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6”. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.
3. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.
4. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start StraightFlash at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill.
5. Spray-apply primer to top 6” of jambs and exposed sheathing. 6. Install DuPont FlexWrap at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill.
Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2”. 7. Coordinate flashing with window installation. 8. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing.
Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant Manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.
9. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont StraightFlash over the 45-degree seams.
10. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 11. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing.
Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant Manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.
C. Opening Preparation 1. Cut weather barrier in a modified “I-cut” pattern.
a. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. b. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening. c. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right
corners of the opening. d. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten.
2. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape.
D. Flashing 1. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont FlexWrap a minimum of 12” longer than width of sill rough opening. 2. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont FlexWrap edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to
rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6”. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.
AIR BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3
3. Fan DuPont FlexWrap at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges.
4. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill.
5. Install window according to Manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Apply 4-inch wide strips of DuPont StraightFlash at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange.
Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing.
7. Apply 4-inch wide strip of DuPont StraightFlash as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.
8. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont StraightFlash over the 45-degree seams.
9. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. 10. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing.
Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant Manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.
E. Protect materials and work in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
END OF SECTION 07 25 00 - AIR BARRIERS
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 53 00 SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The Scope of Work consists of installing a Fully Adhered .060 thick membrane Roofing System over acceptable insulation and recovery board after verification of suitable substrate as specified in this Specification.
1.02 EXTENT OF WORK A. The Work to be performed under this specification shall include, but is not limited to the following: furnish
all competent supervision, experienced labor, materials, tools and equipment required or necessary in accordance with this specification and applied in strict compliance with the Manufacturer’s latest published specifications and written application instructions of the materials being installed.
B. Any Contractor who intends to submit a bid using a roofing system or supplier other than the approved Manufacturer(s) must submit for pre-qualification in writing ten (10) days prior to Bid Due Date. Any Contractor who fails to submit all information as requested shall be subject to rejection. Substitution Requests stating “as per Plans and Specs” or similar wording will not be accepted. Refer also to Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting requirements, Section 00 43 25, Substitution Request Form.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting work, the applicator must submit the following: 1. Shop drawings showing layout, details of construction and identification of materials in
accordance with Division 01-General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 2. Sample of the Manufacturer’s roofing system and membrane material warranties. 3. Submit a letter of certification from the Manufacturer which certifies the contractor is authorized to
install the Manufacturer’s roofing system and lists foremen who have received training from the Manufacturer along with the dates training was received.
B. Upon completion, submit copies of the Manufacturer’s inspection to the Architect upon completion of the installed work, prior to the issuance of the Manufacturer’s warranty.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the Manufacturer’s original, unopened containers or wrappings with the
Manufacturer’s name, brand name and installation instructions intact and legible. Deliver in sufficient quantity to permit work to continue without interruption. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
B. Comply with the Manufacturer’s written instructions for proper material storage. 1. Store materials, except membrane, between 60°F and 80°F in dry areas protected from water and
direct sunlight. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to 60°F minimum temperature before using.
2. Store materials containing solvents in dry, well ventilated spaces with proper fire and safety precautions. Keep lids on tight. Use before expiration of their shelf life.
C. Insulation and recovery board must be on pallets, off the ground and tightly covered with waterproof materials.
D. Any materials which are found to be damaged or stored in any manner other than as outlined above shall be automatically rejected and shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s expense.
1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A. Schedule and execute work to prevent leaks. Care should be exercised to provide protection for the interior
of the building and to ensure water does not flow beneath any completed sections of the membrane system. 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF THE PREMISES A. Before beginning work, coordinate with the General Contractor for the following: 1. Areas permitted for personnel parking. 2. Access to the site. 3. Areas permitted for storage of materials and debris. 4. Areas permitted for the location of cranes, hoists and chutes for loading and unloading materials to
and from the roof.
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 2
1.07 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. If discrepancies are discovered between the existing conditions and those noted on the drawings, immediately notify the Manufacturer by phone and take steps necessary to make the building watertight until the discrepancies are resolved.
1.08 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Temporary Utilities: 1. Water, power for construction purposes and lighting are existing at the site and will be made
available to the Contractor, without charge. Use care to prevent waste. 2. Provide all hoses, valves and connections for water from source designated by the Owner. 3. Electrical power should be extended as required from the source. Provide all trailers, connections
and fused disconnects. B. Building Site:
1. Contractor shall use reasonable care and responsibility to protect the building and site against damages. Contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any damage incurred as a result of the performance of the contract.
2. Contractor shall remove all debris from the job site in a timely and legally acceptable manner so as to not detract from the aesthetics or the functions of the building.
1.09 JOB SITE PROTECTION A. Protect paved areas and building elements from damage and staining; provide canvas, boards and sheet
metal (properly secured) as necessary. At completion, remove protection material and return damaged elements to their original conditions.
B. Take precautions to prevent the spread of dust and debris, particularly where such material may sift into the building. Give ample notice to the Owner so building contents can be protected. Provide temporary cloth filters on air intake openings upon General Contractor’s approval.
C. Do not overload any portion of the building, either by use of or placement of equipment, storage of debris or storage of materials.
D. Protect against fire and flame spread. Maintain proper and adequate fire extinguishers. E. Take precautions to prevent drains from clogging during execution of this contract. Remove debris at the
completion of each day’s work and clean drains, if required. At completion, test drains to ensure the system is free running and drains are watertight. Remove strainers and plug drains in areas where work is in progress. Install flags or other telltales on plugs. Remove plugs each night and screen drain.
F. Store moisture susceptible materials above ground and protect with waterproof coverings. G. Remove all traces of piled bulk materials and return the job site to its original condition. 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The roofing membrane, adhesives and sealants must be manufactured in the United States by the marketer/warranter of the roofing system.
B. The Manufacturer must have a minimum of twenty (20) years experience in the manufacturing of vulcanized thermal set sheeting.
C. Unless otherwise noted in this specification, the contractor must strictly comply with the Manufacturer’s specifications and details.
D. All work under this section shall be performed by a single firm with a minimum of three (3) years experience in the installation of single-ply roofing and shall be an applicator authorized and trained by the Manufacturer for that period of time. In addition, the contractor shall have at least ten (10) installations similar to the one specified with base Manufacturer and must have had key personnel attend a quality control seminar in the last twelve (12) months.
E. Provide adequate number of experienced workmen regularly engaged in this type of work who are skilled in the application techniques of the materials specified. Provide at least one thoroughly trained and experienced superintendent on the job at all times roofing work is in progress.
F. Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, the applicator shall arrange for an inspection to be made by a non-sales technical representative of the membrane Manufacturer in order to determine whether or not corrective work will be required before the warranty will be issued. Notify the Owner twenty-four (24) hours prior to Manufacturer’s final inspection.
G. There shall be no deviations made from this specification or the approved shop drawings without the prior written approval of the Architect. Any deviation from the Manufacturer’s installation procedures must be supported by a written certification on the Manufacturer’s letterhead and presented for the Architect’s consideration.
1.11 JOB CONDITIONS, CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS:
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 3
Refer to Carlisle’s Design “A” Fully Adhered Roofing System Specification, Part II - Application, for General Job Site Considerations.
A. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) should be on location at all times during the transportation, storage and application of materials.
B. When positioning membrane sheets, care should be exercised to locate all field splices away from low spots and out of drain sumps. All field splices should be tiled to prevent bucking of water.
C. When loading materials onto the roof, the Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator must comply with the requirements of the General Contractor to prevent overloading and possible disturbance to the building structure.
D. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with the Manufacturer’s recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations.
E. Proceed with work so new roofing materials are not subject to construction traffic. When necessary, new roof sections shall be protected and inspected upon completion for possible damage.
F. The surface on which the insulation or roofing membrane is to be applied shall be clean, smooth, dry, and free of projections or contaminants that would prevent proper application of or be incompatible with the new installation, such as fins, sharp edges, foreign materials, oil and grease.
G. New roofing shall be complete and weathertight at the end of the work day. H. Provide protection, such as 3/4 inch thick plywood, for all roof areas exposed to traffic during construction.
Plywood must be smooth and free of fasteners and splinters. J. Contaminants such as grease, fats and oils shall not be allowed to come in direct contact with the roofing
membrane. 1.12 WARRANTY A. After final approval of the work, the Manufacturer’s Ten (10) Year Membrane System Warranty (with a
maximum peak gust wind speed limitation of 55 mph measured at ten (10) meters above the ground) and Twenty (20) Year Membrane Material Warranty shall be issued.
1. All products used in the roofing assembly must be supplied and warranted by the same Manufacturer.
2. Pro-rated warranties shall not be accepted. Warranty samples are required as part of the bid package.
3. Manufacturer warranties must cover labor and material without monetary limitation and shall be transferable.
B. For a period of two (2) years, beginning with the date of Manufacturer’s final acceptance of this project, the contractor agrees to repair at its sole expense, any leaks caused by faulty handling or installation of the new roofing system.
C. Provide a warranty signed by the Manufacturer and backed by a certifiable warranty pool agreeing to replace/repair defective materials and workmanship for the term of the warranty stipulated above.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All components are to be products manufactured and supplied by a single Manufacturer or accepted by the
primary Manufacturer as compatible. B. Unless otherwise specified, all products (including insulation, fasteners, fastening plates, and edgings) must
be manufactured and supplied by the primary roofing system Manufacturer and covered by the warranty. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Carlisle Syntec Systems, 800-4-SynTec; 800.479.6832. B. Seaman Corp. FiberTite, 800.927.8578 C. Firestone, 800.428.4442. D. Approved Substitute.
2.03 MEMBRANE A. Furnish Sure-White .060 inch thick non-reinforced EPDM membrane in the largest sheet possible.
Physical Property Test Method FR
Tolerance on Nominal Thickness, % ASTM D 412 ±10
Tensile Strength, min, psi (MPa) ASTM D 412 1305 (9.0)
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 4
Physical Property Test Method FR
Tolerance on Nominal Thickness, % ASTM D 412 ±10
Elongation, Ultimate, min, % ASTM D 412 300
Tear Resistance, min, lbf/in (kN/m) ASTM D 624 (Die C)
150 (26.3)
Factory Seam Strength, min. Modified ASTM D 816
Membrane Rupture
Resistance to Heat Aging Properties @ 240° F (116° C) after 4 weeks (Sure-Seal) 1 week (Brite-Ply) Tensile Strength, min, psi Elongation, Ultimate, min, % Tear Resistance, min, lbf/in Linear Dimensional Change, max, %
ASTM D 573
ASTM D 412 ASTM D 412 ASTM D 624
ASTM D 1204
1205 200 125 ± 1
Ozone Resistance Condition after exposure to 100 pphm Ozone in air for 168 hours @ 104°F (40°C) Specimen is at 50% strain
ASTM D 1149 No Cracks
Brittleness Temp., max, deg. F (deg. C) ASTM D 746 -49 (-45)
Resistance to Water Absorption After 7 days immersion @ 158°F (70°C) Change in mass, max, %
ASTM D 471 +8/-2
Water Vapor Permeability max, perm-mils
ASTM E 96 (Proc. B or BW)
0.10
Resistance to Outdoor (Ultraviolet) WeatheringXenon-Arc, exposure 176°F (80°C) black panel temperature exposure: 4000 hrs (Sure-Seal); 2000 hrs (Brite-Ply)
ASTM G 26
No Cracks No Crazing
Sheet Composition Weight percent of polymer that is EPDM, min, % Weight percent of sheet that is EPDM polymer, min, %
ASTM D 297 100
30
2.04 INSULATION/UNDERLAYMENT
A. Insulation shall be installed in multiple layers minimum of two (2). The first and second layer of insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the substrate in accordance with the Manufacturer’s published specifications.
B. Insulation Supplied By Carlisle: Sure-Seal Polyisocyanurate HP. 2.05 RECOVERY BOARD:
A. Recovery board shall be installed in a single layer over insulation. B. Recovery board supplied by Carlisle: HP Recovery Board.
2.06 ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS
A. Bonding adhesive: Sure-Seal 90-8-30A Bonding Adhesive B. Splicing cement: Sure-Seal EP-95 Splicing Cement C. Cleaning solvent: Sure-Seal Splice Cleaner D. Internal seam sealant: Sure-Seal In-Seam Sealant E. External seam sealant: Sure-Seal Lap Sealant F. Mastic/caulking: Sure-Seal Water Cut-Off Mastic G. Sealer: Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 5
2.07 FASTENERS AND PLATES
A. Sure-Seal HP Fastener: A threaded, fluoro-polymer coated fastener for use with steel roof decks. The fastener shall withstand twenty-five (25) cycles in the Kestemich Cabinet with less than 15% red rust exceeding FM4470 standards which allow 15 cycles with 15% or less red rust. For 22 gauge steel roof decks, the minimum pullout shall be 500 lbs. and the minimum backout shall be fifteen inch (15”) pounds.
B. Sure-Seal Insulation Fastening Plate: a 3 inch diameter FM approved metal plate used for insulation attachment in conjunction with Sure-Seal Fasteners.
C. Sure-Seal Seam Fastening Plate: a 2 inch diameter FM approved metal plate used in conjunction with RUSS or with EPDM membrane for membrane securement.
D. RUSS (Reinforced Universal Securement Strip): A six inch (6”) or nine inch (9”) wide, 100 foot long, strip of Sure-Seal reinforced EPDM membrane. 1. The 6 inch wide RUSS is utilized horizontally or vertically (in conjunction with Carlisle Seam
Fastening Plates) below the non-reinforced EPDM membrane for additional membrane securement.
2. The 9 inch wide RUSS is utilized in conjunction with metal edgings to allow the continuation of the cured EPDM deck membrane as flashing.
2.08 FLASHING MATERIAL A. Cured EPDM membrane shall be used for walls, parapets, and curbs:
The use of uncured Elastoform Flashing shall be limited to flash inside and outside corners, pipes, and field fabricated Pourable Sealer Pockets when the use of pre-fabricated flashing accessories is not feasible. The uncured Elastoform Flashing may also be used to flash smaller curbs and unusually shaped walls where the use of cured membrane flashing is not practical. Pressure-Sensitive Elastoform Flashing is to be used whenever possible in lieu of uncured Elastoform Flashing.
2.09 ROOF WALKWAYS
A. Protective surfacing for roof traffic shall be Sure-Seal Walkway Pads or Rolls. Provide around at south side of access doorway and at any other location recommended by Manufacturer.
2.10 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Treated wood nailers, metal flashing (if required) and miscellaneous items needed to fulfill the project requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with the Manufacturer’s published instructions for the installation of the membrane roofing system including proper substrate preparation, job site considerations and weather restrictions.
B. Use the largest membrane sheet possible to minimize seams. Position sheets to accommodate contours of the roof deck and tile splices to avoid bucking water.
C. Refer to Carlisle’s Sure-Seal Design “A” Fully Adhered Roofing System published specification, Part II - Application, for typical installation procedures.
3.02 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION
A. Proper selection is needed to ensure adequate penetration of the Sure-Seal HP Fasteners through the top flues of the steel deck and to verify the length of the fastener. Penetration of the HP Fasteners shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch into the steel roof deck.
3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Defects in the existing roofing system must be reported and documented to the Architect, General Contractor or the Owner for assessment. The Carlisle Authorized Roofing Applicator shall not proceed with the installation unless the defects are corrected. 1. The existing substrate must be relatively even without noticeable high spots or depressions.
Accumulated water, ice or snow must be removed to prevent the absorption of moisture in the new roofing components and roofing system.
2. Prior to the placement of membrane underlayment, clear the substrate of debris and foreign material which may be detrimental to the roofing system.
SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 53 00 - 6
3.04 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install insulation or membrane underlayment over the substrate with boards butted tightly together and with
no joints or gaps greater than 1/4 inch. Stagger joints both horizontally and vertically if multiple layers are provided.
B. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications. 3.05 RECOVERY BOARD
A. Install recovery board with tight joints staggered from insulation joints. B. Mechanically fasten recovery board with minimum eleven (11) fasteners per 4x8 sheet, min five (5)
fasteners per 4x4 sheet. 3.06 MEMBRANE PLACEMENT AND BONDING
A. Unroll, unfold and position membrane without stretching. Allow the membrane to relax for approximately 1/2 hour before bonding. Fold the sheet back onto itself so that one half of the underside of the membrane is exposed.
B. Apply Bonding Adhesive in accordance with the Manufacturer’s published instructions, to both the underside of the membrane and the substrate. Achieve 100% coverage of both surfaces. Allow the adhesive to dry until it is tacky but will not string or stick to a dry finger touch. 1. Roll the coated membrane into the coated substrate while avoiding wrinkles. Brush down the
bonded half of the membrane sheet with a soft bristle push broom to achieve maximum contact. 2. Fold back the unbonded half of the membrane sheet and repeat the bonding procedure.
C. Install adjoining membrane sheets in the same manner, overlapping edges approximately four inches (4”) Do not apply Bonding Adhesive to the splice area.
3.07 MEMBRANE SPLICING
A. Fold the top sheet back and clean the dry splice area [minimum three inches (3”) wide] of both membrane sheets by scrubbing with clean natural fiber rags saturated with Sure-Seal Splice Cleaner.
B. Apply Splicing Cement and In-Seam Sealant in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications and roll the top sheet onto the mating surface.
C. Roll the splice with a 2 inch wide steel roller and wait at least 2 hours before applying Lap Sealant to the splice edge following the Manufacturer’s requirements.
D. Field splices without In-Seam Sealant must be overlaid with uncured flashing.
3.08 FLASHING A. Wall and curb flashing shall be cured EPDM membrane. Continue the deck membrane as wall flashing
where practicable. B. In-Seam Sealant is required on all vertical splices between adjoining sections of cured membrane. C. Follow Manufacturer’s typical flashing procedures for all wall, curb, and penetration flashing including
metal edging/coping and roof drain applications. D. Install new Sure-Seal SecuEdge around the entire perimeter of the roof in accordance with Carlisle’s
published details.
3.09 WALKWAYS A. Install walkways at all traffic concentration points (such as roof hatches, access doors, rooftop ladders, etc.)
and any other locations as identified on the project drawing. B. Adhere walkways 100% to the EPDM membrane in accordance with the Manufacturer’s specifications.
3.10 DAILY SEAL
A. On phased roofing, when the completion of flashings and terminations is not completed by the end of the work day, a daily seal must be completed to temporarily close the membrane to prevent water infiltration.
B. Use Sure-Seal Pourable Sealer or other acceptable membrane seal in accordance with the Manufacturer’s requirements.
3.11 CLEAN UP
A. Perform daily clean-up and remove from the site (in a legally acceptable manner) all wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
B. Prior to the Manufacturer’s inspection for warranty, the applicator must perform a pre-inspection to review all work and to verify all flashing has been completed as well as the application of all caulking.
END OF SECTION 07 53 00 - SINGLE PLY-MEMBRANE ROOFING
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included 1. Flashing and Sheet Metal
a. The extent of work is indicated on the Drawings and by provisions of this Section. The scope of work includes, but shall not be limited to: Flashing and counter-flashing and metal cap flashing.
2. Prefinished Gutters and Downspouts. 3. Parapet Caps and Fascia.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fabricated Sheet Metal, General. 1. Conform to profiles and sizes shown, and comply with “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by
SMACNA, for each general category of work required. a. Metal flashing and counter-flashing b. Metal coping c. Metal fascia d. Metal gutters and downspouts.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide samples in accordance with Division 01-General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.04 WARRANTIES
A. All Work: A one (1) year weathertightness guarantee is required. Comply with Division 01- General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
1.05 DELIVERY
A. Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for its storage and protection are available on the site.
B. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.06 STORAGE
A. Store materials out of the weather, in a clean, dry place. One end of each container should be slightly elevated to allow any moisture to run off.
B. Flashings with strippable film must not be stored in areas exposed to sunlight. C. Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance which may cause a discoloration in the
finish during storage. D. Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion, or twisting.
1.07 HANDLING A. Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching, or denting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, 0.20% copper, 22 or 26 gauge as noted; ASTM A 525, designation G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized. 1. Fabricate sheet metal with flat-lock seams; solder with type solder and flux recommended by
Manufacturer, except seal aluminum seams with epoxy metal seam cement and, where required for strength, rivet seams and joints.
2. Coat back-side of fabricated sheet metal with 15-mil sulfur-free bituminous coating, where required to separate metals from corrosive materials; or provide other permanent separation.
3. Provide for thermal expansion of running sheet metal work, by overlaps of expansion joints in fabricated work. Where required for water-tight construction, provide hooked flanges filled with polyisobutylene mastic for one (1”) inch embedment of flanges. Space joints at intervals
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 60 00 - 2
of not more than twenty-four (24’) feet for stainless steel. Conceal expansion provisions where possible.
B. Prefinished gutters and downspouts: 1. Formed aluminum of minimum .050” material thickness 2. Smooth surface with a Kynar 500 Finish. Provide colored samples for Architect’s selection
prior to ordering. 3. System shall have concealed splice plates at joints and continuously welded seams.
C. Parapet Caps and Fascia: Provide prefinished caps at flat roof parapet walls and fascia at pitched roof areas to match existing. Provide color samples for Architect’s selection prior to ordering.
D. Rubber Flashing: Synthetic Rubber, 40 mil flexible sheet in concealed applications only. E. Reglet: Provide reglet as required to fasten membrane against parapet wall construction in watertight
condition. F. Clips or Cleats: Same as material being installed. G. Nails and Fasteners: Galvanized or cement coated. H. Solder: 1/2 lead, 1/2 tin. J. Adhesives: As recommended by Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONNECTING WORK
A. The applicator shall examine surfaces on which his work is to be applied, and shall notify the Architect in writing if not suitable to receive his work. Work on any surface shall constitute acceptance of this surface by the installer.
3.02 INSTALLATION:
A. Flashing and Sheet Metal 1. Anchor work in place with noncorrosive fasteners, adhesives, setting compounds, tapes and
other materials and devices as recommended by Manufacturer of each material or system. Provide for thermal expansion and building movements. Comply with recommendations of “Architectural Sheet Metal Manual” by SMACNA.
B. Seal moving joints in metal work with elastomeric sealants. C. Clean metal surfaces of soldering flux and other substances which could cause corrosion.
3.03 CLEANUP A. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains. B. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds. C. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
3.04 PERFORMANCE
A. Water-tight/weatherproof performance of flashing and sheet metal work is required.
END OF SECTION 07 60 00 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
ROOF HATCHES 07 72 33 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work Included
1. Prefabricated roof hatch, complete with integral support curb, operable hardware and counterflashings.
2. Fixed railing system attached to hatch support curb. 3. Coordinate with installation of roofing and related metal flashings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Submittals, Section 01 33 00. Include Manufacturer’s data, installation instructions and color selection charts.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with
Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment. 1.04 WARRANTY A. One Year (1) warranty on all parts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer and Type: S20 hatch as manufacturer by Bilco or Approved Substitute, complete with roof curb and Bilco “Bil-Guard” hatch railing system.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES
A. Size/Construction: 2’6” x 3’0” size, leaf type, aluminum construction with full welded corner joints, insulated hatch lids and integral support curbs, complete with integral counterflashings to roof flashing system and flanges on support curb for anchorage to roof deck.
B. Opening Hardware: Manufacturer’s standard manually operating type capable of ensuring effortless control and smooth operation without causing damage to hatches and roofing systems; capable of being opened from inside and outside; complete with hold-open mechanism and inside padlock hasp.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate roof hatches weathertight, and free of visual distortions and defects. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof hatches in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof system and related flashings. Provide weathertight installation.
B. Apply bituminous paint and metal surfaces of roof hatches to be in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals.
C. Contractor shall test for proper operation after installation.
END OF SECTION 07 72 33 - ROOF HATCHES
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install firestopping in conjunction with fire safing at all void spaces at top of fire-rated walls and partitions.
B. Furnish and install firestopping at through and membrane penetrations of pipes, tubing, conduit, vents and ducts at all fire-rated walls and partitions.
C. Furnish and Install firestop pillows at openings where more than one information and/or audio/video cables penetrate a fire-rated wall or partition.
D. Provide and install firestopping materials per the Manufacturer’s recommendations. Use only the Manufacturer’s products that are intended for the specific system indicated. Other products, materials and methods indicated by the system must be adhered to strictly.
1.02 RELATED SECTION
A. Refer also to Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section 07 84 56 Construction Firesafing. 1.03 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Material Standards (ASTM). 1. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. ASTM E814 – Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1. UL 723 – Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. U 1479 – Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
C. UL Fire Resistance Directory. 1. Through Penetration Firestop Devices (XHJI). 2. Fire Resistive Ratings (BXUV). 3. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ). 4. Fill, Void, or Cavity Materials (XHHW).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Submit Manufacturer’s product literature for each type of firestop material to be installed. Literature shall include the following: 1. Product Characteristics. 2. Typical Uses. 3. Performance and Limitation Criteria. 4. Test Data. 5. UL Tested Systems with the system(s) intended for this project marked.
C. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each firestop product. D. Engineering Judgment (stamped and signed) for any variation between intended installation and UL Tested
System. E. Manufacturer’s installation procedures for each system. F. Approved Applicator: Submit from Manufacturer in which Manufacturer recognizes Installer as
qualified. G. Upon Completion, Installer to submit certification that materials were installed per Manufacturer’s
instructions and details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fireproofing Systems (Materials and Design) 1. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) ratings as required by code. F rating must be
a minimum of one-hour, but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated.
2. For joints, the system must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal or greater than those of anticipated conditions.
B. Systems and Materials must be capable of completely closing through openings created by: 1. Burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe or duct installation.
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 2
2. Deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion. C. Firestopping shall not contain asbestos, lead, or other hazardous materials. D. Firestopping must be flexible enough to allow for normal movement of building components. E. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling away from
contacted surfaces. F. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant and may not dissolve in water after curing. G. Installation shall be in conformance with Manufacturer’s instructions.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that the temperature, humidity and other weather conditions are within the Manufacturer’s recommended tolerances before starting Work.
1.07 SEQUENCING
A. Firestop installation shall precede gypsum board finishing except in the case of auditorium demising walls. B. Inspection of firestopping shall precede concealment by other materials.
1.08 PROTECTION
A. Take necessary steps to prevent damage to firestopping by other construction activities in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL
A. Architect must approve in writing any substitutes to both materials specified herein and system designs shown on the Drawings.
B. Intumescent materials are required where combustible penetrants are involved. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer to be one of the following: 1. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 2. 3M 3. Approved Substitute.
B. Materials listed below are from STI. IF another Manufacturer is used, the Contractor is responsible for submitting specific materials and systems for approval by Architect no less than ten (10) days before Bid Opening.
2.03 MATERIALS A. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks: STI SpecSeal SSS100. B. Latex Firestop Sealance: LC150 Sealant. C. Accessories as per Manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING
A. General: The following locations require firestopping whether shown on the Drawings or not: 1. Through Penetrations: Where any pipe, conduit, duct, etc. penetrates a fire-rated wall or
partition. 2. Membrane Penetrations: As required by code, where any item penetrates one side of a fire-rated
wall of partition. 3. Construction Joints and Gaps: Used in conjunction with fire safing (as a UL listed system) at void
space including the following: a. Between edges of fire-rated floor slab and exterior walls. b. Between top of fire-rated walls and underside of floor/roof. c. In control joints in fire-rated masonry walls. d. In expansion joints at fire-rated construction.
4. Other locations where smoke stopping is required by code. 5. Why was the fireplace thrown out of art class? 6. Because it wasn’t drawing very well.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that construction conditions are safe and suitable for installation per Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe an suitable for installation per Manufacturer’s recommendations – See Part 1.06 above.
C. Verify that all designed and anticipated penetrating items (pipe, conduit, duct, etc.) are in place. D. Verify that other system components such as fire safing, dams, etc. are in place prior to proceeding.
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 3
E. Verify that through-wall openings to receive firestop pillows are smooth and clean, not containing sharp protrusions or voids or opening to cavities.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Installation shall be in conformance with the Manufacturer’s instructions and details and in conformance with listed UL systems.
B. Dam Construction: Where required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be used as recommended by Manufacturer. Combustible damming materials must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustibles may remain if not in conflict with other construction.
C. Follow safety procedures recommended by the Materials Safety Data Sheets. D. Finish surfaces of any visually exposed firestopping to smooth and uniform condition. E. Install firestop pillows firmly into openings. Refer to Manufacturer recommendations. F. Correct any firestops found to be unacceptable during inspection.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestops without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces. C. Protect materials and work in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 66 00
Materials and Equipment. 3.05 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Instruct Owner as to location, appearance, purpose of, and general process of handing firestop pillows.
END OF SECTION 07 84 00 - FIRESTOPPING
CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING 07 84 56 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 84 56 CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and install firesafing in conjunction with firestopping at all void spaces at top of fire-rated walls, partitions, and shafts.
B. Furnish and install firesafing at all other locations shown on the drawings. C. Furnish and install firesafing per the Manufacturer’s recommendations, instructions and details. Install
in accordance with UL Systems indicated.
1.02 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Minimum one-hour fire rating at one-hour walls and ceilings. B. UL classified material C. Passive, non-combustive material D. Adequate toxic smoke sealant
1.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store on clean, raised platform in a dry place in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Plastic covers and shrink-wrap are not intended for job storage since moisture can condense within and on materials stored therein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI). B. 3M Fire Protection Products, St. Paul, MN. C. Firemaster Construction/Safing Joint Fire protection system by Thermal Ceramics, Augusta, GA. D. Approved Substitute.
2.02 SUPPLIES A. Supplies and materials required for Manufacturer’s recommended installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTIONS A. Inspections as required by local Fire Marshal, and/or Building Department. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean all surfaces to be in contact with material and prepare as recommended by Manufacturer. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Material to completely fill all void spaces as indicated above. Position and adhere material in
accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials.
B. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 70 00 Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION 07 84 56 - CONSTRUCTION FIRESAFING
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 1
DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 TESTING
A. Preconstruction Field Tests: Prior to installation of joint sealers, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates. Verify compatibility with joint fillers and materials in contact with sealants.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. In addition to product data submit the following: 1. Samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. 2. Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.03 STORAGE
A. Store in cool, dry place at room temperature. 1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year warranty on labor and ten (10) year warranty on material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPATIBILITY
A. Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. DAP Inc. 2. W.R. Grace and Co. 3. Parr Inc. 4. Mameco Int’l 5. Pecora Corp. 6. Tremco Mfg Co. 7. Sonneborn Bldg Prod. 8. Approved Substitute
B. Types 1. Vertical Joints: Non-sagging one or two component urethane or polyurethane, ASTM C920,
Type M, Grade NS, color to match adjacent wall surfaces as approved by the Architect. 2. Interior Static Joints: General purpose, gun-grade, paintable acrylic latex, ASTM C834. 3. Horizontal Joints: Self-leveling two component urethane or polyurethane, ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade P, color to match adjacent floor or pavement surfaces. 4. Fire: ASTM E 814 UL rated.
C. Sealant Backings, General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; approved for applications indicated by sealant Manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. 1. Plastic Foam Joint-Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-waxing, non-extruding
strips of plastic foam of material indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. a. Either flexible, open-cell polyurethane foam or non-gassing, closed-cell polyethylene
foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant Manufacturer. D. Primer: Type as recommended by joint sealer Manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer-substrate and field tests. E. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant Manufacturer
for preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back joint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Application surfaces must be clean of dirt, moisture and other substrates which could interfere with bond of sealant.
B. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by Manufacturer.
3.02 APPLICATION A. Standards
JOINT SEALERS 07 92 00 - 2
1. Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 790. 2. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with ASTM C 919. 3. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing and other
accessory materials to fill openings around mechanical and electrical services penetrating floors and walls to provide fire-stops with fire resistance ratings indicated.
B. Joint Backing: Install backing in joints to receive sealant. In joints of sufficient depth to receive backing, install bond breaker tape at back of joint.
C. Sealant Application: Comply with joint sealer Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. Force sealant into joint by tooling to ensure full contact with side and backing of joint.
D. Finishing: Finish sealant in horizontal and vertical surfaces slightly concave, using tool to strike off excess material and properly shape bead.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Remove all excess material adjacent to the joints by mechanical means and/or with a solvent. B. Clean up in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALERS
END DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 11 00 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL label on doors indicated on Door Schedule. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings shall indicate door and frame configurations, locations for cut-outs of hardware reinforcement, and jamb/frame sizes.
C. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metal work shall be submitted under Section 08 70 00, Finish Hardware, directly to the hollow metal Manufacturer immediately after approval of the hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to the Architect.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. Store doors on edge. Store frames in such a position as to prevent twisting. Doors with dimples or dents will be rejected.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout for solid core doors for the life of the installation to include reasonable cost of rehanging and refinishing.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following: 1. Steel Door Institute “Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames”
SDI-100 for the following Classifications: a. Interior Doors: SDI-100 Grade III, Heavy-Duty, Model 1. b. Exterior Doors: SDI-100 Grade III, Extra Heavy-Duty, Model 2.
2. ICC/ANSI 117.1 Accessible and Useable Buildings and Facilities. 3. DHI – Door Hardware Institute - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames, and Builder’s Hardware. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing steel doors and frames with minimum three
(3) years experience in fabrication methods and product quality meeting the standards set by the Steel Door Institute (SDI).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. R.C. Hollow Metal Company 4. Steelcraft (W.Ray Crabb, Inc.) 5. Elco Metal Products 2. Western Hollow Metals, Raton, NM 6. CECO 3. Gateway Metal Products, Raton, NM 7. Approved Substitute
2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Doors and Frames: hot-rolled, pickled and oiled per ASTM A569 and A568; cold-rolled per
ASTM A366 and A568. B. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer’s standard units. Use galvanized items for units built into
exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153. C. Fire Rated Steel Doors and Frames: Provide UL Rated Doors and Frames as indicated on the Door
Schedule.
STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 11 00 - 2
2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Weld exposed
joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. B. Prepare steel doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts,
reinforcing, drilling and tapping, comply with ANSI A115 “Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware”. 1. Reinforce units to receive surface-applied finish hardware to be field applied. 2. Locate finish hardware using templates supplied under Division 08 – Doors and Windows,
Section 08 70 00, Finish Hardware. C. Shop paint exposed surfaces of doors and frame units, including galvanized surfaces, using
Manufacturer’s standard baked-on rust inhibitive primer. D. Doors: Nominal 1-3/4” thick to comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated.
1. Material: 16 gauge, ASTM A366 cold-rolled steel for interior doors at framed wall application, and 14 gauge hot dipped galvanized for exterior doors, and interior doors at tilt-up concrete walls.
2. Minimum insulation for exterior doors (separating conditional from unconditional space) R=4.8 measured per ASTM C236.
3. Minimum insulation for interior doors at framed walls: R=2.4. E. Frames: Comply with SDI-100, of the types and styles indicated.
1. Material: 16-gauge cold-rolled for interior framed wall application, and 14 gauge hot dipped galvanized at exterior and interior tilt-up concrete walls.
2. Anchors: Furnish anchors of type and number required for anchoring frames to structure, partitions, etc., as follows:
3 jamb anchors on 7’ high jamb 5 jamb anchors on jambs over 7’
Provide such installation instructions as are necessary to ensure proper installation of anchors. 3. Silencers: Drill stop of lock jamb of each interior frame for installation of pneumatic rubber
door silencers. Silencers shall be furnished as indicated under Division 08 – Doors and Windows, Section 08 70 00, Finish Hardware.
4. Provide hollow metal frames to receive 1-3/4” thick hollow metal doors as indicated on Door Schedule.
2.04 FINISH
A. Cleaning and Primer: Thoroughly clean surfaces of grease, rust and scale to ensure paint adherence. Apply one (1) coat of factory primer. Apply two (2) finish coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Frames: 1. Set steel frames accurately in accordance with details, straight and free of twist with head
level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely brace until surrounding work is completed.
2. Wherever possible, leave spreader bars in place until frames are securely anchored. END OF SECTION 08 11 00 - STEEL DOORS AND HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division.
SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide UL label on rated doors as indicated on Door Schedule. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standard: Comply with: 1. NWMA Industry Standard 1.S.1.78 - Wood Flush Doors 2. AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standard, latest edition
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. In Addition to product data, submit the following in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 1. Shop Drawings indicating location, size, face material, and finishes of each door required. 2. Samples: 1’-0” square of each type of core construction, face material and finish required. 3. Provide stain samples on wood species indicated, to match existing.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. General: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Delivery: Do not deliver doors to the Project until it is entirely enclosed, drywall and concrete work is completed, and humidity in the building has reached average relative humidity of the locality.
C. Storage: Stack doors flat and off the floor. Do not drag doors across one another.
1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract
Closeout for solid core doors for the life of the installation to include reasonable cost of rehanging and refinishing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PANEL DOORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. VT Industries. 2. Weyerhaeuser. 3. Simpson Door Co. 4. Pinecrest. 5. Cal-Wood. 6. Corona. 7. Approved Substitute.
B. Interior Panel Doors:
1. Thickness: 1-3/4” unless otherwise indicated. 2. Faces: Unfinished Red Oak for on-site transparent finish, in 5-ply veneer, minimum. 3. AWI Quality Grade: Custom. 4. Finish: Provide stained finish per Division 9 – Finishes, Section 09 90 00, Painting and
Staining. 5. Under Cutting: Preserve full bottom rail. 6. Hardware: Provided under Section 08 70 00, Finish Hardware. 7. Styles: As indicated on Drawings.
2.02 WOOD FRAMES
A. Provide frames in sizes and profiles as indicated on Drawings and to match existing, in Red Oak. B. Provide stained finish to match existing, and per Section 09 90 00, Painting and Staining.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in sizes indicated for job site fitting.
WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 00 - 2
B. Shop seal faces and edges of doors for field-applied transparent finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspection: Before installation, verify that frames are proper size and type for the door and are installed as required for proper installation of doors.
B. What do door and window Manufacturers spread on their toast? Jamb. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Fit to width by planing and fit to height using hand cross-cut saw. In no case shall doors be
cut down to opening sizes smaller than those for which they were manufactured. 2. Installation: By skilled finish carpenters or factory authorized installers. 3. Installer: Thoroughly familiar with the requirements of the Manufacturer’s door warranty as
currently in effect and with referenced AWI standard. Assure compliance with all provisions. B. Clearance:
1. Non-Fire Rated Doors: a. Jamb: 1/8”, 1/8” bevel in 2” b. Head: 1/8” c. Between Double Doors: 1/8” d. Bottom at Decorative Floor: 1/2” e. Bottom at Threshold: 1/4”
C. Hanging: 1. After sizing doors, fit for hardware as scheduled. Before installation of hardware, brush apply
an exterior seal coat to jobsite cut surfaces. Use sealer recommended by the door Manufacturer.
2. Hang doors to be free of binding with hardware functioning properly. 3. Prepare and hang doors when temperature and humidity range of spaces is consistent with
final use and maximum 55% humidity.
3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjustment: At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper
operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08 14 00 – WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 42 29 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Furnish complete automatic aluminum door system, as specified, that has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by Manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings - Methods of Test. 2. ANSI A156.10: For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors Section. 3. ANSI A156.5: Standard for Auxiliary Locks and associated products.
C. American Society For Testing And Materials (ASTM) . 1. B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes and Tubes. 2. ASTM E330-97- (Wind Load) Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. ASTM E283-91 – (Air Infiltration) Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors. D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 101: Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings &
Structures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s complete product and installation data in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing layout, profiles, product components including anchorage, accessories, finish and glazing details in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
C. Quality Assurance and Closeout Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. 1. Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Warranty document as specified herein. 3. AAADM inspection compliance form completed and signed by certified AAADM inspector
prior to doors being placed in operation as proof of compliance with ANSI A156.10. D. Paint color samples (or optionally multiple samples) on aluminum. See Item 2.05 B below.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers Qualifications: Installer experienced to perform work of this section who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to product Manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Manufacturer to have minimum (5) five years successful experience in the fabrication of intensive care doors of the type required for this project. Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during installation, approving acceptable installer and approving application method.
C. Certifications: Automatic sliding door systems and options shall be factory certified to meet performance design criteria in accordance with the following standards: 1. ANSI A156.10 – For Power Operated Pedestrian Doors; Sliding Doors Section. 2. NFPA 101 – Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. UL 325 – Electrical Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. 4. ICC/IBC – Egress Section.
D. Wind Load: Structural Performance per ASTM E330-07 – Measured ± 39 psf with no glass breakage or permanent deformation with doors locked.
E. Air Infiltration: Per ASTM E283-91: 1. Standard Test Pressure @ 1.57 psf – Measured 0.462 cfm/ft2 (ASTM Allowable 1.20 cfm/ft2).
F. Forced Entry Resistance: Sliding doors shall meet requirement of AAMA 1303.5. G. Operating Range: -30º F to 130º F. H. Opening Force Requirements for Emergency Egress:
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 2
1. Slide-swing panels shall require no more than 50 lb of force to swing open. Slide-swing panels shall be capable of swinging out 90 degrees from any position of slide movement.
2. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites shall have torsion spring designed to re-close panel if pushed open in the direction of egress.
3. If power fails, slide panels can be manually slid open with no more than 15 lb of force. 4. Units are UL listed as an exit way and are compliant with NFPA 101.
J. Closing Force Requirements: Maximum force required to prevent sliding panel from closing = 28 lbf. Adjustable Reversing Circuit will reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed.
K. Header Capacity: Header shall be capable of supporting: 1. Biparting: Up to 250 lbs per slide panel over spans up to 16’-0” without intermediate
supports. 2. Single Slide: Up to 350 lbs per slide panel over spans up to 9’0” without intermediate
supports.
1.05 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Units to be warranted against defect in material and workmanship for a
period of one year from the Date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
B. Distributor's Warranty: One (1) year warranty including labor and transportation charges for defective parts replacement.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions/openings by field measurements before fabrication and record on shop drawings. Coordinate with fabrication and construction schedule to avoid construction delays.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Division 01 – General Requirements Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. B. Ordering and Delivery: Comply with factory's ordering instructions and lead time requirements.
Delivery shall be in factory's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
C. Storage and Protection: Provide protection from exposure to harmful weather conditions and vandalism.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Horton Automatics, a division of Overhead Door Corporation, shall manufacture automatic
sliding door of type and size specified on Drawings and Door Schedule. 2. Approved Substitute.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Manufactured Door Units: Shall include header and track, jambs, sliding door panels, and sidelites. Units to be mounted within rough opening with sliding panels sliding along sidelite. 1. Configuration: Single Slide. 2. Mounting Type: Perimeter mounted with rough opening with sliding panels sliding along
sidelite. 3. Door Type: Type 010 – Single slide panel ‘SX’ shall slide along interior side. Unit has
Swing-out sidelite X-O or O-X Configuration. B. Operator: The Electric Operating Mechanism shall be Profiler Series 2000B Elite Belt Drive. The
operator shall be mounted and concealed within the header. 1. Operation shall be accomplished through a 1/8 HP DC permanent magnet motor working
with worm gear transmission and 1800 RPM working with drive belt, attached door hangers, and idler pulley. Drive belt to be steel reinforced nylon, 1/2” wide. Idler pulley to be reinforced metallic material.
2. Master control shall be microprocessor controller with dual on-board seven-segment alphanumeric diagnostic display and position encoder. The encoder shall monitor revolutions of the operator shaft and send signals to microprocessor controller to define door position and speed. The control shall have minimum of 38 programmable parameters including the following functions as required by ANSI A156.10: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustable back-check and latching.
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 3
c. Adjustable braking. d. Adjustable hold-open time between 1 to 30 seconds. e. Adjustable Reversing Circuit will reopen door unit if closing path is obstructed. f. Separate day and night modes of operation with security over-ride.
3. Finger Safety: When unit slides open, strike rail of sliding panel with stop short of adjacent sidelight; resulting opening is net slide.
4. On/Off Switch shall be supplied. When switched OFF, unit reverts to free manual operation (likewise during electrical power failure).
C. Security and Safety Power Fail Options 1. Automatic Lock: Automatically locks slide function of door when in closed position.
Additional power supply for autolock not acceptable. a. Autolock Fail Secure: If power fails the lock engages.
2. Monitored Power Fail Options (Battery Back-up): a. Software Selectable Power Fail Close: If power fails the door slides closed.
D. Header: Shall be slim 4” deep by 6” high aluminum construction with extruded z-profile reinforcement for dead load and lateral strength. Header shall have removable face plate for service and adjustment of operator and controls. Header mounts flush to 4” framing jambs.
E. Carrier Assemblies and Header Roller Track: Carrier assemblies shall support door panels with minimum four (4) rollers per panel. Rollers will be steel, high quality ball bearing wheels 1-1/4” dia. Anti-Derailing shall be accomplished by means of a continuous aluminum extrusion full length of slide panel travel. Overhead header roller track shall be continuous aluminum, nylon covered, and replaceable.
F. Sliding Panels and Sidelites; Shall be aluminum 1-3/4” deep with narrow stile rails. Standard bottom rail shall be 4” tall. Sliding panels shall have concealed bottom guides to stabilize slide travel. 1. Weather-stripping to be along perimeter of sliding panels and swing-out sidelites.
Weatherstripping material captured in extruded aluminum door panel. Surface applied self-adhesive weatherstripping not acceptable. Adjustable spring-loaded double astragal weather-stripping at lead edge, double mohair at interlock rails.
2. Glazing prep to be for glass of maximum U-value of 0.56 at exterior location. Panels may be prepared for 1/4” glass at interior locations.
G. Breakout Panels: Slide-swing panels can swing out 90 degrees from any position of slide movement and require no more than 50 lbf of force applied at the lock stile to open. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites shall utilize spring loaded ball detent. 1. Slide-swing panels and swing-out sidelites shall have torsion spring designed to re-close
panel if pushed open in the direction of egress. 2. Breakout mechanism shall provide support across full width of the door, in normal operating
mode. In breakout mode, torsion assembly shall support weight of the door to minimize drop during emergency egress.
3. Slide-swing panels shall include intermediate horizontal rail. 4. Units with breakout feature are UL listed as an exitway and are compliant with NFPA 101.
H. Jambs/Frame: Shall be aluminum. Jamb dimensions to be 1-3/4” deep x 4” wide. J. Threshold: Shall be aluminum, maximum 1/2” tall x 4” wide at interior locations X 7” wide at
exterior location. K. Hardware: ANSI A156.5, Grade 1, 2-Point Locking provided and installed in strike rail shall include:
1. Hookbolt Latch, 5/8” laminated stainless steel, latching into jamb or adjacent strike rail. 2. 3/8” hex-bolt into breakout carrier frame. 3. Keyed 1 5/32” Cylinder mounted on exterior side with 31/32” backset 4. Thumbturn mounted on interior side.
2.03 RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. Basic Sensor System: Shall be 24 VDC, class ll circuit and shall be adjusted and installed in compliance with ANSI A156.10. System shall include the following: 1. Activation Sensors: Microwave or active infrared sensor shall be header-mounted each side
of door unit for detection of traffic from each direction. 2. Threshold Presence Sensors:
a. Header mounted sensors shall provide active infrared presence detection on each side of the door unit and shall remain active throughout the entire door opening and closing cycle.
b. Hold-open beams: Two pulsed infrared photoelectric beams to be mounted in vertical rails of sidelite or in jambs. Sender/receiver arrangement parallels door opening.
2.04 RELATED WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical: 120 VAC, 50/60 cycle, single phase, dedicated 20 amp circuit per operator.
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES 08 42 29 - 4
B. Glass and Glazing 1. Glass stops, glazing vinyl and setting blocks for field glazing as per Safety Glazing standard
ANSI Z97.1.2. 2. Contractor to coordinate acquisition of glass in thickness and type in accordance with
Manufacturer's recommendations for prescribed design. 3. Glass is required to have a maximum U-value of 0.56.
2.05 MATERIALS, FINISHES AND FABRICATION
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy and temper, anodized: 1. Structural Header Sections: Minimum 3/16” thickness. 2. Structural Frame Sections: Minimum 1/8” thickness. 3. Structural Panel Sections: Commercial grade.
B. Finishes (for all exposed aluminum surfaces) shall be: 1. 312-R1 Medium Bronze at interior locations and interior side of exterior location. 2. Paint Coating: At exterior side of exterior location, powder coat fluoropolymer resin based:
White. C. Panel Construction
1. Corner block type with 3/16” steel backup plate construction, mechanically secured with minimum of four hardened steel screws. Sash consists of snap-in glass stops, snap-in glazing beads and vinyl gaskets.
2. Slide-swing doors to be supplied with adjustable glass setting block to allow for adjusting of door to meet site conditions eliminating the need for additional shims.
D. Frame Construction: Butt joints, mechanically secured with screws and formed aluminum corner brackets.
E. Operator Construction: Electromechanical, modular type construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Installer must verify that base conditions previously installed under other sections are acceptable for product installation according to Manufacturer’s instructions. Notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work. Do not start work until all negative conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer and Manufacturer.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install door units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or sash with Manufacturer’s prescribed tolerances. Provide support and anchor in place.
B. Dissimilar Materials: Comply with AAMA 101, Appendix Dissimilar Materials by separating aluminum materials and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action contact points.
C. Weather-Tight Construction: Install header and framing members in a bed of sealant or with joint filler or gaskets. Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of construction.
D. Electrical: Electrical Contractor to install all wiring to operator on a separate circuit breaker routed into header.
3.03 CLEANING, ADJUSTMENT AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: After installation, installer to take following steps: 1. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 2. Remove construction debris from construction site and legally dispose of debris. 3. Repair or replace damaged installed products. 4. Clean product surfaces and lubricate operating equipment for optimum condition and safety.
B. Adjustment: AAADM certified technician to inspect and adjust installation. Comply with ANSI A156.10.
C. Advise Contractor: Of precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that doors will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08 42 29 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 45 23 INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Manufacturer’s product data in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Include construction details, material descriptions, profiles and finishes of components.
B. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Include a plan, elevations, details, dimensions and attachments to other Work.
C. Submit Manufacturer's color charts in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals, showing the full range of colors available for factory finished aluminum. 1. Submit samples for each exposed finish required, in same thickness and material indicated for
the work and in size indicated below. If finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets consisting of two or more units showing the full range of variations expected. a. Sandwich panels: 14” x 28” units b. Factory finished aluminum: 5” long sections
D. Submit Installer Certificate, signed by installer, certifying compliance with project qualification requirements.
E. Submit product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating each type and class of panel system complies with the project performance requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if for current manufacturer and indicative of products used on this project. 1. Test reports required are:
a. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed (UL 723) – Submit UL Card b. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635) c. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244) d. Abrasion/Erosion Resistance (ASTM D-4060) e. Impact Strength (UL 972) f. Bond Tensile Strength (ASTM C-297 after aging by ASTM D-1037) g. Bond Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002) h. Beam Bending Strength (ASTM E-72) j. Insulation U-Factor (NFRC-100) k. NFRC System Certification l. Condensation Resistance Factor (AAMA 1503) m. Blast Analysis and Testing of Translucent Sandwich Panels Demonstrating
Equivalent Performance to 1/4” Laminated Glass per DoD UFC 4-010-01. (Optional) F. Submit current documentation proving regular, independent quality control monitoring under a
nationally recognized building code review and listing program. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. Material and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly
employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least ten (10) consecutive years and which can show evidence of those materials being satisfactorily used on at least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and location. At least three (3) of the projects shall have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.
2. Panel system must be listed by the International Code Council – Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) which requires quality control inspections and fire, structural and water infiltration testing of sandwich panel systems by an approved agency.
3. Quality control inspections and required testing shall be conducted at least once each year and shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels” as regulated by the ICC-ES.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation shall be by an experienced installer, which has been in the business of installing specified panel systems for at least five (5) consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.
C. Performance Requirements: The Manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete panel system. When requested, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 2
1.03 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver panel system, components and materials in Manufacturer’s standard protective packaging. B. Store panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and under cover in
accordance with Manufacturer’s storage and handling instructions. 1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit Manufacturer’s and installer's written warranty agreeing to repair or replace panel system work which fails in materials or workmanship within one (1) year of the date of building’s substantial completion. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include leakage, excessive deflection, deterioration of finish on metal in excess of normal weathering and defects in accessories, insulated translucent sandwich panels and other components of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Kalwall Corporation, 800.258.9777. B. Approved Substitute. 2.02 PANEL COMPONENTS
A. Face Sheets 1. Translucent faces: Manufactured from glass fiber reinforced thermoset resins, formulated
specifically for architectural use. Thermoplastic (e.g. polycarbonate, acrylic) faces are not acceptable.
2. Flammability of interior face sheets: a. Flamespread: Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, which requires periodic
unannounced retesting, with flamespread rating no greater than 50 (20) and smoke developed no greater than 250 (200) when tested in accordance with UL 723.
b. Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1”. c. Face sheets shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame. d. Face sheets shall not delaminate when exposed to 200°F for 30 minutes per IBC.
3. Weatherability of exterior face sheets: a. Color stability: Full thickness of the exterior face sheet shall not change color more
than 3.0 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244 after 5 years outdoor weathering at 5 degrees facing south, determined by the average of at least three (3) white samples with and without a protective film or coating to ensure long-term color stability. Color stability shall be unaffected by abrasion or scratching.
b. Erosion barrier: Exterior face shall have a permanent glass erosion barrier embedded beneath the surface to provide long-term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure. Exterior face surface loss shall not exceed .7 mils and 40 mgs when tested in accordance with ASTM D-4060 employing CS17 abrasive wheels at a head load of 500 grams for 1000 cycles. Sacrificial surface films or coatings are not acceptable erosion barriers.
4. Appearance: a. Exterior face sheets: Smooth, 0.070” thick and White in color. b. Interior face sheets: Smooth, 0.045” thick and White in color. c. Face sheets shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness and be uniform in color.
5. Strength: Exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength, impenetrable by hand held pencil and repel an impact equal to 70 (230) ft. lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3-1/4” diameter, 5 lb. free-falling ball per UL 972.
B. Grid Core
1. Thermally broken (aluminum) I-beam grid core shall be of 6063-T6 or 6005-T5 alloy and temper with provisions for mechanical interlocking of muntin-mullion and perimeter. Width of I- beam shall be no less than 7/16”. The I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- .002”.
2. Thermal break: Minimum 1”. C. Laminate Adhesive
1. Heat and pressure resin type adhesive engineered for structural sandwich panel use, with minimum 25-years field use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the International Code Council “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesives.”
2. Minimum tensile strength of 750 PSI when the panel assembly is tested by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037.
3. Minimum shear strength of the panel adhesive by ASTM D-1002 after exposure to five (5) separate conditions:
INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM 08 45 23 - 3
a. 50% Relative Humidity at 73° F: 540 PSI b. 182° F: 100 PSI c. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at room temperature: 800 PSI d. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1037 at 182° F: 250 PSI e. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb by ASTM D-572: 1400 PSI
2.03 PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide sandwich panels of flat fiberglass reinforced translucent face sheets laminated to a grid core of mechanically interlocking thermally broken (aluminum) I-beams. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam and have a neat sharp edge. 1. Thickness: 4” 2. Light Transmission: 10%. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.11. 4. U-factor by NFRC Certified Laboratory: 0.10 thermally broken. 5. Grid Pattern: Nominal 8” x 20” shoji. Verify size.
B. Panels shall deflect no more than 1.9” at 30 psf in 10’-0” span without a supporting frame by ASTM E-72.
C. Panels shall withstand 1200ºF fire for minimum one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming. D. Thermally broken panels:
1. Minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the bond line. 2. Minimum CRF of 90 at center of grid cell.
2.04 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM
A. Closure system: Extruded aluminum 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 alloy and temper clamp-tite screw type closure system.
B. Sealing tape: Manufacturer's standard, pre-applied to closure system at the factory under controlled conditions.
C. Fasteners: 300 series stainless steel screws for aluminum closures, excluding final fasteners to the building.
D. Finish: Exposed aluminum to be Manufacturer’s factory applied finish that meets the performance requirements of AAMA 2604. (Mill) Color White, selected from Manufacturer’s standard colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, supporting structure and installation conditions. Do not proceed with panel erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by Manufacturer for this purpose.
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint or method recommended by Manufacturer.
3. Where aluminum will contact pressure-treated wood, separate dissimilar materials by methods recommended by Manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install the panel system in accordance with the Manufacturer’s installation recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. 1. Anchor component parts securely in place by permanent mechanical attachment system. 2. Accommodate thermal and mechanical movements. 3. Set perimeter framing in a full bed of sealant compound, or with joint fillers or gaskets to
provide weather-tight construction. B. Install joint sealants at perimeter joints and within the panel system in accordance with
Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean the panel system inside and outside, immediately after installation, according to Manufacturer’s written recommendations. Final cleaning shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
SECTION 08 45 23 - INSULATED TRANSLUCENT FIBERGLASS SANDWICH PANEL SYSTEM
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 52 13 ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory-assembled aluminum-clad wood fixed casement windows, glass and glazing, weather stripping, and blinds.
B. Anchorages, attachments and shims. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM B 117 – Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 2. ASTM C 1036 – Flat Glass. 3. ASTM D 1149 – Rubber Deterioration – Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber. 4. ASTM D 2803 – Filiform Corrosion Resistance of Organic Coatings on Metal. 5. ASTM D 4060 – Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 6. ASTM E 283 – Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors.
Under Specified Pressure Difference Across the Specimen. 7. ASTM E 330 – Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. ASTM E 547 – Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Cyclic
Static Air Pressure Differential. 9. ASTM G 85 – Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing.
B. National Wood Window and Door Association (WDMA). 1. WDMA I.S.-2 – Industry Standard for Wood Windows. 2. WDMA I.S.-4 – Industry Standard for Water-Repellent Preservative Treatment for Millwork.
C. American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA). 1. AAMA 502 – Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding Doors. 2. AAMA 2604.2 – Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
1. ANSI-SMA-1004 – Aluminum Tubular Framing Screens for Windows. E. Federal Specification (FS).
1. FS L-S-125B – Screening, Insect Non-metallic.
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Window units shall meet Rating ODP-45 specifications in accordance with WDMA I.S.-2. B. Window unit air leakage, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at 1.67 psf. (25 mph), shall be
0.05 cfm per square foot of frame or less. C. No water penetration through window unit when tested in accordance with ASTM E547 under static
pressure of 7.5 psf. (55 mph) after three cycles of 5 minutes each, with water being applied at a rate of 5 gallons per hour per square foot.
D. Window assembly shall withstand positive and negative pressure of 75 psf. Acting normal to the plane of the window. Structural tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E 330.
E. Window glazing shall provide a U-value of not more than 0.30.
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements Section 01 33 00,
Submittals. C. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements Section 01 33 00,
Submittals. Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component connections and locations, anchorage methods and locations, hardware locations and installation details.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockup: Provide sample installation for field testing unit performance requirements and to determine acceptability of unit installation methods.
B. Approved mockup will represent minimum quality required by the Work. C. Approved mockup may remain in place within the Work.
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 - 2
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in Manufacturer’s or distributor’s packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather and construction activities. 1.07 WARRANTY
A. Glass Components: Ten (10) years. B. Exterior Cladding and Finish: Twenty (20) years. C. Hardware: Ten (10) years. D. Interior Wood Finish: Five (5) years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Marvin “Replacement” Casement Fixed Units as manufactured by Marvin Windows and Doors, Warroad, MN. Factory-assembled aluminum-clad wood windows fixed units. Contact: Patrick Bogdovitz, 303.250.8096.
B. Pella Designer Series Clad Fixed Casement units as manufactured by Pella Corp, Pella, IA: Factory-assembled aluminum-clad wood window fixed units. Contact: Jorge Vargas, 970.266.1083.
C. Approved Substitute. 2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Frame: Select softwood, water-repellent, preservative-treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. Interior exposed surfaces clear pine with no visible fastener holes; exterior surfaces clad with aluminum. Overall frame depth: five inches (5”).
B. Sash: Select softwood, water-repellent, preservative-treated in accordance with WDMA I.S.-4. Interior exposed surfaces clear pine with no visible fastener holes; exterior surfaces clad with aluminum, lap-jointed at corners. Corners mortised and tenoned, glued and secured with metal fasteners. Sash thickness: 2-3/16”.
C. SmartSash I.G. Glazing: Quality 1 float glass complying with ASTM C1036. One inch bronze InsuShield multi-layer Low-E coated dual-seal insulating glass, silicone-glazed. High altitude glazings.
D. Weatherstripping: Dual weatherstripping. Continuous, flexible polyvinyl chloride material in dual durometer design. Vent units have welded corners, compressed between frame and sash for positive seal on all four sides. Secondary polyvinyl chloride leaf-type weatherstrip between edge of sash and frame.
2.03 TOLERANCES
A. Windows to accommodate the following opening tolerance: 1. Vertical dimensions between high and low points: plus ! inch or minus zero inches. 2. Width dimensions: plus ! inch or minus zero inches. 3. Building columns or masonry openings: plus or minus ! inch from plumb.
2.04 FINISH
A. Pella EnduraClad Exterior Finish System: Exterior extruded aluminum surfaces shall be finished with the following multi-stage system: 1. Clean and etch aluminum surface of oxides. 2. Pretreat with chrome phosphate conversion coating. 3. Pretreat with chromic acid sealer/rinse. 4. Top coat with baked-on polyester enamel. White. Verify color with Architect prior to
ordering. B. Pella EnduraClad exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed the following performance
requirements of AAMA 2605.98: 1. Dry Film Hardness: Eagle Turquoise Pencil, F minimum. 2. Film Adhesion: 1/16 inch crosshatch, dry, wet, boiling water. 3. Impact Resistance: 1/10 inch distortion, no film removal. 4. Abrasion Resistance: Falling sand coefficient value of 20 minimum. 5. Chemical Resistance: 10 percent Muriatic Acid, 15 minutes, 15 minutes. Mortar pat test, 24
hours. 6. Detergent Resistance: 3 percent at 100º F, 72 hours. 7. Corrosion Resistance: Humidity, 3000 hours. Salt spray exceeds 3000 hours.
ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS 08 52 13 - 3
C. Pella EnduraClad exterior aluminum finishes shall meet or exceed the following ASTM performance requirements. 1. ASTM D 1149 (modified)- Ozone Deterioration: 5 ppm ozone, 160º F, 60 percent relative
humidity, 100 hours exposure, little or no loss of cure. 2. ASTM D 2803 – Filiform Corrosion Resistance of Organic Coatings on Metal: No corrosion. 3. ASTM D 4060 – Abrasion Resistance, Taber Abrasion: 500 gram weight, CS-10 wheel, 500
cycles, less than 25 milligram weight loss. 4. ASTM G 85 – Cyclic Acidified Salt Fog Test, Appendix A-2.
D. Interior Finish: Unfinished, ready for site finishing. Stain intending to match surrounding trim. Submit sample on same wood species as exposed window frame.
E. Hardware Finish: Oil Rubbed Bronze.
2.06 TESTING A. All standard operable window units shall be individually factory-tested for air infiltration to ensure
compliance with this specification, in accordance with ASTM # 283.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations and approved Shop Drawings to achieve weathertight and freely operating installation.
B. Maintain alignment with adjacent Work. Secure assembly to framed openings, plumb and square, without distortion.
C. Place insulation in shim spaces around unit perimeter to maintain continuity of building thermal barrier.
D. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of assembly. E. Leave window units closed and locked.
3.02 FIELD TESTING
A. Windows shall be field-tested in accordance with AAMA 502, using Testing Method A. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING
A. Clean window frames and glass in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
SECTION 08 52 13 - ALUMINUM-CLAD WOOD WINDOWS
FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 70 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications 1. The hardware supplier must have in his employ a regular member, in good standing, of the
American Society of Architectural Hardware Consultants, who shall be responsible for the detailing, scheduling and ordering of the finish hardware.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: five (5) years experience in manufacture of comparable systems. C. Comply with the following standards:
1. ICC/ANSI A117.1: Accessible and Usable Building and Facilities. 2. UL Standard 305: Panic Hardware 3. Americans with Disabilities Act “ADA”.
D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Hardware listed or furnished shall meet requirements of Federal, State and Local codes
having jurisdiction. 2. Provide hardware which has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors
required, and which complies with the requirements of the doors and door frame labels. 3. Hardware on all doors leading to or from electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, service stairs,
and the like which represent a hazard to the blind, shall have knurling or abrasive coating on the door lever handle, or bar which will alert the user to potential perils present. The hardware product and installation shall satisfy all governing handicapped codes.
E. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use in doors and frames of the thicknesses, profile, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information in the Contract Documents.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware Schedule: Submit by “Hardware Sets” as set forth in schedule included on Drawings. B. Templates: Within ten (10) days after receipt of the approved corrected hardware schedule, submit
four (4) sets of templates and schedules to the hollow metal frame supplier. C. Operating and Maintenance Data: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements,
Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. Provide Owner with Manufacturer’s parts list and maintenance instructions for each type of hardware supplied and necessary wrenches and tools required for proper maintenance of hardware.
D. Samples of finish hardware showing specified grade, function and finish shall be submitted for any and all substitution requests. Refer to Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. Package each item of hardware in original and individual containers, complete with all necessary fastenings, keys, instructions, and templates for spotting mortising tools. 1. Mark each container with its item number corresponding to the item number on the finish
hardware schedule. 2. Containers holding locks shall show the following corresponding to that shown on the finish
hardware schedule: a. Heading number b. Door number c. Hand of door (when required) d. Keying symbol (developed by Owner)
3. A copy of the approved hardware schedule shall accompany each shipment. B. When hardware must be installed at the factory, the hardware supplier shall send all such needed
items to the respective supplier for their use in installation. The cost of this shipping requirement shall be borne by the hardware supplier.
C. Acceptance at Site: Upon delivery of the finish hardware to the job site, check in and sign for all material delivered and thereafter be responsible for same.
D. Storage and Protection: Provide a secured area with sufficient space and shelving in which to store and inventory all materials under lock and key. Protect hardware from damage at all times.
FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 2
E. All delivery, storage and handling shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Locks: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for remaining hardware: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Should certain hardware items be unavailable or have been replaced by new series, Contractor shall supply hardware which has same appearance, function and quality.
B. Approved Manufacturers or Approved Substitute: 1-HINGES Cal-Royal, Hager, Stanley, McKinney
2-LOCKS & LATCHES Cal-Royal, Yale, Falcon, Sargent, , Corbin-Russwin 3-CLOSERS LCN, Norton, Corbin-Russwin, Sargent 4-EXIT DEVICES VonDuprin, Corbin-Russwin, Sargent, Dor-O-Matic 5-STOPS Glynn-Johnson, Ives, Corbin-Russwin, Hager 6-WEATHERSTRIP Pemko, Reese, Zero, Hager 7-DOOR BOTTOMS Pemko, Reese, Zero 8-THRESHOLDS Pemko, Reese, Zero, Hager 9-SILENCERS Glynn-Johnson, Corbin-Russwin, Builders Brass Works, Hager 10-TRIM NT Quality, Ives, Hager
11-OVERHEAD STOPS Sargent, Dorma C. Keying: All keying shall be keyed to a master key system. Keying Schedule must be approved prior
to ordering any locks.
2.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: REFER TO DRAWING SHEET A21 2.03 HARDWARE
A. General: 1. All hardware is to meet ANSI/BHMA Grade 1 requirements. Notify Architect of any
submittal hardware that does not meet this standard. 2. Provide items as listed in schedule complete to function as intended. 3. Manufacture hardware supplied for metal doors or jambs to template and secure with
machine screws. 4. Where cylindrical locks are used in hollow metal doors, furnish lock reinforcing in the door
at the time of manufacture. 5. Furnish finish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts, or other fastenings of suitable size
and type to anchor the hardware in position for heavy use and long life, and of compatible material and finish.
6. Furnish fastenings with anchors according to the material to which it is applied, and as recommended by the Manufacturer.
7. Furnish hardware fastened to concrete with machine screws and tampins. 8. Fasten closers on wood or mineral core doors with conventional fasteners, unless sex nuts and
bolts are required by UL. Other than that required by UL, no sex nuts and bolts shall be allowed for installation.
9. For surface mounted closer, pivot hinges, concealed closers or holders or other hardware mortised into the top or bottom edges of wood doors, edges shall be a minimum of 4-1/2” (115mm) thoroughly kiln-dried hardwood.
B. Finishes: US10B/613 Oil Rubber Bronze, unless scheduled otherwise. Submit sample to Architect for approval.
C. Butt Hinges: 1. Determine correct clearance from the Drawings. 2. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors and reverse bevel interior locked
doors.
FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 3
3. Doors with closers shall have ball bearing hinges. 4. Flat button, top and bottom tips required. 5. Butt Hinge Length: 4-1/2”x4-1/2” 0.134 gauge for doors up to 36” wide; 5”x5” 0.146 gauge
for doors 36” to 48” wide. 6. Number of Butt Hinges Required: Three (3) for doors up to 7’-6”; Additional hinge for every
2’-6” higher. 7. Provide heavy weight hinges for entrance and restroom doors and medium weight hinges for
remainder of doors unless noted otherwise. D. Door Locks and Latchsets
1. Design shall permit removal of cylinder without removing lock from door so that construction cylinders can be replaced with permanent cylinders at time of occupancy of building.
2. Provide locks and latchsets with 2-3/4” backset and 9/16” throw latchbolt except on existing doors, or unless otherwise noted.
3. Provide strikes with extended lip where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt.
4. Provide wrought boxes with ANSI (1-1/2” x 4-7/8”) strike. 5. Provide heavy duty mortise locksets, 8800 Series or Approved Substitute for exterior doors. 6. Provide Series 5400LN cylindrical locks for doors unless noted otherwise. 7. Provide matching lever handles style Augusta AU, or similar, throughout. 8. Provide knurled finish or abrasive coating on outside lever sets to electrical rooms,
mechanical rooms, and other such spaces, as required by ADA and as noted on the drawings. E. Door Closers:
1. Provide LCN 4010 Series closers, surface mounted with removable covers, finish sprayed to match other hardware.
2. Bodies to be close grained malleable iron, with (3) separate control valves (for adjusting closing and latching speeds and hydraulic backcheck) ANSI Grade 1 or Aluminum.
3. Closer to be equipped with size adjustment (1 through 6) in the field by the installer. 4. Equip closers mounted on wood or mineral core doors with conventional fasteners. Sex nuts
and bolts shall not be allowed. 5. Closers to be installed on interior (push side) of door. 6. All closers on non-labeled interior doors shall have a maximum opening force of five (5)
pounds. 7. All closers shall be adjusted until the sweep period (from an open position of 70º) takes at
least three (3) seconds to move to a point 3” from the latch (measured from the leading edge of the door).
8. Provide closers with hold open function as Scheduled, except on doors at rated openings. F. Stops and Bumpers
1. Wall type shall be used when possible. Provide Glynn Johnson WB35 or Approved Substitute.
2. Locate wall bumpers to prevent lockset lever or closer from touching wall. Align with lockset, so that locking pushbuttons do not contact stops.
3. Walls to receive proper backing for wall bumpers as specified in Division 06 – Wood and Plastics, Section 06 10 00, Rough Carpentry.
G. Silencers 1. At metal frames: (3) at each jamb of single doors, (2) at each jamb of double doors. 2. Not required on doors having weatherstrip or seals. 3. Color: Grey.
H. Weatherstripping, Smoke Seals and Door Bottoms 1. Provide continuous neoprene weatherstripping at head and jamb of all exterior doors. 2. Provide door bottoms on all doors requiring weatherstripping. 3. Fasten all weatherstripping and door bottoms by Manufacturer’s approved methods.
J. Thresholds 1. Sized for opening; to meet handicapped conditions. Provide as detailed on Drawings, or as
listed in Door Schedule. Maximum height: 1/2”. 2. Provide thresholds equal to Pemko 2005DS, as indicated on Drawings.
K. Trim 1. Provide pull, push and kickplates, as indicated on Drawings by NT Quality, or Approved
Substitute. 2. Supply kickplates with a minimum of .050 thickness, 8 inches high by 2 inches less than the
nominal door width of single doors, and 1 inch less than the nominal width of double doors, installed on the stop (push) side.
L. Overhead Stop
FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 4
1. Provide Sargent 690 Series for exterior doors and 1530 for interior doors, or approved substitute concealed overhead stop as scheduled.
2. Contractor shall coordinate installation of stops and closers, per Manufacturer’s recommendation.
3. Finish shall match adjacent hardware. 4. Contractor shall coordinate preparation of doors and frames to receive stops.
M. Door Scope 1. Approved Manufacturers a. Du Seung Trading Corp, 1645 Lakes Parkway, Ste B, Lawrenceville, GA, 30043, 2. Color: FB-Brass. 3. 20-minute Fire Rating at doors requiring such rating.
2.04 KEYING
A. Door Locks: Keyed in like-groups. Submit a keying schedule for Owner’s review and approval before supplying permanent cylinders.
B. All locksets shall be construction keyed. C. Final keying shall be per Owner. D. Supply keys in quantities as directed by Owner: E. Keys shall be nickel silver. F. Master keys shall be stamped as follows: AA1, AB1, AA2, AB2, etc. for each occupancy group.
2.05 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Hardware for doors accessible to use by the handicapped shall comply with all federal, state and local codes which shall supersede this Section. The Architect MUST be notified of any conflicts between regulations and the Specifications prior to the purchase and installation of any hardware.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide a factory hardware technician to be present to assist and instruct those applying finish hardware.
B. Fastening: Furnish items of hardware with attachment screws, bolts, nuts, etc. as required to attach hardware to type of material involved and with finish to match hardware with which they are to be used. 1. Make all attachments to metal by template machine screws. 2. Through-bolt hardware such as door closers, forearm shoes of closers, holding devices and
panic hardware mounted on doors or panels. 3. Attach hardware to masonry or concrete with expansion bolts or similar drilled anchors to
develop full strength of attached device. Set expansion anchors in solid masonry, not mortar joints.
C. Weatherstripping and Thresholds: Run weatherstripping full height of both jambs and full width of head. Run thresholds full width of opening. Run door bottoms full width of doors. Install thresholds with continuous threshold anchors cast into slab. Set thresholds in caulking under Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection, Section 07 92 00, Finish Hardware.
D. Mounting Heights: Maintain ANSI and ADA standard mounting heights for doors from finished floor to centerline of Hardware item.
E. Painting: Do not install door silencers, kickplates, pushplates, door bottoms, and wall stops until after painting is complete. Loosen locksets and panic hardware prior to painting and retighten after painting is complete. Mask hardware or otherwise protect during painting operation.
F. Adjusting: Prior to final inspection, hardware Manufacturer’s representative shall inspect and adjust door closers, locks and items requiring close adjustment and regulation and check all keying.
3.02 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Maintenance Manuals: Provide in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. Include printed sheets from Manufacturers covering hardware furnished. Include following information: 1. Name, address and telephone number of hardware suppliers. 2. Maintenance instructions and parts list for each type of operating hardware including:
a. Locks b. Closers
3. Warranty for closers and other hardware.
SECTION 08 70 00 - FINISH HARDWARE
GLASS AND GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1
DIVISION 08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 08 80 00 GLASS AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Glass and glazing materials shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air vapor seal. 1. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of air and vapor seal. 2. Maintain continuous air and vapor barrier throughout glazed assembly from glass pane to
heel head of glazing sealant. B. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass
as calculated in accordance with IBC Chapter 24, as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330.
C. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 1. Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special
handling or installation requirements for glass and plastic materials. 2. Submit chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special
application requirements for glazing materials. Identify available colors. B. Samples: Submit samples as follows:
1. (2) samples 8” x 8” in size, illustrating glass and plastic units, coloration and design. 2. 4” long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
3. Submit in accordance with Division 01 -General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. C. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Submit Manufacturer’s certification that sealed insulated glass meets or
exceeds specified requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards
1. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
2. ANSI 297.1 Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
B. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for Glazing Installation Methods.
C. Every piece of glass shall bear a label designating type, thickness and quality. Do not remove labels until inspected by Architect.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer’s original unopened packing with labels intact.
B. Storage: All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
C. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer’s instructions.
1.05 WARRANTY A. Provide five (5) year Manufacturer’s warranty for sealed glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass Materials: 1. PPG Ind. 2. SPI Glass Corp. 3. AFGD 4. Approved Substitute
B. Sealed Insulating Glass Materials: 1. Cardinal IG 2. PPG Md. 3. Approved Substitute
GLASS AND GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2
C. Fire Rated Glass: As furnished by Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. or Approved Substitute.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 1/4”
(6mm) thick minimum. B. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT fully tempered Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat,
Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select, conforming to ANSI 297.1; 1/4” (6mm) thick minimum.
2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS A. Insulating Glass Units for Windows: Low-E ASTM E774 and E773: double pane with
polysobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Low-E glass total unit thickness of 1 inch. Max U-value = 0.30. 1. PPG Sungate 500. 2. Cardinal 272. 3. Approved Substitute.
B. Glass Units for Exterior Doors: Low-E or Laminator – 1/4” to 5/8”. Maximum U-value = 0.56.
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or other resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness tested for
compatibility with glazing sealant, minimum length 4”. B. Spacers: Neoprene blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness, adhesive backed on one face only
and tested for compatibility with specified glazing sealant. C. Interior Glazing Compound: Polymerized Butyl Rubber and Inert Fillers (pigments), solvent based
with minimum 75% solids, non-sag consistency, tack free time of 24 hours or less, paintable non-staining.
D. Exterior Glazing Compound: Conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, grade NS, Use G. Compound shall be paintable, or colored to match frame.
E. Glazing Tape: Preshimmed 10% solids, non-shrinking, butyl rubber tape compatible with sealants. If exposed, tape shall be paintable, or colored to match frame.
F. Butt Glazing Sealant: GE 1200 Series Silicone, clear.
2.05 MARKINGS A. Tempered glass shall have each light permanently etched with Manufacturer’s name and his
compliance with ANSI Z-97.1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
B. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be performed.
C. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with or will be concealed by this Work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with combined recommendations of Glass Manufacturer and Manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
B. Clean the glazing, channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to the substrate.
C. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered or heat strengthened. D. Comply with “Glazing Manual” by FGMA, except as shown and specified otherwise by
Manufacturers of glass and glazing materials. E. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and discard those which have observable
edge damage or face imperfections. F. Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. G. Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for glass sizes larger than 50 united
inches. Provide 1/8” minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. H. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible.
Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. J. Miter cut and bond ends together at corners where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that
gaskets will not pull away from corners and result in voids or leaks in the glazing system.
GLASS AND GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3
3.03 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent. B. Cut glazing tape to proper length and set against permanent stops, 3/16” below sightline. Weld
corners together by butting tape and dabbing with sealant. C. Apply bed of sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with glass. D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. E. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape (and heel bead of sealant) with sufficient pressure
to ensure full contact and adhesion at perimeter. F. Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2-foot intervals, 1/4”
below sightline. Place glazing tape on glass with tape flush with sightline. G. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass but not
more than 3/8” below sightline. H. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform and level line, flush with sightline. Tool or
wipe cap bead surface with solvent for smooth appearance.
3.04 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to proper length and install against permanent stop, projecting 1/16” above sightline. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 point. C. Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape with sufficient pressure to ensure full contact and
adhesion at perimeter. D. Install removable stops; spacer strips inserted between glass and applied stops at 2-foot intervals. 1/4”
below sightline. E. Fill gap between glass and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glass to
uniform and level line. F. Neatly trim off excess tape to sightline.
3.05 ADJUSTING A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way
during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. 3.06 CLEANING
A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 50 00, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B. Remove labels after Work is completed. C. Clean acrylic sheet glazing in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. D. Remove glazing compound and putty from glass and adjoining surfaces. E. Final cleaning of glass shall occur as defined under Division 01 - General Requirements, 01 70 00,
Contract Closeout.
3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to
framing held away from glass. B. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. C. Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction operations that may
damage glass.
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLASS AND GLAZING
END OF DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS
GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM 09 20 00 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 20 00 GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. C 36: Specification for Gypsum Wallboard
2. C 620: Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board 3. C 840: Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board
B. Gypsum Association: (GA) 1. GA-214: Recommended Specifications: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Sample: Submit 2’x2’ sample of textures for approval before starting finishing Work in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. During gypsum board application and finishing, maintain temperatures within the building within the range of 50° to 70° F. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excess moisture.
B. Environmental Requirements: Establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C 840.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gypsum board products, joint treatment products, and textured coatings from a single Manufacturer.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping: Have materials shipped in Manufacturer’s original packages showing Manufacturer’s name and product brand name. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials inside and protected from damage by the elements. Protect ends, edges, and faces of gypsum boards from damage. Protect furring channel accessories from bending.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. United States Gypsum Co. (USG) D. G-P Gypsum Corp. B. National Gypsum Co. E. Approved Substitute. C. Celotex Building Products.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Wall Board for Walls and Partitions: 5/8” thick tapered gypsum board. Install water resistant wallboard in restrooms equal to USG “WR”. Seal cut edges of water resistant wall boards.
B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: A gypsum core ceiling panel with additives to enhance the sag resistance of the core and surfaced with paper on front, back and long edges. 5/8” thick unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.
C. Wall Board for partitions at ceramic tile location as shown on Interior Elevations in Drawings: Georgia Pacific 5/8 inch Dens-Shield Tile Backer or Approved Substitute.
D. Wall Board for Walls and Partitions at Fire-Rated Assemblies: 5/8” thick “Fire Code X” tapered gypsum board. Comply with ASTMC36 Type “X”.
E. Adhesive: As recommended by the Gypsum Wallboard Manufacturer. F. Suspended Gypsum Ceiling System: USG wall-to-wall drywall suspension system or similar. G. Perimeter Trim at Curvilinear Soffits illustrated: Armstrong Axium Classic Trim (or Approved
Substitute.) with 8” deep profile except where specifically voted otherwise on Drawings. Color Selection to be made from Manufacturer’s standard palette.
H. Fasteners
GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM 09 20 00 - 2
1. Wallboard or Framing: USG Hi-Lo Type S Bugle Head Screws or equal. 2. Stud to Door Frame: 1/2” USG Type S-12 Pan Head Screws or equal. 3. Wallboard to Wallboard: 1-1/2” USG Type G Bugle Head Type “S” Point Screws.
J. Hanger Wire: 9 gauge, galvanized. K. Tie Wire: 16 gauge, galvanized, or USG metal furring channel clip. L. Joint Treatment
1. Prefiller: USG “Durabond 90” or equal. 2. Tape: USG “Perf-a-tape” or equal. 3. Filler: USG “Ready-Mixed Joint Compound” or equal.
M. Metal Trim: USB Sheetrock Brand Paper-Faced Metal Beads and Trim. 1. Control Joints 2. Corner Beads 3. Casing Beads/J-Mold.
N. Access Doors: Shall be Milcor or Approved Substitute. Style DW at all gypsum wallboard locations and style M stainless steel at tile locations. Installation of access doors provided under mechanical and electrical sections is considered part of this section. Size as shown or as required by other Trades. Provide quantity as required by code. Coordinate locations with General Contractor and verify all locations with Architect, prior to installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Inspection: Inspect framing to receive drywall. Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor.
B. Acceptance: Beginning of Work indicates acceptance of framing. 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply and finish in accordance with Gypsum Association GA 216. Install Work under this section in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations, and the Gypsum Construction Handbook published by United States Gypsum Company. Install tile backer board at all wall locations to receive tile. Install water-resistant gypsum board in restrooms, and janitors rooms (walls and ceilings) which do not receive tile finish.
B. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4” to 1/2” space and trim edge with casing bead. Seal joints with acoustical sealant. Do not fasten drywall directly to stud system runner tracks.
C. Layout: Apply wall panels vertically full height. Apply ceiling panels in as long lengths as practical to keep joints to a minimum.
D. Fasteners: Apply boards to framing with screws in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Moisture Resistant: Apply W/R sealant to cut edges and nail heads. F. Cut Holes: Holes for electrical devices, pipes, etc. shall not exceed size of cover plate or escutcheon.
Repair oversize hole with new panel of gypsum board; spackle filling will not be permitted. G. Trim: Apply at corners, where drywall abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated. H. Acoustical Sealant: Apply at all penetrations of gypsum board at walls with acoustical insulation, and
as noted on Drawings. J. Finishing: The Gypsum Association levels of finish shall be provided at the following locations:
1. Level 1 Finish is acceptable at Attics, Plenum spaces, other concealed locations unless otherwise indicated.
2. Level 2 Finish is acceptable behind tile application, and in rooms used only for Mechanical and/or Electrical Equipment unless otherwise indicated.
3. Level 3 Finish may be used behind rigid or heavy-weight wall coverings unless otherwise indicated.
4. Level 4 Finish is typical throughout the building and shall be provided unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.
5. Level 5 Finish is not required for this Project. K. Priming Gypsum board shall be primed under Section 09 90 00, Painting and Staining, before
texturing. L. Texturing: Light orange peel texture. Provide minimum 2’-0”x 2’-0” texture sample to Architect for
approval, prior to commencing Work. M. Exposed Edges 1. At all exposed edges, use corner beads or casing beads to provide a true edge. Install with
joint treatment finish per Manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Complete metal framing at corners, other than 90 degree corners, using sheet metal of same
gauge as adjacent framing to provide solid backing for gypsum board application.
GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM 09 20 00 - 3
N. Provide framing, furring and chases as required to incorporate Work of other trades including mechanical and electrical to provide recessed mounting unless specifically noted otherwise and a smooth, flush finish appearance.
P. Control Joints: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install control joints at 30 feet maximum spacing in walls, ceilings, and soffits. Where possible, align control joints with edge of door frame; consult with Architect where this is not possible. Provide control joints where new construction meets existing.
Q. Cleaning 1. Do not allow the accumulation of scraps and debris arising from the Work of this section.
2. Maintain the premises in a neat and orderly condition at all times. 3. In the event of spilling or splashing compound onto other surfaces, immediately remove the
spilled or splashed materials and traces of residue to the approval of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 09 20 00 - GYPSUM WALLBOARD AND CEILING SYSTEM
CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILE 09 30 10 - .1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 30 10 CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards listed. 1. Tile Council of America TCA 2. Ceramic Tile Institute CTI 3. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM 4. American National Standards Institute ANSI
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality, grade, and certificates: Tile shall be Standard Grade. All packages containing ceramic tile
shall be unopened and shall accompany the Manufacturer’s Grade Certificate or an affidavit stating that the tile used on the job is equal or better than the Standard Grade Tile, per TCA 137.1, current edition.
B. Installation of tile Work shall be in accordance with and conform to ANSI A108.1, A108.4, A108.5, and the TCA “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation”.
1.03 SAMPLES
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals for Shop Drawing, Product Data and Samples.
B. Submit samples to the Architect for approval and color selection, in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
C. Do not order materials until samples have been approved, and colors have been selected.
1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened containers bearing the Manufacturer’s label. All
delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Deliver dry-set mortar in sealed, moisture-proof containers. C. Store materials to allow easy access to the Work. D. Protect materials from damage during storage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. As indicated on Interior Design Drawings. No Substitutions. 2.02 TILE
A. Wall, Base and Floor Tile as indicated on Drawings. B. All floor tile shall meet ADA requirements for slip resistance. C. Provide samples of selected Series Tile, for final selection and approval by Interior Designer.
2.03 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Setting Type: Thin-set at walls (TCA Method W243) and thinset with crack isolation membrane at slabs on grade.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. C. Water: Potable. D. Grout: In 1/8” to 1/4” exposed joint width E. Edge Protection: Install Schluter Systems, RENO-MU 100 – Aluminum Anodized.
2.04 MIXES
A. Thinset Mortar: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Grout: Mix in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILE 09 30 10 - .2
A. Grind or fill concrete substrates as required to comply with allowable variations. See applicable Sections of these Specifications for construction tolerances.
B. Clean each substrate with 10% solution of muriatic acid as may be required to remove curing compounds or other substances that would interfere with proper bond of specified mortar for tile.
C. Seal substrate with sealer as recommended by Manufacturer of mortar. D. Inspect substrates to receive tile. Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and
from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown: 1. Floors: 1/8” in 10 ft. run, any direction; + 1/8” at any location; 1/32” offset at any location. 2. Walls: 1/8” in 8 ft. run, any direction; + 1/8” at any location; 1/32” offset at any location. 3. Joints: Joints shall be 1/8” wide with + 1/32” joint width variation at any location; 1/16” in
3 ft. run for deviation from plumb and true, and for other variations in alignment of joints. E. Perform moisture test as required by Manufacturer, to verify concrete slab cure, and comply with
Manufacturer’s moisture standards. F. Beginning of Work indicate acceptance of substrates.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Layout tile Work so that no tiles less than half size occur. Align joints of cove bases and trim with adjacent tile joints.
B. Apply tile in strict accordance with recommendations of Manufacturers and the applicable requirements of reference standards.
C. Grouting 1. In accordance with ANSI standards. 2. Force maximum grout into joints; tool joints before grout sets. 3. Fill all gaps and skips so that finished joint is uniform in color, smooth and without voids, pin
holes, or low spots. 4. Sponge and wash tile thoroughly, diagonally across joints and finally polish with clean, dry
cloths.
3.03 CURING A. Damp Cure grouts a minimum of 72 hours after grouting. B. Close areas to traffic until tile is firmly set. Provide adequate barricades.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Complete cleaning and protections in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section
01 50 00, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. B. Remove grout and all foreign matter from tile and leave in a polished condition. C. The protection of the finished Work is made a part of this Section and any material damaged at any
time shall become the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be replaced with new matching material.
D. Replace tiles with broken corners, cracks, fractures, and minor breaks with materials to match the original installation.
3.05 EXTRA STOCK
A. After completion of Work, deliver to latter site replacement materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows: 1. Tile flooring: not less than (1) box for each (50) boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, size
and color installed. 2. Base: not less than 10 linear feet of each type, finish, and color installed.
SECTION 09 30 10 - CERAMIC/PORCELAIN TILE
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 50 00 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 50 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 STANDARDS AND QUALITY
A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards listed: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 2. Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association AIMA 3. Suspended Ceiling Manufacturers Association SCMA
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications 1. Applicator shall have satisfactorily installed accepted suspension system and acoustical units
on at least three (3) other projects of equal scope. B. Design Criteria
1. Deflection: Suspension system components, hangers and fastening devices shall support light fixtures, ceiling grilles, and acoustical units without deflecting more than 1/360 of the span.
2. Test for deflection in accordance with methods and procedures prescribed by ASTM C636 with latest revisions.
3. Reduce hanger spacing as required to satisfy design criteria. 4. Increase hanger sizes as required to satisfy design criteria. 5. Increase members and components of system, as required, to satisfy design criteria.
C. Fire Safety Requirements: 1. Maximum Flame Spread index of acoustical materials: 25 2. Flame Spread index shall be listed by UL Building Materials List or determined by ASTM E
84-67. D. Allowable tolerance of finished acoustical ceiling system: Level within 1/8” in 12’.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals, Shop
Drawing, Product Data and Samples. B. Submit a sample of the ceiling tile and suspension system that is being proposed for the installation to
the Architect for approval. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Schedule deliveries to avoid delays in the Work. B. Deliver and store materials in their original unopened protective containers in accordance with
Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. C. Deliver materials with Manufacturer’s labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness, and fire
rating, as applicable, legible and intact. D. Store materials off the floor to assure proper protection from water and cover if necessary. E. Handle material so as to prevent soiling of finished acoustical units.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS INTERIOR
A. Exposed Grid 1. Acceptable Manufacturer
a. Armstrong. b. USG. c. Approved Substitute.
2. Product: Prelude 15/16”. 3. Color and Finishes: White. 4. Hanger Wire: 12 gauge galvanized annealed.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILES INTERIOR A. Acoustical Panel
1. Acceptable Manufacturer a. Armstrong. b. USG. c. Approved Substitute.
2. Product: Cirrus 3. Size: 24” x 48” x 3/4” and 24” x 24” x 3/4”
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 50 00 - 2
4. Color: White. 5. Edge: Angled Tegular. 6. NRC Acoustic Rating: 0.70.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide all accessories as recommended by Manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Examine spaces and correct defects that could interfere with proper installation. B. Lay out spaces and arrange suspension system in regular pattern as shown on the Drawings. C. Beginning of Work indicates acceptance of substrates.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be by experienced craftsman trained to do this type of Work. Contractor shall use a laser device for installation of ceiling grid.
B. Install acoustic treatment after moist materials have been installed. Maintain temperature of not less than 50-1/2° F in spaces requiring installation of acoustical materials.
C. Perform all installation according to the Code of Practices of Acoustical Ceiling System Installation as prepared by NACA, and Specifications for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceiling System as prepared by AMA.
D. Install hanger wires not over 48” apart above the main beam, unless otherwise indicated or approved. E. Securely anchor hanger wires to structure above. F. Secure lower ends of hanger wires to main tees by three (3) twists around itself. Space main tees 2’0”
O.C. in 2’x4’ grid. Join cross tees to main tee with a positive interlock. At perimeter areas, columns, etc., secure angle molding to vertical surfaces. Rest tees on angle moldings at corners of all light fixtures.
G. Install main runner beams at 4’0” O.C. in 2’x2’ and 2’x4” grid. H. Install cross tees perpendicular to the main runner beams on both sides of light fixtures and ceiling
diffusers. J. Roll form angle moldings that must follow a curved wall, plane, radius or bend. NOTE: Notching or
cutting the exposed leg at angle molding to fit radius or bend will not be accepted. K. Install angle moldings at all points where ceiling abuts a dissimilar material. L. Unless indicated otherwise, lay out suspension system to the column center lines in areas where
columns are free standing. Lay out system to center lines of rooms working in all four directions in areas that have no free standing columns. Cut units next to walls shall be more than 1/2 board width and/or length.
M. Install acoustical treatment and suspension system according to instructions and recommendations of the Manufacturer.
N. Suspension system for ceilings shall be erected strong and rigid enough to carry the acoustical tile and support the light fixtures in a true and level plane.
P. Erect suspension system level, straight, and parallel to walls. Q. Cutting and splicing shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner. R. Expose no acoustic tile cut edges. S. Cut holes in acoustic units as required for lighting fixtures, air conditioning outlets, sprinkler heads
and speakers. NOTE: Do not split tiles into two pieces to accommodate fixtures. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Complete cleaning and protections in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 50 00, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.
B. Upon completion of the Work, remove all damaged and soiled acoustical boards and replace with new matching material.
C. Protect materials and accessories from damage at all times. D. Remove excess materials, packaging, and debris from the job site.
3.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. B. Provide five percent (5%) additional ceiling tile material, of each type, identical to that installed, for
maintenance and replacement use.
END OF SECTION 09 50 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09 65 00 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 65 00 RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 INTENT
A. Include all labor, material and appliances, and perform operations in connection with the installation of floor covering and all related Work, complete, in strict accordance with the Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Resilient flooring, wall base where indicated on the Drawings.
1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65º F in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours
prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55º F in areas where resilient flooring materials have been installed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as determined by Manufacturer’s recommended bond and moisture test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Products and Manufacturers indicated on the Interior Design Drawings or approved substitute prior to Bid. See Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Section 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form.
B. Resilient Base to have performed 90 degree interior and exterior corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, inspect subfloor conditions, and take full responsibility for complete Work.
B. Perform concrete moisture test as required, to verify concrete slab cure, and comply with Manufacturer’s moisture compliance standards.
C. Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring Manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in subfloors.
D. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring Manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with Manufacturer’s directions.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install flooring using method indicated in strict compliance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings.
3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended
by flooring Manufacturer. Protect installed flooring with heavy Kraft paper or other covering. B. Finishing: After completion of installation and just prior to final inspection of Work, thoroughly
clean floor and accessories. C. Apply polish and buff, with type of polish, number of coats, and buffing procedures in compliance
with flooring Manufacturer’s instructions. D. Complete cleaning and protections in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section
01 50 00, Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. 3.04 EXTRA STOCK
A. After completion of Work, deliver to site, materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed, and as follows:
RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE 09 65 00 - 2
1. Sheet Flooring: Not less than 75 square feet. 2. Tile flooring: not less than (1) box for each (50) boxes or fraction thereof, for each type, size
and color installed. 3. Base: not less than 10 linear feet of each type, finish, and color installed.
END OF SECTION 09 65 00 - RESILIENT FLOORING AND BASE
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide carpet tile and installation for the expansion and to replace all existing carpet throughout the existing facility. Verify color and product with Interior Designer before ordering. Refer to Tags on the Interior Design Drawings for extent.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include Manufacturer’s written data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, installation method, and maintenance instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. All relevant architectural elements: columns, doorways, casework, etc. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Carpet Tile type, color pattern, and dye lot. 4. Pattern of installation including:
a. Tile direction (orientation) b. Pile direction c. Locations of inserts and borders
5. Locations and details for transitions to other flooring materials. 6. A “Finish Key” that can be related easily to samples.
C. Samples: For each of the following product samples in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Each sample is to be clearly labeled and identified. 1. Each type of Carpet Tile (one full tile) 2. Edging, Reducer Strips, and other accessories.
D. Product Schedule: Use same room identification numbers shown on the Architectural Drawings. 1.03 QUALTIY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have had experience installing Carpet Tile on at least two (2) other projects in Colorado of comparable or greater size and scope. Said projects shall be identified in the submittal.
B. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2 – Products below, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing agency acceptable to the governing authorities.
C. Carpet Tile including backing to be of totally recyclable content. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Store materials for three (3) days prior to installation in areas to be installed to achieve temperature stability.
B. Maintain minimum 70º F ambient temperature three (3) days prior to, during, and for at least twenty-four (24) hours after installation.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Submit Manufacturer’s signed warranty for a warranty period of twenty (20) years minimum. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. As indicated on the Interior Design Drawings.
2.02 MATERIALS A. As indicated on the Interior Design Drawings.
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrate and conditions are satisfactory before proceeding with installation. 1. Concrete Subfloors: Verify compliance with ASTM F710. 2. Wood Subfloors: Verify free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with
adhesive bond or show through surface. 3.02 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subflooring according to compound Manufacturer’s standards and recommendations.
B. Remove coatings including curing compound that are incompatible with adhesive. C. Broom and vacuum clean surface immediately prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install Carpet Tiles per Manufacturer’s written installation instructions. B. Cut and fill Carpet Tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces and other permanent obstructions. C. Extend Carpet Tile to opposite flush face of all doors in closed position. D. Extend Carpet Tile into the toe spaces, closets, and other similar openings. E. Install patterns parallel to walls and borders. F. Use non-permanent, non-staining markers to maintain markers placed by other trades.
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately following installation: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by Carpet Tile Manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from Carpet Tile surface. 3. Vacuum Carpet Tile using commercial equipment. 4. Clean finish of Work in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 70
00, Contract Closeout. B. Protect Carpet Tiles from damage during rest of construction including moving and placement of
furniture and casework. Protect Work in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
CORK WALL COVERINGS 09 72 13 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 72 13 CORK WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cork Wall Coverings 1. Bulletin Board, adhesive installation. 2. Resilient Transition Accessories.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM F 2034 Standard Specification for Linoleum Sheet Floor Covering. 2. ASTM F 1861 Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 255 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. International Standards and Training Alliance (INSTALL): 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide material which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to performance criteria certified by manufacturer without defects, damage, or failure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Division 01 – General Conditions, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's product sheet, for specified products in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures in accordance with Division 01, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:
1. Certification of compliance: Letter of compliance signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Sustainable Submittals
1. Product data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2 for products having recycled content, including documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.
2. Product data for Credit MR6 for products having rapidly renewable content, including documentation indicating percentages by weight of rapidly renewable content as required by Division 01. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having Rapidly Renewable content.
3. Product data for Credit EQ 4.1 for adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content as required by Division 01.
4. Confirm that each product complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small Scale Environmental Chambers, including 2004 Addenda. If a product specified has not been tested as noted, provide a substitution to the Architect for review and approval of an equal product meeting noted California Department of Health standard.
5. Product data and certification of SMART sustainable product certification pursuant to LEED innovation credit.
A. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in
accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 07 70 00 Project Closeout
CORK WALL COVERINGS 09 72 13 - 2
(Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance.
B. Warranty: Submit Warranty documents in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 07 70 00 Project Closeout.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications 1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of
work similar to that required for this project. 2. Engage installer certified as qualified by the Manufacturer. 3. Certificate: Submit certificate indicating installer qualification.
B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide material with the following fire performance
characteristics as determined by testing products in accordance with ASTM method indicated below by a certified testing laboratory or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Tunnel Furnace Test Method: Class B Rating (ASTM E 84/NFPA 255)
C. Mock-Ups: Install at project site a job mock-up using acceptable products and manufacturer approved installation methods. Obtain Owner's, Architect's and Interior Designer’s acceptance of finish color, texture and pattern, and workmanship standard. 1. Mock-Up Size: Minimum four (4) square feet. 2. Incorporation: Mock-up may be incorporated into final construction upon Owner's approval.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Material should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent
HVAC should be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of 68º F for at least 48 hours prior to the installation.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive material should be clean, fully enclosed and weathertight. The permanent HVAC must be fully operational, controlled and set at a minimum of 68º F for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation. The material should be conditioned in the same manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. Areas to receive material shall be adequately lighted to allow for proper inspection of the substrate, installation and seaming, and for final inspection. 1. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be
installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Temperature Conditions: 68º F for a minimum of seven days prior to, during, and seven days after the installation.
C. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Finishing Operations: Install material after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations, have been completed.
B. Concrete Curing: Do not install over concrete substrates until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive as determined by manufacturer's recommended bond test.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
CORK WALL COVERINGS 09 72 13 - 3
1. Warranty Period: Five (5) year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. Comply with requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 07 70 00 Project Closeout. 1. Quantity: Furnish quantity of material units equal to five ( 5%) percent of amount installed,
but not less than ten (10) square feet. 2. Delivery, Storage and Protection: Comply with Owner's requirements for delivery, storage
and protection of extra materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CORK WALL COVERINGS
A. Manufacturer: Forbo Flooring, Inc. or Approved Substitute. 1. Contact: 8 Maplewood Dr., Humboldt Industrial Park, Hazleton, PA 18202;
800.842.7839. B. Bulletin Board Sheet and Adhesive.
1. Description: Homogeneous tackable surface material made of primary natural materials consisting of linseed oil, cork, rosin binders and dry pigments mixed and calendared onto a natural jute backing. The uni-color extends throughout the thickness of the material.
2. Size: AS indicated on the Interior Design Drawings. 3. Gauge: 6.0mm (1/4”) 4. Backing: Jute 5. Pattern and Color: As selected by Interior Designer from Manufacturer's standard patterns
and colors. 6. Adhesive: Forbo Flooring, Inc., L 910W Adhesive
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, and product carton instructions for installation.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions (which have been previously installed under other sections) are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions (i.e. bond test, etc.).
B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation.
B. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Substrate: Substrate shall be sound, smooth, flat, permanently dry, clean, and free of all
foreign materials including, but not limited to, dust, paint, grease, oils, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Adhesive Installation: Cut required length from roll, allowing 2-3 inches overlap. Lay sheets flat to acclimate, preferably 24 hours prior to installation. Back roll sheets once in reverse direction to release roll stretch. Remove the factory edge from both sides of the material. Apply adhesive and place sheet into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. 1. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by manufacturer for specific
adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 150 ft2/gallon, as recommended by manufacturer. B. Installation Techniques:
1. Adhere material to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed installation.
CORK WALL COVERINGS 09 72 13 - 4
a. Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
2. Roll material as required by Manufacturer. C. Finish Patterns: As selected by Interior Designer.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: In accordance with Division 1 – General Requirements, Section 01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended
by floor manufacturer. 2. Dust or wipe with a damp cloth.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.
3.07 INITIAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
A. General: Include in Contract Sum Amount cost for initial maintenance procedures, and execute procedures after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Initial maintenance to be conducted by contractor.
END OF SECTION 09 72 13 - CORK WALL COVERINGS
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09 84 13 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 84 13 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install acoustical wall panels of sizes and at locations as scheduled and as illustrated on the Interior Elevations on the Drawings. Panel edges are to align and have constant intervening spacing as illustrated and scheduled. Align panel edges to adjacent trim work, and that of nearby door, windows, soffits, and cabinetry as shown.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials. 1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C423 - Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation
Room Method. 3. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption
Tests. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 – General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each type of
acoustical wall panel required. C. Samples: Submit 12 inch x 12 inch samples of specified acoustical wall panel featuring specified
surface material, edge and corner detail and method of attachment. D. Shop Drawings: Submit elevation drawings showing wall panel layout, methods of attachment and
installation details. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and installation components by a single manufacturer whose published product literature clearly indicates compliance of acoustical wall panels with specified requirements.
B. Applicator: Installation by skilled applicators with no less than three years of documented experience installing acoustical wall panels of the types and extent specified for the project.
C. Fire Performance Characteristics: 1. ASTM E 84. Surface Burning Characteristics: All panel components have a Class A fire
rating. D. Mock-Up Panels:
1. Install min four (4) panels at each room where panels are to be installed. 2. Mock-Up is to be used as the standard of performance for the project a and will be
incorporated into the finished project. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver acoustical wall panels to the project site in unbroken and undamaged original factory packaging and clearly labeled with the Manufacturer’s identification label, quality or grade.
B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry, climate controlled storage area within temperature and humidity ranges recommended by Manufacturer. Provide protection from damage and exposure to harmful environmental conditions.
C. Acclimatization: Before installing acoustical wall panels, allow panels to acclimatize to room temperature and humidity.
D. Handling: Carefully handle acoustical wall panels to avoid soiling and damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply acoustical treatments when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
temperature ranges required by the wall panel Manufacturer. 2. Do not install acoustical panels until wet work such as concrete, plastering and painting is
done and building is completely enclosed. 3. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and
ambient temperatures above 60 degrees F unless required otherwise by Manufacturer’s instructions.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09 84 13 - 2
4. Maintain constant recommended temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours prior to, throughout the installation period and for 48 hours after panel installation completion.
5. Field Measurements: Check and verify actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Submit Manufacturer’s 1 year written warranty against manufacturing defects from date of substantial completion.
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Replacement Materials: Provide one (1) full-size units equal of each type of acoustical wall panel installed for maintenance purposes. Furnish replacement materials from the same production run as installed materials. Protect material with clearly marked packaging indicating product identification and project location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER
A. Wall Technologies by Owens Corning B. Sound Designs by Koroseal C. Approved Substitute
2.02 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
A. Sizes: 1-1/2” thick x sizes scheduled on the drawings. B. Core: Fiberglass with hardened edges C. Textile Surface Finish:
1. Manufacturer: Guilford of Maine 2. Product Series: One of the following will be selected by the Interior Designer a. Coastline b. Lido c. Otto 3. Color: To be selected by Interior Designer 4. Width: 66” 5. Orientation: Fabric is not directional allowing for “rotated panels” as illustrated.
B. Acoustical Wall Panel Accessories: Select 1. Mechanical Clips: Two-part z-clips with one part mechanically fastened to the panel in
factory applied resin hardened attachment area and the other part fastened to the wall. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Site Conditions: Do not proceed with installation until space is conditioned to meet Manufacturer’s recommendations and all wet work is complete.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Measure each wall area and establish layout of acoustical treatments. B. Assure equal border widths at opposite edges of each wall. C. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall panels by attaching the panels to an existing wall per the Manufacturers written instructions, as shown on Drawings.
B. Attach wall panels to the wall using two-part z-clips anchors C. All field fabricated edge details will be finished in accordance with Manufacturer’s written
Installation instructions. 3.04 CLEAN-UP COMPLETION
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustic wall panels that have become soiled during handling and installation according to Manufacturer’s recommended cleaning instructions
B. Replace damaged panels. C. Upon completion of the work, remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from the
wallcovering installation. Leave areas in neat clean and orderly condition.
END OF SECTION 09 84 13 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PAINTING AND STAINING 09 90 00 - 1
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTING AND STAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless noted otherwise. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, shop priming of ferrous metals and fabricated components are
included under respective trades. Prefinished items are not included. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Paint or Stain Samples: Make paint or stain 12”x12” samples of each finish and color as requested by Architect. Remake samples if requested, until approved.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand and name of Manufacturer in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
1.04 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not paint or stain outside in extreme cold, frosty, foggy or damp weather. In winter weather, paint or stain only when the temperature is 50º F over and surfaces are absolutely dry. In no case will exterior painting be allowed while dust is blowing.
B. Condition of Spaces and Surfaces: Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. Do not finish in rooms or spaces where rubbish has accumulated or while rubbish is being removed. Finishing will not be allowed in dusty rooms. Do not remove rubbish while finish is fresh. All surfaces to which finish is to be applied shall be dry and clean.
C. Protection: Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where painting is being done to protect floors and other Work from damage during the execution of this Work. Where it becomes necessary to remove temporary coverings placed by others in every branch of the Work, replace same in proper manner. Remove oil rags and waste from the building every night. Do not allow to accumulate.
D. Damage to Work of Others: Subcontractor performing Work under this Section shall be responsible for any damage done to the Work of other trades. Replace any materials damaged to such an extent that they cannot be restored to their original conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Products not specified by name shall be “best grade” or “first line” products of acceptable Manufacturers. Where possible, all materials shall be of a single Manufacturer.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: The best quality materials as manufactured by any of the following Manufacturers will be acceptable: 1. Benjamin Moore. 2. Sherwin-Williams. 3. Kelly-Moore. 4. Pittsburgh. 5. Pratt & Lambert. 6. Kwal-Howells. 7. Approved Substitute.
C. Colors, as indicated on Interior Design Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION
A. General: 1. Sand finishes on wood and metal surfaces between coats to assure smoothness and adhesion
of subsequent coats. Use extra fine sandpaper to avoid cutting the edges when sanding. Apply putty or spackling compound after surfaces are primed and primer is dry. Bring filler materials flush with adjoining surfaces.
PAINTING AND STAINING 09 90 00 - 2
2. Wall shall be perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting Work. Fill cracks, holes or checks full and make smooth before finish is applied to surfaces. Fill cracks, etc. which occur after walls are sized. Wall shall be perfectly dry and smooth before finish is applied.
B. Interior Ferrous Metal: Remove foreign material from unprimed metal with wire brush and dust clean. C. Shop Primed Metals: Touch-up shop primed metals with a primer similar to the existing. D. Interior Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Wash with mineral spirits and prime as specified. E. Exterior Ferrous Metal: Remove foreign material from unprimed metal with wire brush and dust
clean. F. Exterior Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized Surfaces): Wash with mineral spirits.
3.02 WORKMANSHIP
A. Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials. If the surfaces are not in proper shape for painting, repair, rebuild or refinish before proceeding with the Work. Otherwise, Subcontractor shall be responsible for any poor Work caused by improper surface preparation.
B. The application of the first coat does not relieve responsibility for the base. Do not apply any coats on either damp or wet surfaces and in no case, until the preceding coat is dry and hard. Spread finish evenly and thoroughly brush out. Sand Work between coats. Finish the upper and lower edges of wood doors the same as the face. This Work shall be done in all cases after doors have been fitted and are ready for final hanging.
C. Finish coat shall be in color as selected by Architect. Confirm with Architect before ordering. Tint primers to match finish coat.
D. What happened when the boat carrying red paint bumped into the boat carrying blue paint? (They were marooned.)
3.03 EXTERIOR NEW CONSTRUCTION
A. Ferrous Metal Prime Coat Alkyd B50WZ0001 Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer Finish Two coats Epoxy or B54 Industrial Enamel B. Galvanized Metal Cleaner Proclean Professional Prepwash Cleaner
Prime Coat Galvite B50WZ30 Finish Two coats Epoxy or B54 Industrial Enamel C. Wood
Prime Coat B42 W0004-1 A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer Finish Two coats Exterior Latex Satin
3.04 INTERIOR NEW CONSTRUCTION
A. Ferrous Metal Prime Coat Alkyd B50WZ0001 Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer Finish Two coats Epoxy or B54 Industrial Enamel
B. New Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard Prime Coat Pro-Mar 200 Latex Primer B28W200 Finish Two coats Eggshell Pro-Mar 200 B20W2200
C. New Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard Prime Coat Pro-Mar 200 Latex Primer B28W200 Finish Two Coats Progreen 200 Low VOC Eggshell Latex B31-600
3.05 STAINING APPLICATIONS A. Interior Transparent Wood First Coat Wood Filler tinted to shade of stain Second Coat Wood Classics Sherwin-Williams Stain A49-200 or Approved Substitute. Finish Two coats Satin Finish Polyurethane 467F1 Poly-U-Varnish Color Match “Medium Cherry on Oak” by Jasper Library Furniture 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Paint miscellaneous objects including, but not limited to, flashings, vents, electrical panel covers, exhaust fans, roof drains etc., color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s standard palette.
3.07 CORRECTIONS AND CLEAN UP
A. All adjoining surfaces, finished floors and fixtures shall be carefully protected throughout the painting operations against spray or splash stains, marks or other damage, and should such defacement occur as a result of the Work, it shall be corrected in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and without added cost to the Client. Upon completion and before acceptance, all equipment, rubbish and unused
PAINTING AND STAINING 09 90 00 - 3
materials accumulated in the painting process, shall be removed from the buildings and grounds. Paint and oil spots shall be removed from the floors, sidewalk, stairs, walls, hardware, etc. Protect painted surfaces until final acceptance of Work.
3.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver stock of extra materials to Client, in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout. Any partial packages of products remaining after completion of the Work shall have containers cleaned, labeled, sealed, and turned over to the Client.
END OF SECTION 09 90 00 - PAINTING AND STAINING
END OF DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS 10 11 00 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 11 00 VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Markerboards 1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and construction of units including joints, frames, trim, and electrical connections if applicable.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set representing Manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units fully assembled to the greatest extent practical. Handle and store in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment and with Manufacturer's recommendations.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
B. Manufacturer's lifetime warranty for porcelain enamel surface. C. Manufacturer's standard two-year limited warranty for fused film writing surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Aywon Chalkboard & Corkboard, Inc., which is located at: 100 E. Diamond Ave.; Hazleton, PA 18201; 800.523.-6671; www.aywon.com
B. Approved Substitute 2.02 PRODUCTS
A. Markerboards: Aywon Big Apple Markerboard 1. Quantity: Two (2). 2. Frame: Aluminum, with full-length factory installed mounting rail. 3. Size: As indicated on Interior Design Drawings. 4. Material: White porcelain enamel 6100. 5. Gloss: Low gloss. 6. Chalk/marker Tray: Aluminum, AY-10, with closed-end design. 7. Cork Display Rail: 1 in.
B. Accessories: 1. Combination map hook and paper holders. 2. Magnets. 3. Magnetic drymarkers. 4. Magnetic eraser marker holders. 5. Velco replaceable erasers.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Field measure and verify blocking installation prior to fabrication and installation. Shop assemble units to the greatest extent practical.
VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS 10 11 00 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions, in proper alignment with adjacent materials. 3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 10 11 00 - VISUAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS
SIGN SYSTEM 10 14 23 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 14 23 SIGN SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide and install sign code-compliant restroom signs.
1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Provide Shop Drawings for each type of sign, with typeface, size, color and insert indicated. C. Submit Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions in accordance with Division 01 –
General Requirements, Section 01 70 00 , Contract Closeout.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01
- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. B. Package signs, labeled in name groups. C. Store adhesive at ambient room temperature.
1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70o F. Maintain this minimum during and
after installation of signs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Avalis Wayfinding Solutions, Inc. (Formerly ABC SignWorks); 970.223.9211 B. Avalanche Sign Mfg; 719.471.4985. C. Approved Substitute.
2.02 SIGN TYPES A. Accessible Restroom entry signage as required by the ADA, ICC/ANSI A117.1 and as noted on
Drawings. 1. Panel shall be directly mounted to wall. 2. Copy shall be plastic with Grade 2 Braille and minimum 1/32” raised text, per accessibility
requirements. 3. Face panels shall have smooth beveled edges, and shall be constructed of UV stable high-
impact acrylic or ABS plastic. 4. Acrylic faces shall have non-fading color coatings.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Permanent construction adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions. B. Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations as directed, and per ICC/ANSI A117.1. C. Center sign on wall or shelf panel surface, level and plumb. D. Clean and protect from damage. E. Sign seen outside of country store: We buy junk and sell antiques!
END OF SECTION 10 14 23 - SIGN SYSTEM
CORNER GUARDS 10 26 13 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 26 13 CORNER GUARDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. This section includes the following types of wall protection systems: Corner Guards. B. Install corner guards at all 90 degree wall corners at the building interior exposed to the public not
receiving wood trim. 1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of contract and Division 01 – General
Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product data and detailed specifications for each system component and installation accessory
required, including installation methods for each type of substrate. C. Shop drawings showing locations, extent and installation details of corner guards. Show methods of
attachment to adjoining construction. D. Samples for verification purposes: Submit the following samples, as proposed for this Work, for
verification of guard: 12” long sample of each model specified. E. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing compliance of each
component with requirements indicated in Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 40 00, Quality Control.
F. Maintenance data for wall protection system components for inclusion in the operating and maintenance manuals specified in Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout.
G. Submit a sketch showing proposed installation locations. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: Engage an installer who has no less than 3 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this project.
B. Manufacturer’s qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of specified products and a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Single source responsibility: Provide all components of the wall protection system manufactured by the same company to ensure compatibility of color, texture and physical properties.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. Deliver materials to the project site in unopened original factory packaging clearly labeled to show Manufacturer.
B. Material must be stored flat. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation areas must be enclosed and weatherproofed before installation commences. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acrovyn. B. Korogard. C. Approved Substitute. 2.02 MATERIALS
A. Model SSM-20N 1. Material: Acrovyn 4000. 2. Color: Color to be selected by Interior Designer. Confirm before ordering.
B. Match wall finish color per Interior Design Drawings. C. Corner guards are to extend minimum of 48” above finish floor. D. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the Manufacturer.
CORNER GUARDS 10 26 13 - 2
2.03 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. B. Preassemble components in shop as much as possible to minimize field assembly.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by Manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Corner guards are to extend from the finish floor surface to minimum 4’-0” above finish floor. Resilient floor base is to be discontinuous and terminate cleanly against the edges of corner guards.
B. Install the Work of this section in strict accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb.
3.04 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately upon completion of installation, clean material in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommended cleaning method.
B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as Work progresses and upon completion of Work.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that may be easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains.
END OF SECTION 10 26 13 - CORNER GUARDS
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessories in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work of this Section shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Surface, partition and recessed mounted toilet and bath accessories indicated on the Drawings
and Schedules. 2. Blocking required in walls for same.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00,
Submittals. 2. Indicate mounting heights of all accessories in compliance with ICC/ANSI A117.1 and local
governing authority. B. Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet and
bath accessory item to be provided for the Project. C. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other Work, provide substrate preparation
instructions and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.03 REFERENCES
A. ICC/ANSI A117.1 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People.
B. IBC- Chapter 11, Accessibility. C. ADA, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities, Federal Register Volume 56, Number
144, Rules and Regulations. D. Fair Housing Amendments Act of 1988, Accessibility Guidelines, Federal Register Volume 56,
Number 44. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver items in Manufacturer’s original unopened protective packaging. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage or wetting. C. Handle so as to prevent damage to accessories. D. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01
- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment. 1.05 WARRANTY
A. Furnish one (1) year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship on all accessories. In addition the following shall apply: 1. Welded stainless steel framed mirrors shall have a fifteen (15) year guarantee against silver
spoilage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equip. Inc. 3. Bradley Corp. 2. Accessory Specialties, Inc. 4. Approved Substitute.
B. Accessory Type: Bobrick Washroom Equipment as indicated on Drawings or Approved Substitute. 2.02 COMPONENTS BY OWNER
A. Some accessories may be identified on the Drawings are to be “By Owner” (or similar wording). B. Contractor shall coordinate with Owner to obtain contact information for product supplier(s). C. Contractor shall coordinate with Supplier regarding delivery, schedule, options, blocking
requirements, etc. D. Contractor is responsible for installation of “By Owner” accessories.
TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 13 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION
A. Check wall for dimensions, plumbness of blocking or frames that would affect installation of recessed accessories. For surface mounted accessories, check condition of wall and confirm installation of backing within wall.
B. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures and toilet compartments that affect installation of toilet room accessories.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories at locations and heights indicated, straight, plumb and level and in accordance with Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Locate at heights to comply with handicapped accessibility; verify compliance with ANSI A117.1 and local governing codes. Consult Architect in writing if there are questions.
C. Install items with non-corrosive anchoring devices. D. Installation methods shall conform to Manufacturer’s recommendations for backing, blocking and
proper support. E. Conceal evidence of drilling, cutting, and fitting to room finish. F. Fit flanges of accessories snugly to wall surfaces.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of the Work, or when directed, remove all traces of protective coatings or paper. B. Adjust accessories for proper operation. Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches and where
necessary adjust and lubricate. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces prior to final installation. D. Deliver accessories schedule, keys, and parts manual in accordance with Division 01 – General
Requirements, Section 01 70 00 , Contract Closeout. For Owner’s permanent records, provide two (2) sets of the following items of Manufacturer’s literature; 1. Technical data sheets of each item used for the Project. 2. Service and parts manuals. 3. Name of local representative to be contacted in the event of need of field service or
consultation.
END OF SECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
GAS FIREPLACES 10 31 00 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 31 00 GAS FIREPLACES
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide Shop Drawings as necessary showing layout and construction details in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Include catalog data on products, installation, and accessories, including, but not limited to, log sets, glass view panel, and control box equipment.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Heat & Glo. B. Approved Substitute. 2.02 FIREPLACE UNIT
A. Single-sided, Direct Vent Gas Fireplace Model: 6000 CL. 1. Input: 35,000 BTU/hr Natural Gas. 2. Manual gas shut-off valve. 3. Front: Folio. 4. Finish: New Bronze. 5. Refractory: Straford. 6. Wireless Controller: Intellifire Plus RC200.
B. Provide control box with electronic ignition. C. No wall switched control.
2.03 VENTING
A. Provide Manufacturer’s recommended 2-wall direct vent with heat shields, fire stops, and horizontal termination cap.
B. Accessories: Provide flashing, brackets, supports and shields as necessary. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor to comply with Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Verify all dimensions and clearances required, prior to installation.
B. G.C. coordinate natural gas piping and electrical wiring with applicable trades to complete installation shown, for a fully functional gas fireplace system.
C. Why was the fireplace thrown out of art class? D. Because it wasn’t drawing very well.
END OF SECTION 10 31 00 - GAS FIREPLACES
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 10 44 00 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Provide new UL listed fire extinguishers bearing UL “Listing Mark” for extinguishers indicated. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: 1. Submit in accordance with Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. 2. Provide Schematic Drawing showing types of extinguishers, quantities and locations. Verify
fire ratings of each location proposed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries 6. Standard Fire Hose Co. 2. Larsens Mfg. Co. 7. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co. 3. Norris Industries 8. General Fire Extinguisher Corp. 4. Seco Manufacturing, Inc. 9. Alenco 5. Potter-Roemer 10. Approved Substitute
B. Extinguishers: 10 lb., 4-A rated, multi-purpose, A-B-C Type FE10 from J.L. Industries. C. Cabinet: Provide cabinet in Ambassador Series from J.L. Industries. Install semi-recessed cabinet in
all areas as shown. Cabinet shall have tub size of 10-1/2” x 24” x 6”, in Steel, with White finish, 1-1/4” semi-recessed, 1-1/2” square edge. Door shall have full glass and pull handle, Clear Acrylic panel, with vertical lettering in Red.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General Contractor to provide blocking as required for secure installation. B. Install at locations selected by Fire Marshall and approved by the Client and Landlord, and leave fully
charged. Verify Quantities required with Fire Marshall, prior to ordering.
END OF SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. Furnish and install new steel lockers, accessories and finish metal trim as shown or indicated on drawings. Furring, blocking or trim as may be required by Drawings shall be provided per other Sections of this Specification.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing locker types, sizes, quantities, including all necessary details relating to anchoring, trim installation and relationship to adjacent surfaces. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Numbering: Locker numbering sequence will be provided by the Architect and noted on approved Drawings returned to the Contractor.
C. Color Charts: Provide color charts showing Manufacturer’s available colors for selection by Architect or Interior Designer prior to ordering.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Uniformity: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single Manufacturer, including necessary installation accessories, fittings and fasteners.
B. Job conditions: Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. Protect from damage during delivery, handling, storage and installation. Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment.
PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer to be one of the following: 1. American Locker Security Systems 2. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 3. Approved Substitute
B. Products by other Manufacturers may be approved provided they meet the detailed specifications written below. Approval procedure shall be as specified in the General Conditions of these Specifications.
2.02 LOCKERS
A. Style: Envoy, Size 36” H x 12” W x 12” D frames, 2-tier model with coat hooks. B. Color: To be selected by Architect. C. Locking: Units shall be supplied with hasp for user-supplied lock.
2.03 FABRICATION - GENERAL
A. Material: All major steel parts shall be made of mild cold rolled steel, free from imperfections and capable of taking a high grade enamel finish.
B. Construction: Lockers shall be pre-assembled of welded construction in multiple groups conforming with job requirements. All welds shall be smooth and without burrs. No nuts, bolts or rivets shall be allowed in assembly of main locker groups.
C. Door Frames: Shall be 16 gauge formed into deep 1” face channel shapes with a continuous vertical door strike integral with the frame on both sides of the door opening. Cross frame members of 16 gauge channel shapes, including intermediate cross frame on double and triple-tier lockers shall be securely welded to vertical framing members to ensure a square and rigid assembly.
D. Doors: Doors shall be formed from one piece, 16 gauge, cold rolled sheet steel. Formations shall consist of a full channel shape on the lock side of adequate depth to fully conceal the lock bar, channel formation on the hinge side and right angle formations across the top and bottom. Doors shall include magnetic strip closures and front louver ventilation.
E. Color: Doors, frames and all body parts shall be finished in colors selected from Manufacturer’s collection of standard colors. Submit samples for Architect’s approval prior to ordering.
F. Provide recessed base unit, as provided with locker system, 4” high.
METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Lockers must be installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s approved drawings. Installation shall be level and plumb with flush surfaces and rigid attachment to anchoring surfaces. Space fasteners at 36” O.C. or less as recommended by Manufacturer. Use fasteners appropriate to load and anchoring substrate. Reinforcing plates to be used wherever fasteners could distort metal. Various trim accessories where shown such as bases, fillers, sloping tops, recess trim, etc., shall be installed using concealed fasteners. Flush, hairline joints shall be provided at all abutting trim parts and at adjoining surfaces.
B. Adjustment: Upon completion of installation, inspect lockers and adjust as necessary for proper door and locking mechanism operation. Touch up scratches and abrasions to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS
FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 1
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 10 75 00 FLAGPOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide flagpole where shown on Drawing, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single Manufacturer, including fittings accessories, base and anchorage devices.
B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpole and installation constructed to withstand a 207 MPH wind velocity unflagged, and a wind velocity of 125 MPH when flying a flag of 5’x8’.
C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather-tight, hairline field joints.
1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for each type of
flagpole required in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit three (3) copies of shop drawings of flagpole and base, showing general layout, jointing and complete anchoring and supporting system in accordance with Division 01 -General Requirements, Submittals, Section 01 33 00.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpole with heavy Kraft paper or other protective wrapping, and prepare for shipment in hard fiber tubes or other protective container.
B. Deliver flagpole and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle carefully to avoid soiling or damage, and store flagpole unwrapped to avoid staining from wrappings.
C. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. EMC Flagpoles, subject to compliance with requirements. B. Approved Substitute.
2.02 FLAGPOLE TYPE
A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing, complying with ASTM B 241, alloy 6063-T6, having a minimum wall thickness of .188”, tensile strength not less than 30,000 psi and a yield point of 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and age-harden flagpole after fabrication. 1. Provide one (1) 45 ft.
B. Description: 1. Exposed Height: 40 ft. 4. Top Diameter: 3 1/2” 2. Overall Height: 45 ft. 5. Wall Thickness: .188” 3. Butt Diameter: 6” 6. Flag Size: 16’-10 1/2” x 8’-10 1/2”
2.03 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING
A. Provide concrete foundation minimum depth of 7’0” and minimum diameter of 24” with sleeve system as recommended by Manufacturer to meet wind requirements.
2.04 SHAFT FINISH
A. Aluminum: Deep Luster Finish. Fine, directional, mechanical satin polish (NAAMM 32). 1. Finish: Clear Anodized Aluminum.
2.05 FITTINGS A. Standard Fittings
FLAGPOLES 10 75 00 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation: Excavate for foundation concrete to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions. Remove wood, loose soil, rubbish and other foreign matter from excavation, and moisten earth before placing concrete.
B. Concrete: Provide concrete composed of Portland cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate and water, mixed in proportions to attain 29-day compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi. Use not less than five (5) sacks of Portland cement, complying with ASTM C 150, per cubic yard of wet concrete. Place concrete immediately after mixing. Perform chuting to avoid segregation of mix. Compact concrete in place by use of vibrators to consolidate. Moisten-cure exposed concrete for not less than 7 days, or use a non-staining curing compound in freezing weather. Finish trowel exposed concrete surfaces to smooth, dense surface. Provide positive slope for water runoff to base perimeter.
C. Flagpole Installation: Install Flagpole as indicated and in compliance with final shop drawings and Manufacturer’s instructions. Provide positive lightening grounds for each flagpole installation. Paint portions of ground-set flagpole below grade with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
END OF SECTION 10 75 00 - FLAGPOLES
END OF DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
BOOK DEPOSITORIES 11 51 16 - 1
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 11 51 16 BOOK DEPOSITORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. Provide and install through-wall book depositories. B. For each depository, include and test with (1) compatible transpiration cart from same Manufacturer.
(Total of two (2) carts). C. Comply with ADA “Americans with Disabilities Act” and ICC/ANSI A117.1 “Accessible and
Usable Buildings and Facilities”. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide shop drawings showing unit construction, size, and installation details. Include catalog data on products, installation, and accessories. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A. All delivery, storage and handling of materials and equipment shall be in accordance with Division 1 - General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit Manufacturer’s Standard Warranty for Architect’s review and approval. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Kingsley Library Equipment. B. Approved Substitute.
2.02 PRODUCT FOR INTERIOR LOCATION
A. Model: 10-8105: “Ease Interior Thru Wall System”. B. Description: A complete ready to install one-piece system; allows for easy one hand depository.
Wide opening accepts most materials including DVD’s; standard sized books; children’s big books; reference materials and audio books. 8” maximum wall thickness. Quiet operation. Not for exterior use.
C. Characteristics: 1. Construction Materials:
a. Chute: .040 inch Aluminum. b. Faceplate: 18 gauge Stainless Steel. c. Slide: .040 inch Aluminum.
2. Construction Methods: a. Chute: The chute housing has four sides with integrated side, extends 8 inches from
the faceplate and will cover the wall rough cuts when installed. b. Faceplate: Flat profile with the depository door is built into chute and opens upward.
It is also gravity and weight balanced allowing it to automatically close after materials have passed through. All edges are honed smooth.
3. Overall Finished Dimensions: 22-7/8”W x 11”H x 8-13/16”D. 4. Weight: 6-1/2 lbs. 5. Depository Opening: 4” x 19-5/8”. 6. Theft Deterrence: The angle of the bottom of chute and length of the internal chute help to
prevent reaching inside through the depository door. 7. Wording: “BOOKS”. 8. Braille Label: 99-8100 reading “Book Drop”. 9. Locking Method: Depository door locks from inside with dual spring loaded thumbscrews
ADA compliant when properly installed. D. Transport Cart: Kingsley’s Cushion Drop II 50 Aluminum Cart. Verify compatibility.
2.03 PRODUCT FOR EXTERIOR LOCATION
BOOK DEPOSITORIES 11 51 16 - 2
A. Model: 10-8100 - “Kingsley Ease Through Wall System”. B. Description: A complete easy to install through wall system, includes interior wall trim. The system
includes the faceplate with Kwik Drop depository, attached chute housing with entry chute; slide chute, and Airbloc system. The design allows it to be installed in walls up to 13 inches thick.
C. Through Wall Exterior Construction: 1. Construction Materials: 16-gauge stainless steel exterior faceplate and depository door
Stainless steel finish with Graffiti-X clear coat. 2. Construction Methods: The depository door is mounted into a built in weather hood and
opens inward and up. It is also gravity and weight balanced allowing it to automatically close after materials have passed through. All edges are honed smooth.
D. Through Wall Interior Construction: 1. Construction Materials: a. Chute Housing: .040 inch aluminum housing. b. Entry Chute: .063 inch Stainless Steel and angled upwards. c. Slide Chute: .040 inch thick Aluminum. d. Air Bloc: Neoprene (40 Duro) Rubber panels. All edges are honed smooth. 2. Construction Methods: The chute housing has four sides, extends 13 inches from the faceplate and will cover the wall rough cuts when installed. The entry chute has an upward angle to prevent theft. Interior locking and unlocking key system is located at the rear of the unit along the top panel. It is silk screened to read with locked and unlocked symbols. The neoprene rubber Air bloc panels are attached to the rear of the unit with Nylon Rivets.
E. Weather Resistance: Gravity, weight balanced and weather sealed depository door helps to prevent the entry of rain and snow. Will not blow open in most winds. Weather stripping on the inside edges of the faceplate provide further protection from inclement weather.
F. Air Draft Prevention: The Air Bloc system helps to eliminate drafts caused when the depository door is opened. It helps stabilize outside air temperature before it enters the building.
G. Theft Deterrence: The angle of the entry chute, length of the slide chute and the AirBlock system prevent reaching inside through the depository door and block phishing of materials with a claw apparatus.
H. Dimensions and Weight 1. Overall Finished: 22”W x 20”H x 14-1/8”D. 2. Depository opening: 18”W x 2-7/8”H. 3. Product Weight: 25 lbs. 4. Shipping Weight: 32 lbs.
J. Locking Method: Depository door locks from the inside with dual spring loaded thumbscrews.
K. Wording: Self adhesive Decal in Black that reads: “BOOK RETURN”. L. Braille Label: 99-8100 “BOOK DROP”. M. Transport Cart: Kingsley 37-9050 Cushion Drop II cart. Verify compatibility.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Contractor to comply with Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Verify all dimensions and clearances required prior to cutting/constructing wall opening.
B. Confirm smooth compatibility with transportation carts. C. General Contractor to coordinate installation of Work by other trades for fully, functional unit.
END OF SECTION 11 51 16 - BOOK DEPOSITORIES
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 1
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 11 52 13 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Gain: Indication of screen’s luminance or brightness, measured perpendicular to screen center and relative to magnesium carbonate block, which serves as standard for 1.0 gain. Higher numbers indicate greater brightness.
B. Viewing Angle: Horizontal angle from perpendicular center of screen at which gain or brightness decreases by fifty (50%) percent.
C. Format: Proportion of projection screen viewing area expressed as a ratio of width/height. D. NTSC or Video Format: 1.33:1. E. HDTV Format: 1.78:1 (16:9) F. 16:10 Wide: 1.60:1. G. Cinemascope: 2.35:1. H. Letterbox: 1:85:1. J. Square: 1:1.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. International Code Council (ICC). 1. International Building Code.
B. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (SMPTE). 1. SMPTE RP 94-2000, Gain Determination of Front Projection Screens.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit product data, including Manufacturer’s technical product data sheet, for
specified products. C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements,
Section 01 33 00, Submittals. Indicate dimensions, fabrication and installation details. Include electric wiring diagrams.
1.04 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Assurance 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by Manufacturer certifying that materials comply
with specified performance characteristics, criteria and physical requirements. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
1.05 CLOSEOUT
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Door Manufacturer shall provide the Manufacturer’s Warranty prior to the Contract Closeout and in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00, Contract Closeout, including the following: 1. Manufacturer’s Operation and Maintenance Data. 2. Parts catalog that includes complete list of repair and replacement parts, with cuts and
identifying numbers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Worker experienced in performing Work of this section who has specialized in work similar to that required of this project.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with International Building Code (IBC) 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection 1. Store electric projection screens in a dry, ventilated area, protected from exposure to harmful
weather conditions, at a temperature less than 80º F.
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 2
B. Handling: Handle electrically operated projection screen materials with care in order to prevent damage.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.
1.08 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS
A. Project Location: Perform electrically operated projection screen work when temperatures are greater than 40º F.
1.09 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence With Other Work: Comply with projection screen Manufacturer’s written recommendations for sequencing construction operations.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Project Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, Manufacturer’s standard warranty
document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.
C. Warranty: Commencing on date of substantial completion. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Use standard product line parts produced by Manufacturer of electrically operated projection screens. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ensure Manufacturer has minimum five (5) years experience manufacturing components similar to or exceeding project requirements.
B. Manufacturer: 1. Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc.; P.O. Box 137, 3100 N. Detroit St., Warsaw, IN 46581-0137;
800.622. 3737; [email protected]; www.da-lite.com. 2. Approved Substitute.
2.02 PROJECTION SCREEN SYSTEMS
A. Type 2: Ceiling Recessed Electrically Operated Projection Screens. 1. Screen Operation: Electrically operated, UL and ULC listed, retractable, with 2 rigid metal
rollers and tab guide cable screen tensioning system. 2. Motors: Housed inside metal roller and including automatic thermal overload protection,
integral gears, capacitor and electric brake to prevent coasting. a. Type: 3-wire with ground [with quick connect male plug-in connector], permanently
lubricated, quick reversal type designed for mounting inside roller. b. Quantity: 2. c. Voltage, Frequency: 115 V, 60 Hz. d. Amperage: 1.2 amps maximum. e. Include preset, adjustable limit switches to automatically stop fabric door and
viewing surface in UP or DOWN position. 3. Electric Controls: Wall-mounted switch at AV cabinet in southeast corner of room
a. Voltage, Frequency: 115 V, 60 Hz. b. Switch: 3 button type with cover plate for UP, DOWN and STOP functions. c. Junction Box: Internally attached to screen case.
4. Screen Mounting: Ceiling recessed and plenum rated type. a. Mounting Hardware: Include mounting hardware.
5. Screen Case: Designed to receive mounting hardware and sized to suit projection screen. a. Type 1: Extruded aluminum with heavy gage steel end caps and adjustable steel
brackets. 1) Case Bottom: Self-trimming with built-in flange and equipped with
concealed-hinge automatic aluminum door for raising and lowering the viewing surface and concealed-hinge aluminum door for manual access.
2) Finish: Black powder coated. 6. Screen Size:
a. Viewing Area: 13’-4” wide x 7’-6” tall 7. Acceptable Material: Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc. Tensioned Advantage Deluxe Electrol
Projection Screen.
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 3
a. Tab Guide Cable Tensioned Screen Material: 1) Front projection, flame retardant, mildew resistant vinyl, with black backing
and with standard black borders, easily cleaned with mild soap and water solution.
2) Include tab and cable guide on each side of fabric to maintain even, lateral tension and hold viewing surface flat.
3) Bottom end of fabric to be inserted into a custom aluminum slat bar with added weight to provide vertical tension on the screen surface.
4) Slat ends to be protected by heavy-duty plastic caps enclosing a preset adjustable mechanism for screen tensioning.
5) Seamless in all sizes. b. Gain: To SMPTE RP 94-2000, min 1.3 c. Viewing Angle: 45° d. Format: HDTV - 1.78:1 e. Acceptable Viewing Surface: Da-Mat - a unity gain vinyl surface with a smooth
surface. 2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Screen Drop: Extra drop of 8 inches in black fabric at top. B. Serial Control Board: SCB-100 RS-232: with NET-100 Ethernet-Serial Adapter. C. Installation Hardware: Fasteners and other components of type, size and spacing recommended by
Manufacturer for complete, functional and secure installation of electric screen. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS
A. Provide experienced and qualified technicians to install electrically operated projection screens. 3.02 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with Manufacturer’s written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and Da-Lite Screen Company, Inc., technical data sheets.
3.03 EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are
acceptable with electrically operated projection screen installation. 2. Ensure electrical power supply is installed to meet electric projection screen requirements in
accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical. a. Verify type and location of power supply.
3. Inform Architect of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. 4. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
3.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate electric projection screen placement with placement of other ceiling and wall mounted components.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Install electric projection screens in accordance with reviewed shop drawings at locations and heights indicated.
B Install screen housing and make electrical connections prior to installation of ceiling system. 1. Verify locations with Architect prior to installation. C. Install viewing surface and drive assembly in housing only after interior construction is substantially
complete. D. Securely install screens plumb and level to supporting substrate.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection: Operate each screen 10 times to ensure viewing surfaces extend and retract through full range of motion. 1. Verify controls, limit switches, and other components function as designed and meet project
requirements. 2. Ensure viewing surface raising operation fully engages and lifts screen closure door into
closed position.
ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS 11 52 13 - 4
3. Adjust motors, controls and components to allow for smooth, unobstructed screen operation. 3.07 FINAL CLEANING
A. Perform cleanup in accordance with Division 01 - General Requirements, Section 01 70 00 Contract Closeout.
B. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. 3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect electrically operated projection screens from damage during construction. B. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by electrically operated projection screen work.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Perform work during regular trade working hours satisfactory to Owner.
END OF SECTION 11 52 13 - ELECTRICALLY OPERATED PROJECTION SCREENS
END OF DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
BICYCLE RACKS 12 93 13 - 1
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01- General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 12 93 13 BICYCLE RACKS ___ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Furnish and install bicycle racks at location as shown on the Architectural Floor Plan.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with Division 01– General Requirements, Section 01 66 00 Materials and Equipment.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Bicycle rack to be “Hoop Rack” as manufactured by Dero Bike Rack Co., Minn. MN, 800.298.4915. B. Approved Substitute.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. Heavy Duty Steel Pipe – Part #HR B. Finish: EPX-Polyester powder coat over epoxy primer. C. Color: Submit samples to Architect for selection prior to ordering. D. Mounting Option: IG-In-ground. E. Why do bicycles fall over? F. Because they are two-tired.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be by in-ground anchor mounting, in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. Take care to preserve finish undamaged.
END OF SECTION 12 93 13 - BICYCLE RACKS
SKATEBOARD STORAGE SYSTEM 12 93 14 - 1
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01- General Requirements apply to work of this Division. SECTION 12 93 14 SKATEBOARD STORAGE SYSTEM ___ PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE
A. Install (1) Skateboard Storage Rack at location indicated on the Floor Plan. 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product information in accordance with Division 01 General Requirements, Section 01 33 00 Submittals.
B. Submit powder coat color selection card for color selection by Interior Designer. 1.03 MATERIALS, DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Refer to Division 01- General Requirements, Section 01 66 00, Materials and Equipment . PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Park-A-Bike, Sacramento, CA, 800.715.7791. B. Approved Substitute.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Skateboard Storage Rack 1. Model: SkateDock. 2. Capacity: Eight (8) boards. 3. Construction: ASTM A36 Steel. 4. Finish: Hammer Tone Powder Coat - color to be selected by Interior Designer from
manufacturer's standard colors. 5. Mounting: Floor Mount.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install per manufacturer's instructions B. Coordinate with Installation of floor finishes C. Thoroughly clean and protect product through completion of construction
END OF SECTION 12 93 14 - SKATEBOARD STORAGE SYSTEM
END OF DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220000 - BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the, General and Supplementary Conditions, Division-1 Conditions specification sections apply to the Division 22 specifications and drawings.
B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 22 and Division 22 drawings. Refer to Division 26 specification section and Division 26 drawings.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for plumbing installations and includes requirements common to more than one (1) section of Division 22. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1 and Division 22.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate and co-operate with Owner at all times for all new to existing connections, system shutdowns and restart-up, flushing and filling both new and existing systems.
C. Provide temporary piping services where required to maintain existing areas operable, as shown on the drawings.
D. Coordinate all services shutdown with the Owner, provide temporary services as shown on the drawings.
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance operation and servicing of all new plumbing systems which are to be used by the Owner during the time of any occupancy and use of any areas within the construction limitations before final completion or acceptance of the systems. A written record of maintenance, operation and servicing shall be turned over to the Owner prior to final acceptance.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting bids.
B. Report any existing damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work.
C. Protect all plumbing and electrical work against theft, injury or damage from all causes until it has been tested and accepted.
D. Be responsible for all damage to the property of the Owner or to the work of other contractors during the construction and guarantee period. Repair or replace any part of the Work which may show defect during one (1) year from the final acceptance of all work. Provided such
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
defect is, in the opinion of the Architect, due to imperfect material or workmanship and not due to the Owner’s carelessness or improper use.
1.4 INSTALLER’S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. The General Contractor shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado and shall supply the General Contractor Project Manager with names and license numbers. Plumbing Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.
1.5 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.
B. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to Division 1 for access door specification.
C. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be removed or 24-inch x 24-inch if used for service only, unless size is indicated on Drawings.
D. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for building-in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to permit use of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space.
E. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to be installed.
F. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating.
1.6 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided equipment for rough-in requirements.
1.7 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NFPA, EPA, OSHA and ASHRAE.
C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated.
D. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.
1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES
A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be required for the project.
1.9 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Owner shall pay all tap, development, meter, etc., fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities.
C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all permits, inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the Work.
1.10 PLUMBING INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset, valve, fitting, etc.
B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both.
C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
D. Before any Work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be maintained and that ductwork can be run as contemplated without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of other trades.
E. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above and below ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building components. 1. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install
mechanical and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority. a. Plumbing waste, vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders b. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork c. Electrical conduit
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
d. Domestic hot and cold water, medical gas piping e. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts
F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for plumbing installations.
H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.
J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of plumbing equipment and materials.
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install plumbing piping and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
L. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
M. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities, services and Division 33. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
1.11 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. General: 1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of Plumbing Work in
accordance with Division 1. 2. In general, follow all regulations of OSHA as specified in Part 1926, Subpart P,
"Excavations, Trenching and Shoring". Follow specifications of Division 22 as they refer specifically to the Plumbing Work.
B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least two (2) business days before excavation is to begin. Also, prior to starting excavation, brief employees on marking and color codes and train employees on excavation and safety procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by carefully probing and hand digging.
C. Provide all necessary pumping, cribbing and shoring.
D. Walls of all trenches shall be a minimum of 6-inch clearance from the side of the nearest mechanical work. Install pipes with a minimum of 6-inch clearance between them when located in same trench.
E. Pipe Trenching:
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1. Dig trenches to depth, width, configuration, and grade appropriate to the piping being installed. Dig trenches to 6-inches below the level of the bottom of the pipe to be installed. Install 6-inch bed of pea gravel or squeegee, mechanically tamp to provide a firm bed for piping, true to line and grade without irregularity. Provide depressions only at hubs, couplings, flanges, or other normal pipe protrusions.
F. Backfilling shall not be started until all work has been inspected, tested and accepted. All backfill material shall be reviewed by the Soils Engineer. In no case shall lumber, metal or other debris be buried in with backfill.
G. Trench Backfill: 1. Backfill to 12-inches above top of piping with pea gravel or squeegee, the same as used
for piping bed, compact properly. 2. Continue backfill to finish grade, using friable material free of rock and other debris.
Install in 6-inch layers, each properly moistened and mechanically compacted prior to installation of ensuing layer. Compaction by hydraulic jetting is not permissible.
H. After backfilling and compacting, any settling shall be refilled, tamped, and refinished at this Contractor's expense.
I. This Contractor shall repair and pay for any damage to finished surfaces.
J. Complete the backfilling near manholes using pea gravel or squeegee, installing it in 6-inch lifts and mechanically tamping to achieve 95 percent compaction.
K. Use suitable excavated material to complete the backfill, installed in 6-inch lifts and mechanically compacted to seal against water infiltration. Compact to 95 percent for the upper 30-inches below paving and slabs and 90 percent elsewhere.
1.12 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.
B. Refer to Division 1.
C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of plumbing installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work; 2. Remove and replace defective work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing;
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for
Architect observation of concealed work.
G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected plumbing equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of plumbing piping, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other plumbing items made obsolete by the new work.
H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.
I. Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical, plumbing and electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover.
1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. New Plumbing Fixtures shall not be used without written permission from the owner.
1.14 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and Division 1, "PRODUCTS, OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTION".
1.15 PLUMBING SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1 and AIA Document A201 (1987) Edition, "SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES".
B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes in construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor.
C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or Local Energy Conservation Standards.
D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by and stamped by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect will not be processed unless prior written approval is obtained by the Contractor.
E. Submit all submittal items required for each [Specification Section][Specification Division] concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
F. If more than two (2) submittals (either for shop drawings or for as-built drawings) are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor.
G. Before starting Work, prepare and submit to the Architect all shop drawings and descriptive equipment data required for the project. Unless each item is identified with specification section and sufficient data to identify its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the item will be returned without action or "Revise and Resubmit". Continue to submit shop drawings after each Engineer's action, until a "Reviewed" action is received. The Contractor shall submit the total number of sets as called for in Division 1 to the Architect for final distribution. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 22 which follow. 1. Pipe Markers 2. Sanitary and storm drainage piping, fittings and joining materials 3. Plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings and rough-in dimensions, cleanouts and drains 4. Domestic water piping, fittings and joining materials 5. Domestic water heaters and domestic hot water generators 6. Water hammer arresters 7. Valves 8. Thermometers and pressure gauges 9. Supports, anchors and seals 10. Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's installation
instructions
H. Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by plumbing trades.
I. Identify each item with equipment tag with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with the specifications.
1.16 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. All “Requests for Information” submitted by the Contractor shall include a proposed solution and an estimated cost/schedule impact. Any RFI’s that do not contain this required information will be sent back to the Contractor unanswered.
1.17 PRODUCT LISTING
A. Prepare listing of major plumbing equipment and materials for the project, within two (2) weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice.
C. Provide all information requested.
D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION".
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 7
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
E. When two (2) or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures, pumps, valves, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated.
F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.
1.18 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of plumbing equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
1.19 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture.
D. Coordinate deliveries of plumbing materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
E. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for hub-and-spigot and no-hub pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
F. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
G. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.20 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Keep a complete set of record document prints in custody during entire period of construction at the construction site.
C. Mark drawing prints to indicate revisions to piping, size and location both exterior and interior; including locations of control devices and units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 8
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); RFI's; change orders; concealed control system devices. Changes to be noted on the drawings shall include final location of any piping relocated more than 1'-0" from where shown on the drawings.
D. Mark Equipment Schedules on the drawings with changes to Manufacturer, Model Number, and data based on reviewed shop drawings.
E. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn these drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This Contract will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received and reviewed by the Architect.
1.21 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for maintenance data, include the following information: 1. Description of plumbing equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 5. Manufacturer's service manuals for all plumbing equipment provided under this Contract. 6. Include the valve tag list. 7. Name, Address and Telephone Number of party to be contacted for twenty-four (24) hour
service for each item of equipment. 8. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly
indicated for each piece of equipment. 9. Complete parts list. 10. Plumbing warranties.
C. This Contract will not be considered completed, nor will final payment be made, until all specified material is received in this Operating and Maintenance Report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect.
1.22 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all plumbing pieces of equipment which he provided before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or heavy duty shipping tag
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 9
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
on the piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and the type and brand of lubricant used.
C. Furnish the Engineer with a Electronic Document, of each item lubricated and type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems involved.
1.23 DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. During the demolition phase of this Contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to carefully remove existing equipment, piping, fixtures and related items either as shown on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items shall be tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect. A list of all items stored shall be turned over to the Architect. At the completion of the remodeling work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises. Disposition of items not reused is by the direction of the Architect.
C. The location of existing equipment, pipes, etc., shown on the drawings has been taken from existing drawings and is, therefore, only as accurate as that information. All existing conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment being made to the drawing information.
D. If asbestos material, in any form, is discovered by this Contractor in the process of his work, he shall report such occurrence to the Architect immediately. The Architect will determine the action to be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part of the work to be done under this Division.
1.24 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In any case, the entire mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance by the Owner.
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 22, into a separated set of vinyl covered, three-ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
1.25 CLEANING
A. Refer to Division 1.
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 10
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Refer to other sections of Division 22, for requirements cleaning strainers and disinfection of plumbing systems prior to final acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED
END OF SECTION – 220000
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 11
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 220000 - 12
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Piping Specialties Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Piping Specialties specified in this section include the following: 1. Escutcheons 2. Dielectric Fittings 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal 4. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal 5. Pipe Sleeve
C. Piping Specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. 2. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 3. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 4. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required piping specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication, materials, and method of support.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Escutcheons:
a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
2. Dielectric Fittings: a. B & K Industries, Inc. b. Capital Mfg. Co.; Division of Harsco Corp. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Perfection Corp. f. Rockford-Eclipse Division
3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal: a. Thunderline Corp. b. "Metraseal" by Metraflex Co.
4. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal: a. Electrical Products Division/3M b. Dow Corning c. Flame Stop, Inc. d. MetaCaulk e. Hilti
2.2 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions on open systems where indicated on the Drawings.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: 1. ASTM-A53 Xinc electroplated steel pipe casing with inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic
lining (NSF/FDA listed). 2. Thread x thread ends 1/2-inch x 3-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch. 3. Groove x thread ends 1/2-inch x 4-inch through 4-inch x 6-inch. 4. Listed by IAPMO/UPC and SBCC PST and ESI. 5. Dielectric unions are not an acceptable substitute for dielectric waterway fittings.
D. Dielectric Flange Insulation Kits: 1. Field-assembled, companion flange assembly, full face or ring type. 2. Neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers,
and steel backing washers. 3. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts. 4. Rated at 175 psi conforming to ANSI B16.42 (iron) B16.24 (bronze). 5. Factory certified to withstand minimum of 600 volts on a dry line without flashover. 6. Meets federal specifications for tensile strength and thread end connections.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. General: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.5 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS
A. General: Provide UL Listed firestopping systems composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Penetrations in Fire Resistive Rated Walls: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of the wall construction being
penetrated.
D. Penetration in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Minimum of 1-hour rating, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the
floor construction being penetrated. 2. T-Rating: When penetrant is located outside of a wall cavity, minimum of 1-hour rating,
but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor construction being penetrated. 3. W-Rating: Class 1 rating in accordance with water leakage test per UL 1479.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
E. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.
B. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.
D. Fire or Fire/Smoke Barrier Penetration Seals: Where pipe penetration occurs in fire or fire/smoke rated walls, provide: a complete listed protection assembly equal to the rating of the wall/floor.
E. Provide dielectric waterways or insulating flanges, as required by pipe size, on all connections of dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION 220500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Meters and Gauges required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections.
B. Types of Meters and Gauges specified in this section include the following: 1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings:
a. Glass Thermometers
C. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of meters and gauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL Standards pertaining to meters and gauges. 2. ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and Instrument
Society of America (ISA) Standards pertaining to construction and installation of meters and gauges.
3. NSF Compliance: Construct and install thermometers and gauges in compliance with the lead-free requirements of NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372.
C. Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operating conditions, are certified by manufacturer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gauge.
B. All flow measuring devices to be provided shall be reviewed and approved by the Test and Balance Contractor for proper scale, rangeability and function prior to submitting shop drawings. The Test and Balance Contractor shall provide a typed letter stating this review has been completed and included with shop drawing submittals.
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meter and gauge. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Glass Thermometers:
a. Miljoco Corp. b. Weiss Instruments, Inc. c. Dwyer d. Trerice e. Winters Instruments f. Winters Instruments
2.2 GLASS THERMOMETERS
A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.
B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel or powder coated, glass or acrylic lens front, spring secured, 9-inch long.
C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180 degree adjustment in vertical plane, 360 degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.
D. Tube and Capillary: Non-Toxic spirit filled, 1 percent scale range accuracy, shock mounted.
E. Scale: Aluminum, white background with black graduations and markings.
F. Stem: Aluminum, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.
G. Range: Conform to the following: 1. Hot Water: 30 Degree - 240 degree F with 2 degree F scale divisions (0 degree - 160
degree C with 2 degree C scale divisions).
2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of lead-free brass certified to the requirements of NSF 372 or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure. Provide 2-inch extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES
A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easily read by observer standing on floor.
B. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fill well with oil or graphite, secure cap.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION 220519
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water valves within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the following: 1. Valves
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Comply with ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for Dimension and Design Criteria. 2. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372 and/or California AB1953 for
products that contact drinking water. 3. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements. 4. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. 5. Safe Drinking Water Act – Public Law No. 111-380.
1.3 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. Contractors shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado and shall supply the Project Manager with names and license numbers. Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Test Reports.
C. Valve schedule listing valve designation number, valve type, size, location, and function of all valves.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 Revised 2013
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVES
A. General: 1. Valves shall be NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-
water service. Valves for domestic water must be 3rd Party Certified. 2. Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual". 3. Sizes: Provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size. 4. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to
allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation. 5. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.
B. Ball Valves: 1. 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: MSS-SP-110, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, two-piece ASTM
B-584 lead-free cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, PTFE seats, anti-blowout stem, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, extended stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end connections. Valve shall be NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-water service. Each valve shall have a certificate or a letter from the manufacturer indicating compliance with the NSF requirements indicated attached with the shop drawing submittal. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Apollo (Conbraco) Model 77CLF (lead free) 2) Nibco 3) Milwaukee 4) Hammond
C. Drain Valve: Lead-free bronze ball valve with threaded hose end and cap with chain. Valve upstream of backflow preventer shall have vacuum breaker and cap. MSS-SP-110, 150 PSI SWP, 600 PSI WOG, two-piece ASTM B-584 lead-free cast bronze body, full port, chrome plated brass/bronze ball, PTFE seats, anti-blowout stem, separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, extended stem, and vinyl covered steel handle. Threaded or soldered end connections. Valve shall be NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372 compliant for potable-water service. [Each valve shall have a certificate or a letter from the manufacturer indicating compliance with the NSF requirements indicated attached with the shop drawing submittal.]
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Apollo 70LF-100/200-HC (lead-free) b. Nibco c. Milwaukee d. Hammond
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 Revised 2013
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVES
A. Installation: 1. Use gate valves only on domestic water service entrances as specified by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction. 2. Use ball or butterfly valves for isolation valves unless noted otherwise. 3. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, and
stops on inlet of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. 4. Drain Valves: Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal
runs, and elsewhere as required to completely drain distribution piping system.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
END OF SECTION 220523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 Revised 2013
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 4 Revised 2013
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Supports and Anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections.
B. Types of Supports and Anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports 2. Hanger-Rod Attachments 3. Building Attachments 4. Thermal Shield Inserts and Protective Shields 5. Miscellaneous Materials
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Plumbing Codes pertaining to product
materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. MSS Standard Compliance:
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. c. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Division Figgie International d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. e. Elcen Metal Products Company f. Erico/Caddy g. Unistrut Metal Framing Systems h. Hubbard Enterprises (Supports for domestic water piping) i. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. j. Anvil
2. Thermal Shields: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. c. Insulation Pipe Supports Manufacturing d. Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product Inc. e. Erico/Caddy f. Component Products Co. g. Value Engineered Products, Inc. h. Snappitz i. Anvil
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/8-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B3100 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3104CT 3. Cast Iron Pipe, size 4-inch thru 24-inch, B-Line B3100
C. Adjustable Swivel Ring: MSS Type 10 1. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch, B-Line B3170NF
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3170CT
D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/4-inch thru 20-inch, B-Line B3373 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3373CT
E. Floor Standpipe Saddle Support: MSS Type 37 1. Steel Pipe, size 1 1/2-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B3095
F. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.
G. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded spacers and hanger rods. Provide hanger rods one (1) size larger than for largest pipe in trapeze. If the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at mid-span or use a larger channel.
H. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe: 1. 1/2-Inch thru 3-1/2 Inch: Steel offset hook. 2. 4-Inch and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
I. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel or Copper Coated riser clamp.
J. Upper Attachments: 1. Beam Clamps:
a. All thread rod sized 3/8-inch and !-inch, B-Line B3034 b. All thread rod sizes 5/8-inch, B-Line B3033 c. All thread rod sizes "-inch and up, B-Line B3055
2.3 THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS AND PROTECTIVE SHIELDS
A. General: Provide thermal shield inserts under all insulated piping hangers. Provide thermal shield inserts on all piping through floors, wall and roof construction penetrations. Size saddles and thermal shield inserts for exact fit to mate with pipe insulation or a minimum of 1-inch thick for uninsulated pipe thermal shield inserts.
B. Galvanized Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent crushing of insulation. See also Part 3.H.3. 1. B-Line B3151
C. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi average compressive strength, waterproof, asbestos free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure or other listed system manufacturers. Insert and shield shall cover the entire circumference on vertical pipes, or the bottom half circumference of the pipe on horizontal mounting supports, and shall be of length recommended by the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation or the thickness of the wall, roof or floor construction.
D. Thermal Mechanical Pipe Shields: Self-locking insulated pipe supports/shields shall be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation. The insert shall consist of either hydrous calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate foam insulation (urethane) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe with a 360 degree PVC or galvanized steel jacket
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
which complies with the International Mechanical Code for installation in plenum ceilings where applicable. The length of the jacket shall be sized for pipe expansion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct inadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other building structural attachments.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and tables in this section. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
B. New Construction: 1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams wherever practicable. 2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete
for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inch. 3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. 4. Use drop-in anchors for concrete structures. 5. Use beam clamps for steel structures.
C. Existing Construction: 1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten expansion
anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.
C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units and within 1'-0" of each horizontal elbow.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements: 1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting
through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. 2. Thermal Protective Shields: Install thermal protective shields MSS Type 40 on domestic
water piping that is insulated. Thermal protective shields shall span an arc of [360] [180] degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:
NPS Length Metal Shield Thickness
1/4 thru 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060
3. Thermal shield inserts shall be provided where thermal protective metal shields are provided and shall span an arc of [360] [180] degrees and shall match the length of the thermal protective shield.
H. Support vertical runs at each floor.
I. Install horizontal water distribution piping with the following maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod sizes:
Nom. Pipe Size - Inches
Steel Pipe Max. Span - Feet
Copper Tube and DWV Copper
Max. Span - Feet
Min. Rod Diameter - Inches
Up to 1/2 6 6 3/8 3/4 & 1 8 6 3/8
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
Nom. Pipe Size - Inches
Steel Pipe Max. Span - Feet
Copper Tube and DWV Copper
Max. Span - Feet
Min. Rod Diameter - Inches
1-1/4 10 6 3/8 1-1/2 10 6 3/8
2 10 10 3/8 2-1/2 10 10 1/2
3 10 10 1/2
J. Install storm drains, sanitary drainage and vent systems with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
Pipe Size
CAST IRON PIPE – HUB AND SPIGOT AND NO-HUB
Maximum Hanger
Spacing (ft.)
Maximum Vertical
Spacing (ft.)
Minimum Rod Size
(in.)
1-1/4" to 2” 5 15 3/8
2-1/2" to 5” 5 15 1/2
6" 5 15 5/8 Based on MSS-69 & IPC. Provide midstory guides for piping 2 inches and smaller.
K. Support horizontal cast iron pipe as follows: 1. Hub and Spigot: All sizes - One (1) hanger to each joint. 2. No-Hub: All sizes.
a. With ASTM C 1540 stainless steel couplings: One (1) hanger to each joint. b. With all other stainless steel band type couplings: One (1) hanger to each side of
joint. c. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18-inches of each joint and with 5-feet
maximum spacing between hangers, except that pipe exceeding 5-feet in length shall be supported at intervals no greater than 10-feet.
d. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical hub and spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the support.
L. Provide copper or copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
M. Place a hanger within 1-foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.
N. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) minimum after piping is erected.
O. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15-foot intervals for steel and 10-feet for copper.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
P. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze hangers.
Q. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
R. All insulated pipes ( 2"d) shall have thermal shield insert at all support points. All piping shall have thermal shield inserts at each penetration through wall, floor and roof.
S. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall be securely anchored to the building structure.
T. Install all couplings with torque wrench, torqued to inch-pounds as specified by the manufacturer.
U. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, waste/vent piping or brackets connected to studs. Wires or straps will not be permitted. 1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the studs or by
a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping. 2. Prevent copper tubes from making contact with steel brackets using fire retardant
polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. 3. Place supports every 10-feet on vertical pipe and every 5-feet on horizontal pipe.
V. Hang all insulated pipe at the point of support in the following manner: 1. Hanger: See Paragraph 2.2. 2. Thermal Shield/Insert: Provide thermal shield insert of the same thickness as adjoining
insulation for insulated pipe. The entire 360 degrees shall be waterproof, asbestos free, calcium silicate or polyisocyanurate foam insulation (urethane). a. On domestic cold water, non potable water and horizontal roof drain pipe the
thermal shield insert shall extend 2-inches beyond the construction material and the sheet metal shield shall span an arc of 180 degrees. All hangers shall be properly sized to accommodate the thermal shield insert and no hanger shall penetrate or crush any of the insulating material.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 7
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLBG PIPING AND EQUIP 220529 - 8
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Mechanical Identification Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 22 sections.
B. Types of Identification Devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Plastic Pipe Markers 2. Plastic Tape 3. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker 4. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs 5. Plasticized Tags 6. Lettering and Graphics
C. Refer to Division 26 sections for Identification Requirements of Electrical Work; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses, such as valve to isolate individual system risers, individual floor branches or building system shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allen Systems, Inc. 2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Division 3. Brimar Industries, Inc. 4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 5. Seton Name Plate Corp.
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Insulation: Furnish 1-inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125 degree F (52 degree C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2-inch beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6-inch (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one (1) of the following methods: 1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4-
inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inch.
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6-inch and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than three (3) times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one (1) of the following methods: 1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners. 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2
inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3-inches. 3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's
standard stainless steel bands.
E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to match existing building lettering nomenclature system and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.
2.4 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6-inch, 2-1/2 inch wide tape for larger pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6-inch wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe.
B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2-layers of plastic tape.
2.6 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, Black with White core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
B. Thickness: 1/8-Inch, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.7 PLASTICIZED TAGS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4 inch x 5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (As examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).
2.8 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated and approved by
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the drawings or schedule as well as service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Existing building identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building.
B. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "MATERIALS" in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
C. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.
D. Near each valve and control device.
E. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.
F. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.
G. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
H. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
I. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25-foot along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 15-foot in congested areas of piping and equipment.
J. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.
3.3 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6-inch to 8-inch below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16-inch, install single line marker. For tile fields and similar installations, mark only edge pipelines of field.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes: 1. Piping Insulation, Jackets and Accessories 2. Equipment Insulation and Covering
B. Refer to other Division 22 sections for Shields, Inserts, and Mechanical Identification.
C. Insulation thickness based on 2010 ASHRAE 90.1 table 6.8.3 recommendations and the International Energy Conservation Code.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulating cements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and schedule listing materials, thickness, K-value, density, and furnished accessories for each service or equipment specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer, and brand.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (flexible elastomeric) b. Johns-Manville Products Corp. (fiberglass, calcium silicate) c. Knauf Fiber Glass (fiberglass) d. Manson Insulation Co. (fiberglass, calcium silicate) e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (fiberglass) f. Rubatex Corp. (flexible elastomeric) g. Aeroflex (flexible elastomeric)
2. Jacketing, Coatings, Adhesives, Sealants and Covering Products: a. Childers b. Foster c. Ceel-Co. d. Johns-Manville Products Corp. e. Knauf Fiber Glass f. Venture Tape Corporation g. Design Polymetrics
2.2 PIPING INSULATION
A. Glass Fiber: ASTM C 547, Type 1, rigid molded, noncombustible, 0.23 "K" value at 100
degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 850 degree F, moisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).
B. Vapor Retarder Jacket: ASTM C 1136, 45lbs/in tensile strength (ASTM D 828), or beach puncture 50 oz in/in tear minimum (ASTM D 781). White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum foil, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.
C. Connections: Tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape, Perma-Weld adhesive.
D. Tie Wire: 16-Gauge stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.
E. Flexible Elastomeric Foam: ASTM C 534, Type I, flexible, cellular elastomeric, molded, 0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature, maximum service temperature 220 degree F, water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm-inch, 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 723, and NFPA 255).
F. Field Applied Fittings and Jackets: 1. PVC Plastic:
a. One-piece, gloss white, molded fitting covers with factory installed fiberglass insulation inserts.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
b. 20 Mil (30 mil for exterior applications) cut and curled gloss white jacketing material. Composite 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E84, UL 723 and NFPA 90A).
c. Connect with tacks and pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions where mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
A. Cold Piping: 1. Applications:
a. Potable and non-potable cold water. b. Interior aboveground storm water. c. Interior above ground overflow storm piping within six (6) lineal feet of roof bowl. d. Plumbing vents within six (6) lineal feet of roof outlet. e. Roof and overflow drain bowls.
2. Insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1/2-Inch thickness up to 1-1/4 inch pipe size, 1-inch thickness for
1-1/2 inch pipe size and larger.
B. Hot Piping: 1. Applications:
a. Potable hot water. b. Potable hot water and hot water circulation.
2. Insulation: a. Hot water and circulating water; Fiberglass: Piping insulation shall be 1-inch
thickness for pipes up to and including 1 1/4 inch and 1 1/2 inch for all other sizes.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION
A. Install insulation after piping system tests have been completed.
B. Clean piping to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.
C. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes, and recognized industry standards.
D. Omit insulation on exposed chrome-plated piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, balance cocks, flow regulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.
E. Secure longitudinal jacket laps and butt strips according to manufacturer's recommendations.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
F. Firmly rub lap and butt strips to pressurize seam and ensure positive closure.
G. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use scraps.
H. Apply insulation to piping with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids.
I. Apply insulation on cold surfaces with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. Hangers, supports, and anchors that are secured directly to cold surfaces must be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
J. Extend surface finishes to protect all surfaces, end, and raw edges of insulation.
K. Protect vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation from puncture or other damage. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier coating.
L. Cover valves, fittings and similar items with equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded or job fabricated covers (at Installer's option). Coat all below ambient valves, fittings and similar items with vapor barrier coating and reinforcing mesh before application of PVC covers.
M. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping penetrations, except where fire-stopping materials are required.
N. Provide thermal shield inserts on all pipe (Refer to 220529). For piping below ambient temperature, apply vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal with 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape. 1. Minimum insulation insert lengths:
a. 1-1/2 – 2-1/2 Inch Pipe: 10-Inches b. 3 – 6-Inch Pipe: 12-Inches c. 8 – 10-Inch Pipe: 16-Inches d. 12-Inch and Larger Pipe: 22-Inches
O. Apply galvanized metal shields between hangers or supports and pipe insulation. Form shields to fit the insulation and extend up to the centerline of the pipe. The shield length shall be 4-inches less than the associated insulation hanger insert to allow for vapor retarding butt joints on each side of the shields.
P. Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings at manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage per gallon.
Q. Replace all damaged insulation in whole; Repair of damaged insulation will not be accepted.
R. Insulate fittings and valves with PVC insulated fitting covers and insulation inserts per manufacturer's recommendations.
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.4 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or damaged during this construction period.
END OF SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the following: 1. Pipe and Tube Materials:
a. Above Grade, inside buildings. b. Below Grade, inside buildings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building or on the premises, which conveys water from the water service pipe or meter to the points of usage.
B. Water Service Piping: The pipe from the water main or other source of potable water supply to the water distributing system of the building served.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products and installation. Safety
valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators. 3. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping. 4. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements. 5. Comply with NSF 61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections
1 through 9," For Potable Domestic Water Piping and Components; NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.
6. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. 7. Safe Water Drinking Act – Including Public Law 111-380 – Cited as the “Reduction of
Lead in Drinking Water Act”.
B. All piping systems shall be installed to manufacturer's standards and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall demonstrate prior to installation of any piping that joining methods and procedures are acceptable to the Engineer and/or Owner with the Factory Representative present. During the installation of the piping system, the Contractor shall be required to provide joint coupons as requested by the Owner or Engineer and repair and/or replace system if joints are deemed unsatisfactory.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.4 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a [State of Colorado] Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. The General Contractor shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the [State of Colorado] Plumbing Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Test Reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. Above Grade Inside Buildings: 1. Pipe 4-Inch and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type L lead-free hard drawn copper tube.
a. Fittings: 1) Lead-Free Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22. 2) Lead-Free Cast Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18. 3) Lead-Free Cast Copper Alloy Flanges Class 150 and 300, Flat-Face Type:
ASME B16.24. 4) Contractor Option: Mechanical Pressure-Seal Fittings as manufac-tured by
Viega or Nibco. System shall be lead-free. Fitting shall be press type with EPDM sealing elements. Contractor shall order valves and other components that are compatible with this press system. Solder joints are acceptable where press system is not the appropriate application.
b. Joining Material: 1) Lead-Free Solder: ASTM B32; minimum tensile strength of 5,900 psi.
Solder shall be certified to meet NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.
c. Fluxes: 1) ASTM B813, Lead-Free Water Soluble, Liquid or Paste Type and be
certified to meet NSF 61 Annex G or NSF 372.
B. Below Grade Inside Buildings: 1. Pipe 2-1/2 Inch and Smaller: ASTM B 88; Type K lead-free soft copper or Type K lead-
free annealed copper tube. a. Fittings:
1) Lead-Free Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2) Lead-Free Cast Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18. b. Joining Material:
1) Brazing: ANSI/AWS A5.8. 2) Lead-free. 3) Brazing rods containing cadmium shall not be used.
c. Fluxes: 1) ANSI/AWS A5.31, Type FB3-A or FB3-C.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices to achieve permanently leak proof piping systems, capable of performing service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and maintenance/ replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes by use of reducing fittings. Align piping accurately at connections, within 1/16-inch misalignment tolerance.
B. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed.
C. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
D. Install piping straight, plumb, level and at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.
E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Install piping free of sags or bends and allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.
G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of insulation and servicing of valves.
H. Install means to drain the system at all low points in mains, risers, and branch lines.
I. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Maintain the fire and smoke rated integrity where pipes pass through fire and smoke rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors.
J. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Use steel pipe for sleeves 6-inch and smaller. Use sheet metal for pipe sleeves 6-inch and larger.
K. Coordinate foundation and all other structural penetrations with Structural Engineer.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
L. Install mechanical couplings and grooved piping systems per the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
3.2 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION
A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: 1. Protect gray and ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene
encasement applied in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5. 2. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C600.
C. Provide and install concrete thrust block and 3/4-inch steel threaded tie bar at each direction change on underground pressure pipe. Embed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream fitting. Paint tie bar with two (2) coats of Bitumastic #50 paint.
D. Bury all outside water piping minimum 5'-0" below grade to top of pipe.
3.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE
A. Extend water distribution piping 5'-0" outside of building.
B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation.
C. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building; complete with strainer, pressure gauge, and test tee with valve.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping run outs to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code.
B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection, provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inch and larger, use flanges instead of unions.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,
at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official. a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Plumbing Official to observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code.
3. Reinspections: Whenever the Plumbing Official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the Plumbing Official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping Tests: 1. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test
piping system before insulation is installed wherever feasible. Test each natural section of each piping system independently but do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for indicated pressure and time.
2. Test piping that is to be concealed before being permanently enclosed. 3. As soon as work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance
with specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required. 4. Give a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance
test will be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of Agency Having Jurisdiction or his representative. Submit three (3) copies of successful tests to the Engineer for his review. Report shall state system tested and date of successful test.
5. Obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with regulations of Agencies Having Jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until such certificates have been delivered.
6. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. 7. System Tests:
a. Hydrostatic Test: Pressurize the system to 100psig or 150 percent of system pressure, whichever is greater. Maintain pressure until the entire system has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than four (4) hours.
b. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions [or existing building conditions] prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior to any testing. For tests of this type, subject the piping system to the gas pressure indicated for that specific system. Maintain the test pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint. The air test is not allowed on CPVC piping systems.
c. Repair failed piping sections by disassembly and re-installation, using new materials to extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair methods.
d. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems, which have
been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Clean and replace strainers. 2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the points of outlet.
b. Fill the system or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or part thereof, and allow to stand for twenty-four (24) hours or fill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for three (3) hours.
c. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.
END OF SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes potable cold, hot, and recirculated hot water specialties within the building to a point 5-feet outside the building. This section includes the following: 1. Piping Specialties:
a. Water Hammer Arrestors b. Strainers c. Hose Bibbs d. Wall and Yard Hydrants e. Backflow Preventers f. Pressure Reducing Valves g. Thermostatic Mixing Valves h. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements. 2. NSF 61 Compliance: Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects; Sections
1 through 9 and Annex G. 3. Safe Drinking Water Act – Public Law No. 111-380. 4. Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual. 5. NSF/ANSI 372: Drinking Water System Components, Lead Content, 2010
B. All piping systems shall be installed to manufacturer's standards and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall demonstrate prior to installation of any piping that joining methods and procedures are acceptable to the Engineer and/or Owner with the Factory Representative present. During the installation of the piping system, the Contractor shall be required to provide joint coupons as requested by the Owner or Engineer and repair and/or replace system if joints are deemed unsatisfactory.
1.3 INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS
A. All Plumbing Work shall be performed by a State of Colorado Licensed Contractor under the supervision of a Licensed Plumber. Contractors shall verify that plumbers are currently licensed by the State of Colorado and shall supply the Project Manager with names and license numbers. Contractors shall have a minimum of three (3) years of satisfactory performance in conducting the type of work specified.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Test Reports.
C. Valve schedule listing valve designation number, valve type, size, location, and function of all valves.
D. Backflow Preventer State Certification Test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Piston type, with copper/brass casing and piston, pressure rated for 250 PSI, tested and
certified in accordance with ASSE 1010 and NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372. Water hammer arrestor shall be designed to provide continuous protection, without maintenance, against excessive surge pressure. Size according to the following schedule.
2. Multiple plumbing fixture unit locations where there are more than 2 fixtures shall have a isolation valve and access panel.
3. Single or two fixture locations will not need an isolation valve and access panel if prior approval is first obtained by the authority having jurisdiction and owner.
Drawing Designation Fixture Unit Rating
P.D.I. Size Connection Size
SA-1 1-11 A 1/2"
SA-2 12-32 B 3/4"
SA-3 33-60 C 1"
SA-4 61-113 D 1”
SA-5 114-154 E 1”
SA-6 155-330 F 1”
4. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Precision Plumbing Products b. Sioux Chief
B. Strainers:
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1. Wye Pattern Strainers: !-inch to 3-inch; 400 PSIG working pressure, lead-free brass or bronze construction, complete with bottom drain connection and removable Type 304 or 302, 20 mesh stainless steel screens. Strainer shall be certified to meet the-lead free requirements of NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Wilkins Model YBXL 2) Watts 3) Apollo
C. Hose Bibbs: 1. Hose Bibb: Polished chrome plated bronze body, with renewable composition disc,
removable handle, 3/4-inch NPT inlet, vacuum breaker, 3/4-inch hose outlet. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Chicago Faucet No. 952-CP 2) Woodford 3) T&S Brass 4) Zurn
D. Wall and Yard Hydrants: 1. Exposed type non-freeze wall hydrant; all brass with nickel bronze face plate, "T" handle
loose key, two (2) check valves, ASSE 1052 or 1019 approved, self-draining body and shank, exposed 3/4-inch male hose thread outlet, 3/4-inch male or female thread inlet, renewable seat; shank length to extend through primary exterior wall sufficient distance to prevent freezing. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Woodford Model 67 2) Josam 3) Wade 4) Prier
E. Backflow Preventers: 1. Reduced Pressure Type: All lead-free bronze (1/2-inch – 2-inch) body with two (2)
independently operating, spring loaded check valves and one (1) differential relief valve with automatic intermediate atmospheric vent. Assembly to be furnished with full port, positive shutoff isolation valves, in-line strainer, union connections, funnel, and all test cocks. Assembly to have approval of National Sanitary Foundation, U.S.C. Foundation for Cross Connection Control, ASSE 1013, AWWA C511 compliant, IAPMO listed, State and or Local Authorities. Backflow preventer shall be certified to meet the lead-free requirements of NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Watts No. LF009 2) Wilkins 3) Febco
F. Pressure Reducing Valves - Air/Water (Direct Acting): 1. Low and Medium Capacity (15 to 120 GPM): All lead-free bronze or brass pressure
reducing valves, sensitive spring and diaphragm for accurate pressure control; manual adjustment for outlet pressure, integral strainer, female thread connections. See detail on
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
Mechanical Plans for size, capacity and piping arrangement. Valve shall be certified to meet the lead-free requirements of NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Watts No. LF223 2) Wilkins
G. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: 1. Exposed type, all lead-free brass or bronze thermostatically controlled mixing valve with
stainless steel piston, fail safe automatic shut-down if either hot or cold water pressure fails; union connection, integral check valves [rough chrome] [polished chrome] finish. Valve shall be ASSE rated for the application. Valve shall be to meet the lead-free requirements of NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Powers 2) Leonard 3) Symmons 4) Lawler 5) Bradley
H. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves (PTRV): 1. Fully automatic, lead-free pressure/temperature relief valve with test lever and extension
thermostatic element; temperature relief setting at 210 degree F and pressure setting at 150 PSIG; valve to be CSA and ASME rated and ANSI Z21.22 certified. Relief opening to be piped to an indirect connection at nearest floor drain. Valve shall be compliant with NSF 61 Annex G and/or NSF 372. a. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Watts Regulator Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Backflow Preventers: 1. Install in compliance with the International Plumbing Code , Colorado Cross Connection
Control Department (CDPHE – Water Quality Control Division) and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Pipe relief outlet through air gap and without valves, to nearest floor drain.
2. Provide testing and report on all backflow prevention devices in accordance with the International Plumbing Code and the Colorado Cross Connection Control Manual (Latest Edition) requirements. Attach testing approval tag to all back flow preventers.
B. Pressure Regulating Valves: Install with inlet and outlet shutoff valves, and balance cock bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet. Install pressure reducing valves to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures to 65 PSIG.
C. Water Hammer Arresters: 1. Install water hammer arresters with isolation valve in accessible location. 2. Provide access doors located in accordance with architectural recommendations. 3. Multiple plumbing fixture unit locations where there are more than 2 fixtures shall have a
isolation valve and access panel.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
4. Single or two fixture locations will not require an isolation valve and access panel if prior approval is first obtained by the authority having jurisdiction and owner.
D. Install mixing valves with integral check valves or in-line check valves, unions and isolation valves.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,
at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official. a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the Plumbing Official to
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code.
3. Reinspections: Whenever the Plumbing Official finds that the piping system will not pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the Plumbing Official.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.
B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.
C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.
END OF SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE & VENT PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Pipe and Tube Materials:
a. Sanitary Drainage, Vents
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5'-0" outside the building wall.
B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
D. Vent System: Pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the International Local
Plumbing Code. 2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
4. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable ASTM Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
5. CISPI Compliance: Comply with applicable CISPI Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
6. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY DRAINAGE AND VENTS
A. Above Grade: 1. Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 10-Inch: Service class hubless cast iron soil pipe: CISPI 301, ASTM
A888. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International. a. Fittings: CISPI 301, NSF International, hubless cast iron, long sweep bends. b. Joining Material: For ASTM A888 pipe, CISPI 310 coupling, assembly of
stainless steel shield and clamp with ASTM C564 elastomeric sealing sleeve. Coupling shall be certified by NSF for CISPI 310 testing and manufactured in the USA.
2. Pipe 1-1/4 Inch to 4-Inch: DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. a. Fittings:
1) Cast Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23. 2) Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.
b. Joining Material: 1) Solder: Lead-free ASTM B32, Solder shall be certified to meet NSF 61
Annex G and/or NSF 372. c. Fluxes:
1) Lead-free ASTM B813 liquid or paste type. 3. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe):
a. Tyler Pipe b. AB&I c. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
B. Below Grade: 1. Pipe 2-Inch to 15-Inch: Service class cast iron hub-and-spigot soil pipe, ASTM A74.
Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute and be listed by NSF International. a. Fittings: ASTM A74 cast iron service class, hub and spigot compression joint,
long sweep bends. b. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.
2. Pipe 2-Inch to 16-Inch: Iron Pipe Size (IPS) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 DWV. a. Manufactured from virgin Type 1, Grade 1 PVC 1120 (Cell Class 12454-B) per
ASTM D-1784. b. Meet the dimensional, physical properties, and tolerances of ASTM D-1785 and
ASTM D-2665. c. Mark pipe with ASTM D-2665, nominal pipe size, and the symbols PVC and
DWV at 5-foot intervals.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
d. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC, solvent cement with long sweep bends. Injection molded conforming to National Sanitation Standard 14.
e. Joining Material: 1) Solvent cement suitable for type and size of pipe installed as recommended
by the pipe manufacturer. 2) Make solvent cement joints from a two-step process with ASTM F656
primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D-2564.
3. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe): a. Tyler Pipe b. AB&I c. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
2.2 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS
A. Copper Pipe and Fittings: 1. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B 306. 2. Fittings:
a. Cast Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23. b. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.
3. Joining Material: a. Solder: Lead-free, ASTM B32, Solder shall be certified to meet NSF 61 Annex G
and/or NSF 372. 4. Fluxes:
a. Lead-free, ASTM B813.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Install piping in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.
E. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing drainage piping with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) downward slope in direction of drain for piping 3-inch and smaller, and 1/8-inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4-inch and larger.
B. Install 1-inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost line and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12-inch beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe centerline.
C. Provide thrust restraints consisting of bracing to structure and rodded joints at branches and changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5-inches and larger suspended within the building and for all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes.
D. Provide sway bracing to prevent shear at joints on cast iron piping suspended in excess of 18-inches on single rod hangers.
E. Provide rigid support sway bracing at all changes in direction greater than 45 degrees for all suspended cast iron piping for pipe sizes 4-inch and larger.
F. Suspended PVC piping shall be installed using the same requirements as cast iron piping for thrust and sway bracing as indicated in the articles above. Hanger spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and code.
G. Install underground cast iron drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual. PVC piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321 and the plumbing code.
H. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
I. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream.
J. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.
K. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe.
L. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes shall be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
M. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
N. Minimum size of waste and vent piping installed under floor slab on grade shall be 2-inches.
O. Vent termination shall be a minimum 12 - inches above finished roof.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the Plumbing Code.
B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,
at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official. a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and
to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code. 3. Re-Inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required corrections, and arrange for re-inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows. 1. Subject all waste and vent piping, including building drain, and building sewer to a water
test. 2. Tightly close all openings in the piping system except the highest opening, and fill the
system with water to the point of overflow. 3. Maintain water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15) minutes
before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping shall not be left open ended during construction.
C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two (2) coats of water-based latex paint. Color selected by Architect.
END OF SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Drainage Piping Specialties:
a. Trap Primers b. Cleanouts c. Floor Drains d. Floor Sinks
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes inside the walls of the building and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5'-0" outside the building wall.
B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
D. Vent System: Pipe or pipes installed to provide a flow of air to or from a drainage system, or to provide a circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and back pressure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the [Denver] [and]
[Uniform] [and] [International] [and] [Local] Plumbing Code.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
4. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable ASTM Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
5. CISPI Compliance: Comply with applicable CISPI Standards pertaining to materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.
6. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and installation of soil and waste systems.
7. PVC, PP and ABS Pipe: Only Contractor's personnel which have received training in the installation of this material and meet the manufacturer's qualifications shall do the assembly of such material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Josam Mfg. Co. 2. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. 3. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. 4. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Division 5. Wade 6. Woodford 7. Precision Plumbing Products 8. Watts
B. Trap Primers: 1. Pressure Drop Type:
a. Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2-inch connections matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.
b. Adjustable to high or low pressure and automatically activated whenever any faucet is opened in the building, causing a pressure drop.
c. Connections: Inlet 1/2-inch male NPT; Outlet 1/2-inch female NPT. d. P1-500 (1 – 4 floor drains)/P2-500 (1 – 2 floor drains) Trap Primer Valve by
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., or equal. e. When more than one (1) trap is to be primed, provide multiple distribution units, as
required for application, by the manufacturer. f. Provide access panel or locate unit so accessible.
2. Trap Seal Units [Designer Note: Verify this method is acceptable with AHJ] a. Trap seal unit fits 2 to 4-inch floors drains. Installation shall not require special
tools or silicon sealant. b. Listed to the requirements of ASSE 1072.
C. Cleanouts: 1. Cleanout Plugs: ASTM A74, Cast brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, and Local
Plumbing Code.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug; scoriated polished bronze frame and cover plate.
3. Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with raised head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread; flat style chrome plated wall cover plate with holes for 1/4-inch bolt; 1/4-20 threaded bolt with chrome plated flat head.
4. Grade Cleanout or Interior Locations Subject to Vehicle Traffic: Round cast iron flanged housing with heavy duty ductile iron cover. Set in 36-inch square concrete pad. Available in pipe sizes 2-inch to 6-inch. Josam No. 58680-5.
5. Line Cleanout: Cast iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised head brass plug. 6. Access Panels: Fire rated assembly compatible with wall rating.
D. Floor Drains: 1. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings
E. Floor Sinks: 1. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Install piping in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.
E. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.
G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts and shower drains above grade. Make watertight with Chloraloy 240 underslab moisture vapor barrier as manufactured by the Nobel Co. of Grand Haven, Michigan. Extend flashing at least 24-inch from drain rim into floor membrane or on structural floor. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device and make watertight,
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and cleanouts installed above grade.
B. Cleanouts: Lubricate plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building turnover remove cleanout plugs, re-lubricate and reinstall using only enough force to ensure permanent leakproof joint. 1. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated, and: a. As required by Plumbing Code; b. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees below slab; c. At minimum intervals of 50-feet; d. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack; e. At sinks and urinals on grade; f. At each upper terminal; g. At egress of building (surface cleanout).
2. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated, and in accessible locations.
3. Access Panels: Where cleanouts are located at a fire rated wall, provide and install fire-rated access panels to maintain wall rating. Provide panel sized to allow access to the cleanout.
C. Floor Drains: 1. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops
of drains flush with finished floor. 2. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer with minimum trap size that of drain
connected. 3. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. 4. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 5. Provide with P-trap the same size as the floor drain unless otherwise noted on Mechanical
Drawings. 6. Provide flashing membrane for all floor drains in structure above slab on grade level.
D. Trap Primers: Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8-inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow. Trap primer piping shall be continuous (no joints) below grade and insulated with 1/2-inch Armaflex insulation. Where a joint below grade is required, such joint shall be brazed.
3.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has
been inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction, at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official. a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and
to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code. 3. Re-Inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required corrections, and arrange for re-inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows. 1. Subject all waste and vent piping, including building drain, roof drain and building sewer
to a water test. 2. Tightly close all openings in the piping system except the highest opening, and fill the
system with water to the point of overflow. 3. Maintain water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15) minutes
before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping shall not be left open ended during construction.
END OF SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 221413 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the following: 1. Pipe and Tube Materials:
a. Roof Drainage 2. Drainage Piping Specialties:
a. Cleanouts b. Roof Drains
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys rain water to a point of disposal. It does not include the mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following: 1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of International and Local
Plumbing Code. 2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 4. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable ASTM Standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 5. CISPI Compliance: Comply with applicable CISPI Standards pertaining to materials,
products, and installation of soil and waste systems. 6. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products and
installation of soil and waste systems. 7. PVC, PP and ABS Pipe: Only Contractor's personnel which have received training in the
installation of this material and meet the manufacturer's qualifications shall do the assembly of such material.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF DRAINAGE
A. Above Grade – 30 Feet of Head or Less: 1. Pipe 1-1/2 Inch to 10-Inch: Service class hubless cast iron soil pipe: CISPI 301, ASTM
A888. a. Fittings: CISPI 301, hubless cast iron, long sweep bends. b. Joining Material: For ASTM A888 pipe, CISPI 310 coupling, assembly of
stainless steel shield and clamp with ASTM C564 elastomeric sealing sleeve. Coupling shall be certified by NSF for CISPI 310 testing and manufactured in USA.
2. Manufacturers (Cast Iron Pipe): a. Tyler Pipe b. AB&I c. Charlotte Pipe & Foundry
2.2 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Josam Mfg. Co. 2. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. 3. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. 4. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Division 5. Wade 6. Woodford 7. Precision Plumbing Products 8. Watts 9.
B. Cleanouts: 1. Cleanout Plugs: ASTM A74, Cast brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, and Local
Plumbing Code. 2. Floor Cleanout: Round, cast iron body with recessed bronze closure plug; scoriated
polished bronze frame and cover plate. 3. Wall Cleanout: Cleanout tee with raised head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread; flat
style chrome plated wall cover plate with holes for 1/4-inch bolt; 1/4-20 threaded bolt with chrome plated flat head or provide fire rated access panel/assembly compatible with the wall rating.
4. Grade Cleanout or Interior Locations Subject to Vehicle Traffic: Round cast iron flanged housing with heavy duty [cast iron] [ductile iron] cover. Set in 36-inch square concrete pad. Available in pipe sizes 2-inch to 6-inch. Jay R Smith No. 4260 series [-M (ductile iron cover)]
5. Line Cleanout: Cast iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised head brass plug.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Roof Drains: 1. Cast iron body with sump, removable cast iron vandal-proof dome strainer, cast iron
flashing flange and cast iron ring with integral gravel stop, underdeck clamp, sump receiver for locations where roof drain is not cast in place, no-hub bottom outlet. a. Jay R. Smith Fig. 1010
2. DSN-[ ] Down Spout Nozzle: Cast bronze body and flange.
a. Jay R. Smith Fig. 1770
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Install piping in accordance with Authorities Having Jurisdiction, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective materials with white paint and promptly remove from site.
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage piping and specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.
E. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.
F. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing drainage piping with 1/4-inch per foot (2 percent) downward slope in direction of drain for piping 3-inch and smaller, and 1/8-inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4-inch and larger.
B. Install 1-inch thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost line and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12-inch beyond each side of pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe centerline.
C. Provide thrust restraints consisting of bracing to structure and rodded joints at branches and changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5-inches and larger suspended within the building and for all changes in diameter greater than two pipe sizes [IPC 308.7.1].
D. Provide sway bracing to prevent shear at joints on cast iron piping suspended in excess of 18-inches on single rod hangers.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
E. Provide rigid support sway bracing at all changes in direction greater than 45 degrees for all suspended cast iron piping for pipe sizes 4-inch and larger [IPC 308.6].
F. Suspended PVC piping shall be installed using the same requirements as cast iron piping for thrust and sway bracing as indicated in the articles above. Hanger spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and code.
G. Install underground cast iron drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual [PVC piping shall be installed in accordance with ASTM 2321 and the plumbing code.]
H. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.
I. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream.
J. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.
K. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from rock, throughout the length of the pipe.
L. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes shall be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert elevation.
M. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint dig bell holes to relieve the bell of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the foundation.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Cleanouts: Lubricate plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building turnover remove cleanout plugs, re-lubricate and reinstall using only enough force to ensure permanent leakproof joint. 1. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping as
indicated, and: a. As required by Plumbing Code; b. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees below slab; c. At minimum intervals of 50-feet; d. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack; e. At egress of building (surface cleanout).
2. Cleanout Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as indicated, and in accessible locations.
3. Rated Access Panels: Where cleanouts are located at a fire rated wall, provide and install fire-rated access panels to maintain wall rating. Provide panel sized to allow access to the cleanout.
B. Roof Drains: 1. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturer's installation instructions.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
3. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain. 4. Install overflow roof drains with the inlet flow line located a maximum 2-inch above the
lowest point of roof.
3.4 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Before commencing work, check invert elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspections: 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage piping system until it has been
inspected and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Plumbing Official Having Jurisdiction,
at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Plumbing Official. a. Rough-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before
concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified and
to insure compliance with the requirements of the Plumbing Code. 3. Re-Inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection, make the
required corrections, and arrange for re-inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the Plumbing Official.
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the Authority Having Jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows. 1. Subject all roof drain piping to a water test. 2. Tightly close all openings in the piping system except the highest opening, and fill the
system with water to the point of overflow. 3. Maintain water in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least fifteen (15) minutes
before inspection starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with less than a 10-foot head of water.
4. Close roof drains at the lowest point and fill with water to the point of overflow.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping shall not be left open ended during construction.
END OF SECTION 221413
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 223200 - WATER HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Water Heater Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping, specialties, pumps, gas piping; breechings which are required external to water heaters for installation; for field installed automatic temperature controls required in conjunction with water heaters; not work of this section.
C. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 22 section "Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment" for requirements.
D. Electrical Work: Provide the following wiring as work of this section, in accordance with requirements of Division 26: 1. Low voltage wiring between water heaters and remote mounted thermostats and controls. 2. Provide factory-mounted and factory-wired controls and electrical devices as specified in
this section.
E. Refer to Division 26 sections for other electrical wiring including motor starters, disconnects, wires/cables, raceways, and other required electrical devices; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of water heaters of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. UL Compliances: Construct water heaters in accordance with the following UL
Standards: a. UL 174, "Household Electric Storage-Tank Water Heaters". b. UL 499, “Electric Heating Appliances”.
2. Provide water heater components which are UL-listed and labeled. 3. NSF Compliance: Construct and install water heaters located in food service
establishments in accordance with NSF 5, "Standard for Hot Water Generating Equipment for Food Service Establishments using Spray Type Dish Washing Machines".
4. NSF Compliance: Construct and install water heater in accordance with NSF 372. 5. NEC Compliance: Install electric water heaters in accordance with requirements of
NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code". 6. International Plumbing Code Compliance: Install water heaters in accordance with
requirements of the “International Plumbing Code”. 7. International Fuel Gas Code Compliance: Install gas-fired water heaters in accordance
with requirements of the “International Fuel Gas Code”.
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
8. CSA International Labels: Provide water heaters which are listed and labeled by CSA International.
9. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Provide water heaters and safety relief valves which comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, and are stamped with appropriate code symbols.
10. ASHRAE Compliance: Provide water heaters with Performance Efficiencies not less than prescribed in the latest edition of ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Standards for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings”.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated capacities and efficiencies of selected model clearly indicated; operating weights; furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for electrical power supply wiring to water heaters. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring required for final installation of water heaters and controls. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions that are to be field-installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type and size of water heater, control, and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
F. Certificates: Submit appropriate Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report as required by provisions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle water heaters and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged water heaters or components; remove from site and replace with new.
B. Store water heaters and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading water heaters, and moving units to final location for installation.
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Commercial Electric – Light Duty:
a. Rheem Water Heater Division; City Investing Co. b. Smith Corp (A.O.); Consumer Products Division c. State Industries, Inc. d. PVI Industries e. Lochinvar
2. Expansion Tanks a. Amtrol – Therm-X-Trol b. Watts c. State Industries, Inc.
2.2 COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS – LIGHT DUTY
A. General: Provide UL Listed commercial electric water heaters of sizes, capacities, and electrical characteristics as indicated on schedule and compliant with the lead-free requirements of NSF 372 and ASHRAE 90.1.
B. Heater: Working pressure of 150 PSI, anode rod; glass lining on internal surfaces exposed to water.
C. Heating Elements and Control: Medium watt density, with corrosion resistant sheath, simultaneous operation, adjustable thermostat(s).
D. Safety Controls: Manual reset, high temperature limit control, factory wired.
E. Jacket: Equip with full size control compartments with front panel opening. Insulate tank with glass fiber or rigid non-CFC foam insulation. Provide outer steel jacket with baked enamel finish.
F. Accessories: Provide lead-free brass drain valve; CSA certified and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
G. Warranty: 3 year tank warranty, 1 year limited parts warranty.
2.3 EXANSION TANKS
A. Expansion tank shall be pre-charged, hydropneumatic steel expansion tank, stainless steel connector, rigid polypropylene liner, Butyl diaphragm, welded steel construction, air charge fitting, lead-free and NSF 61 listed [and ASME stamped].
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which water heaters are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF WATER HEATERS
A. General: Install water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Support: Place units on concrete pads, orient so controls and devices needing service and maintenance have adequate access.
C. Piping: Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions. Connect recirculating water line to unit or as recommended by mixing valve manufacturer piping requirements with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve discharge to closest floor drain, or as indicated.
D. Gauges: Provide thermometers on inlet and outlet piping of water heaters, in accordance with Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Section "Meters and Gauges".
E. Electric Water Heaters: 1. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified
to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. a. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with water heater start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to Water Heater Installer.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION TANKS
A. Install expansion tanks in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Adjust pre-charge to equal incoming water pressure support independently from piping system.
C. Install small expansion tanks in-line with the plumbing piping. Floor mounted expansion tanks shall be mounted on a concrete housekeeping pad.
D. Provide isolation valve and check valve on supply piping to water heater and locate the expansion tank between the check valve and water heater. Provide an isolation valve on the branch piping to the expansion tank.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
A. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust gas-fired water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and utility company's requirements. Check and calibrate controls, adjust burner for maximum efficiency.
B. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust electric water heaters in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Check and calibrate controls.
3.5 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Training: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one-half day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of water heaters. 1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least seven (7) day notice to Contractor and
Engineer of training date.
END OF SECTION 223200
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
WATER HEATERS 223200 - 6
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Plumbing Fixtures Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: 1. ASHRAE Standard 18: "Method of Testing for Rating Drinking Water Coolers with
Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems". 2. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking-Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically-
Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers". 3. ANSI Standard A117.1: "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible
To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People". 4. Public Law 90-480: "Architectural Barriers Act of 1968". 5. International Code Council A117.1: “Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities”. 6. UL Standard 399: "Drinking-Water Coolers". 7. Public Law 101-336: "Americans With Disabilities Act". 8. NSF Standard 61: "Drinking Water Components". 9. Energy Conservation Act - 1992: "Energy Conservation Standards". 10. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, “Emergency Eyewash and Shower
Equipment”. 11. International Plumbing Code – Comply with version enforced by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction. 12. Safe Water Drinking Act and Amendments and includes Section 1417 requiring not more
than a weighted average of 0.25 percent lead when used with respect to the wetted surfaces of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings, and fixtures.
B. Where fixtures are specified as ADA Accessible, it shall be the sole responsibility for all manufacturers and/or suppliers to provide plumbing fixtures and related trim which meet or exceed the ADA Requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1 and below.
B. Color Charts: Submit manufacturer's standard color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture colors.
C. Submit certification of compliance with specified NSF, ANSI, UL, and ASHRAE Standards.
D. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in this Section.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 1
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.4 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
B. Extra Stock: 1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing fixtures and
trim to Owner with receipt in a quantity of one (1) device for each ten (10) fixtures. 2. Furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary washers, springs, pins, retainers,
packings, O-rings, sleeves, ceramic discs and/or seats in a quantity of one (1) kit for each forty (40) faucets.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit Maintenance Data and Spare Parts Lists for each type of manufactured plumbing fixtures, valves and trim. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in Maintenance Manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Lavatories, Sinks, Bidets, Service Sinks, Water Closets, Urinals, Bath Tubs, Vitreous
China Surgeon Scrub Sinks, Clinical Service Sinks: a. American Standard U.S. Plumbing Products b. Crane Co. c. Kohler Co. d. Sloan e. Zurn f. Toto
2. Stainless Steel Sinks: a. Elkay Mfg. Co. b. Just Mfg. Co. c. Moen Incorporated
3. Faucets: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products b. Chicago Faucet Co. c. Delta Faucet Co./Cambridge Brass d. Kohler Co. e. T & S Brass f. Sloan Valve Co. g. Symmons h. Elkay Mfg. Co. i. Zurn
4. Water Closet Seats: a. Bemis Mfg. Co. b. Beneke Corp. c. Church Seats d. Olsonite Corp.; Olsonite Seats
5. Water Coolers:
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 2
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
a. Elkay Mfg. Co. b. Halsey Taylor Division; Household International Co. c. Acorn d. Sunroc Corp. e. Oasis
6. Service Sinks: a. American Standard; U.S. Plumbing Products b. Crane Co. c. Kohler Co.
7. Fixture Supports: a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Wade c. Jay R. Smith d. Zurn Industries, Inc.
8. Mop Service Basins a. Fiat b. Stern-Williams c. Acorn d. Florestone e. Swanstone
9. Food Waste Disposers: a. In-Sink-Erator b. Waste King
10. ADA Sink/Lavatory Pipe Insulation: a. Truebro b. Plumberex Pro-Extreme Series
11. Stops, Supplies, Drains and P-Traps: a. McGuire b. Dearborn c. Brass Craft d. CS&B Company e. Watts f. Nibco
2.2 WATER CLOSETS
A. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings.
2.3 URINALS
A. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings.
2.4 LAVATORIES
A. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 3
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.5 SINKS
A. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings.
2.6 MOP SERVICE BASINS
A. Refer To Plumbing Fixture Schedule On Drawings.
2.7 FITTINGS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Lead-free supplies and Stops for Lavatories and Sinks: Polished chrome-plated, wheel handle angle stop having 1/2-inch inlet and 3/8-inch O.D. x 12-inch long flexible tubing outlet, and wall flange and chrome-plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw. Quantity to match trim specified. Supplies and stops shall be certified as lead-free in accordance with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G and/or NSF/ANSI 372.
B. Traps for Drinking Fountains and Lavatories: Chrome-plated cast brass, 1-1/4 inch adjustable "P" trap with cleanout, waste to wall and chrome-plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw.
C. Traps for Sinks: Chrome-plated cast brass, 1-1/2 inch adjustable "P" trap with cleanout, waste to wall and chrome-plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw.
D. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated cast brass with set screw.
E. All handicapped compliant lavatories and sinks, supplies and waste, shall be insulated with molded vinyl covers, Truebro Inc. Lav-Guard Insulation Kit, or equivalent by approved manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.
C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 4
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.
B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. Arrange flush valve handles with proper orientation to meet ADA requirements.
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure domestic water piping behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation.
D. Set shower receptor and mop basins in a leveling bed of cement grout.
E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.
F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Escutcheon shall be large enough to cover the hole cut for the pipe penetration.
G. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Division 7. Match sealant color to fixture color.
H. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be chrome-plated.
I. External finishes on all trim shall not be chrome-plated plastic.
J. Where possible, fixtures shall be the product of one manufacturer. Where possible, fittings of same type shall be the product of one manufacturer.
K. Install hose end faucets and hose connection with vacuum breakers.
L. Solidly attach floor-mounted water closets to cast iron water closet flange with brass bolts, washers and nuts.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to provide proper flow and stream.
B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 5
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim.
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by the Owner.
3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS SCHEDULE
A. Fixture mounting height and rough-in dimensions shall be as indicated on the Architectural Drawings and Specifications.
END OF SECTION 223300
PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230000 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including the, General and Supplementary Conditions, Division-1 Conditions specification sections apply to the Division 23 specifications and drawings.
B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 specification section and Division 26 drawings.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes requirements common to more than one (1) section of Division 23. It expands and supplements the requirements specified in sections of Division 1.
1.3 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or not, in all walls and ceilings for access to all concealed valves, shock absorbers, air vents, motors, fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring adjustment or servicing. Refer to Division 1 for access door specification and Division 23 for duct access door requirements.
D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be removed or 24-inch x 24-inch if used for service only.
E. Furnish doors to trades performing work in which they are to be built, in ample time for building-in as the work progresses. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc., to permit use of minimum number of access doors within a given room or space.
F. Factory manufactured doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish in which they are to be installed. In lieu of these doors, shop fabricated access doors with DuroDyne hinges may be used.
G. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.4 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided equipment for rough-in requirements.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Execute and inspect all work in accordance with all Underwriters, local and state codes, rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected as a minimum, but if the plans and/or specifications call for requirements that exceed these rules and regulations, the greater requirement shall be followed. Follow recommendations of NFPA, SMACNA, EPA, OSHA and ASHRAE.
C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a standard or specific date or edition is indicated.
D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with U.S. EPA, state and local regulations.
E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.
1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES
A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be required for the project.
1.7 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Contractor shall pay all tap, development, meter, etc., fees required for connection to municipal and public utility facilities.
C. Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all inspections, licenses and certificates required in connection with the Work.
1.8 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required offset, valve, fitting, etc.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Drawings and specifications are complementary. Whatever is called for in either is binding as though called for in both.
C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or have to be made from field measurement, take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings.
D. Before any Work is installed, determine that equipment will properly fit the space; that required piping grades can be maintained and that ductwork can be run as contemplated without interferences between systems, with structural elements or with the work of other trades.
E. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above and below ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building components. 1. Coordinate ceiling cavity space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install
mechanical and electric systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority. a. Plumbing waste, vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders b. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork c. Electrical conduit d. Domestic hot and cold water
F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations.
H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing-in the building.
J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the installation of mechanical equipment and materials.
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
L. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.
M. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and materials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and equipment.
B. Refer to Division 1.
C. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting and patching.
D. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result of mechanical installations.
E. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
F. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to: 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work; 2. Remove and replace defective work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents; 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing; 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures; 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore work to provide for
Architect observation of concealed work.
G. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new work.
H. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.
I. Provide and maintain an approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. When services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover.
1.10 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and Division 1, "PRODUCTS, OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTION".
1.11 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes in construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor.
C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or Local Energy Conservation Standards.
D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when submitted by and stamped by the Contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Architect will not be processed unless prior written approval is obtained by the Contractor.
E. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.
F. If more than two (2) submittals (either for shop drawings or for as-built drawings) are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor.
G. Before starting Work, prepare and submit to the Architect all shop drawings and descriptive equipment data required for the project. Unless each item is identified with specification section and sufficient data to identify its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the item will be returned without action. Continue to submit shop drawings after each Engineer's action, until a "Reviewed" action is received. The Contractor shall submit the total number of sets as called for in Division 1 to the Architect for final distribution. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 23 which follow. 1. Pipe Markers 2. Valves, including pressure relief and pressure regulating 3. Supports, anchors and seals 4. Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's installation
instructions 5. Air conditioning equipment and specialties 6. Fans, ductwork, dampers, louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers
H. Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.
I. Identify each item with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with the specifications.
1.12 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A. All “Requests for Information” submitted by the Contractor shall include a proposed solution and an estimated cost/schedule impact. Any RFI’s that do not contain this required information will be sent back to the Contractor unanswered.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.13 PRODUCT LISTING
A. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project, within two (2) weeks of signing the Contract Documents and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer.
B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA) manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice.
C. Provide all information requested.
D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1, "PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION".
E. When two (2) or more items of same material or equipment are required (pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated.
F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.
1.14 NAMEPLATE DATA
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, efficiency rating (i.e. EER, etc.) capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.
1.15 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.
C. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture.
D. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.
E. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
F. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
G. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.
1.16 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Keep a complete set of record document prints or electronic mark-ups in custody during entire period of construction at the construction site.
C. Mark drawing prints to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes, and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.); RFI's; change orders; concealed control system devices. Changes to be noted on the drawings shall include final location of any piping or ductwork relocated more than 1'-0" from where shown on the drawings.
D. Mark Equipment Schedules on the drawings with changes to Manufacturer, Model Number, and data based on reviewed shop drawings.
E. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn these drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This Contract will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received and reviewed by the Architect.
1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. The Testing and Balancing Report shall be submitted and received by the Engineer at least five (5) calendar days prior to the Contractor's request for final observation time frame requirements. Final Observation(s) will not proceed without T&B Report. Include in the O&M Manual after review with "Review" or "Make Corrections Noted" has been accomplished.
C. In addition to the information required by Division 1 for maintenance data, include the following information: 1. Description of mechanical equipment, function, normal operating characteristics and
limitations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of all replaceable parts.
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 7
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
5. Manufacturer's service manuals for all mechanical equipment provided under this Contract.
6. Include the valve tag list. 7. Name, Address and Telephone Number of party to be contacted for twenty-four (24) hour
service for each item of equipment. 8. Starting, stopping, lubrication, equipment identification numbers and adjustment clearly
indicated for each piece of equipment. 9. Complete parts list. 10. Mechanical warranties.
D. This Contract will not be considered completed, nor will final payment be made, until all specified material, including Testing and Balancing Report, is received in this Operating and Maintenance Report and the manual is reviewed by the Architect.
1.18 LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he provided before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or heavy duty shipping tag on the piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and the type and brand of lubricant used.
C. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list in quadruplicate, of each item lubricated and type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems involved.
1.19 DEMOLITION
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. During the demolition phase of this Contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to carefully remove existing equipment, piping or ductwork and related items either as shown on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items shall be tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect. A list of all items stored shall be turned over to the Architect. At the completion of the remodeling work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises.
C. The location of existing equipment, pipes, ductwork, etc., shown on the drawings has been taken from existing drawings and field survey and is, therefore, as accurate as that information may be without complete unobstructed view above ceilings, in walls or below the floor. All existing conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment being made to the drawing information.
D. If asbestos material, in any form, is discovered by this Contractor in the process of his work, he shall report such occurrence to the Architect immediately. The Architect will determine the action to be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part of the work to be done under this Division.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 8
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.20 WARRANTIES
A. Refer to Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications for warranty requirements. In any case, the entire mechanical system shall be warranted no less than one (1) year from the time of acceptance by the Owner.
B. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to include date or beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.
1.21 CLEANING
A. Refer to Division 1.
B. Refer to Division 23, "TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING" for requirements for cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance.
END OF SECTION 230000
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 9
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 10
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Piping Specialties Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Piping Specialties specified in this section include the following: 1. Escutcheons 2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal 3. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal
C. Piping Specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. 2. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. 3. Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to comply with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. 4. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualification" for qualifications for welding processes and operators.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required piping specialty.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication, materials, and method of support.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of manufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Escutcheons:
a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. b. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp. c. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
2. Mechanical Sleeve Seal: a. Thunderline Corp. b. "Metraseal" by Metraflex Co.
3. Fire and Smoke Barrier Penetration Seal: a. Electrical Products Division/3M b. Dow Corning c. Flame Stop, Inc. d. MetaCaulk e. Hilti
2.2 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter closely fitting pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outside diameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, or ceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.
B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: For waterproof floors, and areas where water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheet brass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.
2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. General: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
2.4 FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALS
A. General: Provide UL Listed firestopping systems composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.
C. Penetrations in Fire Resistive Rated Walls: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of the wall construction being
penetrated.
D. Penetration in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL 1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. F-Rating: Minimum of 1-hour rating, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the
floor construction being penetrated. 2. T-Rating: When penetrant is located outside of a wall cavity, minimum of 1-hour rating,
but not less than the fire-resistance rating of the floor construction being penetrated. 3. W-Rating: Class 1 rating in accordance with water leakage test per UL 1479.
E. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide firestopping with ratings determined in accordance with UL1479 or ASTM E 814. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at both ambient and
elevated temperatures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls, partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building. Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flush with adjoining surface.
B. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts and pressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.
C. Fire or Fire/Smoke Barrier Penetration Seals: Where pipe penetration occurs in fire or fire/smoke rated walls, provide a complete listed protection assembly equal to the rating of the wall/floor.
D. Provide dielectric waterways or insulating flanges, as required by pipe size, on all connections of dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230513 – MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for Electrical Components for Mechanical Equipment. These components include, but are not limited to, motors, starters, and disconnect switches for mechanical equipment.
B. Wiring of field-mounted switches and similar mechanical-electrical devices provided for mechanical systems, to equipment control panels.
C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict, Electrical Drawings shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical equipment until power characteristics available at building site location have been confirmed by Contractor.
D. Refer to Table in Division 26 for Mechanical/Electrical Coordination.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motors, motor starters and drives of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects utilizing electric motors, similar to that required for this project.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces."
D. UL Compliance: Provide equipment and/or components which are UL-listed and labeled.
E. Standards: 1. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators. 2. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 3. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 4. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches. 5. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
F. Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical provisions of Mechanical Work with similar elements of Electrical Work specified in Division 26 sections. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 26 sections for Electrical Work of this section which are not otherwise specified.
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Listing, Motors of Mechanical Work: Concurrently, with submittal of mechanical products listing, submit separate listing showing rating, power characteristics, efficiencies, power factors, application and general location of every motor to be provided with mechanical work. Submit updated information promptly when and if initial data is revised. 1. Include in listing of motors, notations of whether motor starter is furnished or installed
integrally with motor or equipment containing motor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers for each type of product: 1. Motors:
a. Century/MagneTek b. Baldor c. U.S. Motor d. Reliance e. Siemens-Allis f. General Electric g. Louis Allis
2.2 MOTORS
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications. 1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven loads with
a time limit acceptable to the motor manufacturer. Motors shall be capable of starting the driven equipment while operating at 90 percent rated terminal voltage.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.
3. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 degree C environment with maximum 80 degree C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class B Insulation). Provide Class F insulation for variable frequency drive motors.
4. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system, and not less than five (5) evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors. 6. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design
"B", except "C" where required for high starting torque. Design "E" shall not be used. a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; Use driven equipment manufacturer's
standards to suit specific application. b. Bearings:
1) Ball bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. 2) Re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally
inaccessible for regular maintenance.
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3) Bearings shall be rated for minimum L-10 life of 40,000 hours. 4) Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce
lateral or axial thrust in motor. 5) For fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are
permitted. c. Enclosure Type:
1) Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2) Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.
3) Weather protected Type I for outdoor use; Type II where not housed. d. Noise Rating: "Quiet". e. Efficiency: "Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as
scheduled in Table 1 in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B.
TABLE 1*
HP 3600 RPM EFFICIENCY
1800 RPM EFFICIENCY
1200 RPM* EFFICIENCY
MINIMUM POWER FACTOR
1-1/2 82.5 84.0 84.0 85.0
2 82.5 84.0 86.5 85.0
3 84.0 86.5 87.5 85.0
5 85.5 89.5 87.5 85.0
7-1/2 86.5 91.0 89.5 85.0
10 87.5 91.0 90.2 85.0
15 89.5 91.7 91.0 85.0
20 90.2 92.0 91.7 85.0
* Efficiency and power factors may vary from above values for multi-speed motors and/or special hermetic motors packaged with equipment. For these special applications, motors shall be high-efficiency type and are subject to review by the Engineer.
f. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics,
construction, special features and similar information. 7. Phases and Current Characteristics: Unless indicated otherwise, provide squirrel-cage
induction polyphase motors for 3/4 HP and larger, and provide capacitor-start single-phase motors for 1/2 HP and smaller, except 1/6 HP and smaller may, at equipment manufacturer's option, be split-phase type. Coordinate current characteristics with power specified in Division 26 sections. Do not purchase motors until power characteristics available at building site have been confirmed by Contractor.
8. The Contractor shall be responsible for all additional electrical and other costs involved to accommodate any motors which differ from the scheduled horsepower sizes or correct
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
any motor which does not meet the listed duty or efficiency as called for in Mechanical or Electrical Plans and Specifications.
9. Motors shall be of the same manufacturer, except those that are an integral part of a factory assembled packaged unit. These motors shall likewise meet the conditions of the specification in this section except motors which are part of a motor/compressor assembly are exempted from this requirement.
10. All motors 75 HP and larger shall be factory test certified for power factor, efficiency, and shall have a three (3) year warranty. Factory certification of motor tests shall be provided to the Owner.
11. All equipment specified to operate with Variable Frequency Drives shall be provided with invertor-duty motors specifically designed for variable speed operation with high efficiency at part load conditions and constructed with Class F insulation.
2.3 STARTERS
A. Motor Starters: Refer to Section 230514.
2.4 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. See Division 26 for requirements.
2.5 DRIVES
A. V-Belt Drives: 1. Capacity of V-Belt Drives at rated RPM shall be not less than 150 percent of motor
nameplate horsepower rating. 2. V-Belt Drive combinations shall be limited to A, B, C and fractional horsepower belts.
3V, 5V and 8V belts and sheaves shall not be used. 3. All fixed pitch sheaves, including single groove fan sheaves, shall be of the bushed type.
Fixed bore sheaves will not be acceptable for adjustable pitch sheaves. 4. Unit manufacturer shall provide OSHA approved belt guard with tachometer holes.
2.6 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, special couplings and similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable guards for motor drives, arranged for lubrication and similar running-maintenance without removal of guards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND TEST DATA
A. A factory load test shall be performed on each motor of 1,000 watt input or greater to assure compliance with the energy-efficiency section of this specification.
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Typical test data on every motor to be used on this project shall be made available upon request.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with keys and Allen set screws, except motors of 1/3 HP and less may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated, set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.
B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory-installed on equipment unit to electrical installer for installation.
C. Install power and control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable provisions of Division 26 sections. Install grounding except where non-grounded isolation of motor is indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION COORDINATION
A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full capacity at electrical service available.
B. All control wiring to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be color-coded and individually numbered to facilitate checking.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, all mechanical equipment motors and controls shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the schedule contained in Division 23. The exact furnishing and installation of the equipment is left to the Contractors involved. Contractor should note that the intent of the schedule is to have the Division 23 and 26 Contractors responsible for coordinating all control wiring as outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the Mechanical or Electrical Drawings and Specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 26 for all electrical work which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to provide for these required items. The Contractor shall refer to the Division 26 and Division 23 specifications and plans for all power and control wiring and shall advise the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding.
END OF SECTION 230513
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
MECH/ELEC REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 230513 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230529 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Supports and Anchors required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of Supports and Anchors specified in this section include the following: 1. Piping Hangers and Supports 2. Vertical-Piping Clamps 3. Hanger-Rod Attachments 4. Building Attachments 5. Saddles and Shields 6. Miscellaneous Materials
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Mechanical Codes pertaining to
product materials and installation of supports and anchors. 2. Duct Hangers: SMACNA Duct Manuals. 3. MSS Standard Compliance:
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying that their products meet the specified requirements.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
a. B-Line Systems Inc. b. Carpenter and Patterson, Inc. c. Fee & Mason Mfg. Co.; Division Figgie International d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. e. Elcen Metal Products Company f. Erico/Caddy g. Unistrut Metal Framing Systems h. Hilti USA. i. Advanced Thermal Systems j. Anvil
2. Saddles and Shields: a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. Pipe Shields, Inc. c. Insulation Pipe Supports Manufacturing d. Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product Inc. e. Erico/Caddy f. Component Products Co. g. Value Engineered Products, Inc. h. Snappitz Pipe Inserts by Mechanical Pipe Shields, Inc. i. Anvil
2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58. 1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and equipment that
will not have field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/8-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B3100 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3104CT
C. Adjustable Swivel Ring: MSS Type 10 1. Steel Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch, B-Line B3170NF 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 2-inch, B-Line B3170CT
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Standard Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8 1. Steel Pipe, size 3/4-inch thru 20-inch, B-Line B3373 2. Copper Pipe, size 1/2-inch thru 4-inch, B-Line B3373CT
E. Floor Stand Pipe Saddle Support: MSS Type 37 1. Steel Pipe, size 1 1/2-inch thru 12-inch, B-Line B3095
F. Steel Yoke and Pipe Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43 1. 2-1/2 inch thru 20-inch, B-Line B3110
G. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.
2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS
A. Beam Clamps 1. All thread rod sized 3/8-inch and 1/2-inch: B-Line B3034 2. All thread rod sizes 5/8- inch: B-Line B3033 3. All thread rod sizes 3/4-inch and up: B-Line B3055
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69 and tables this section. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
B. New Construction: 1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams wherever practicable. 2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in
concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 4-inch or ducts over 60-inch wide. 3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface. 4. Use drop-in anchors for concrete structures. 5. Use beam clamps for steel structures.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Existing Construction: 1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten expansion
anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69 and tables this section. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from other piping.
B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers and other accessories.
C. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.
D. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units and within 1'-0" of each horizontal elbow.
E. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
G. Support vertical runs at each floor.
H. Install steel natural gas piping with the following minimum rod size and maximum spacing:
Size (NPS)(Inches) Maximum Span in Feet
Minimum Rod Size - Inches
1/2 6 3/8 3/4 to 1-1/4 8 3/8 1-1/2 to 2 10 3/8 2-1/2 to 3 10 1/2 4 to 5 10 5/8 6 to 8 10 3/4 10 to 12 10 7/8 Vertical, all sizes Every floor level
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
I. Provide copper or copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet lead packing between hanger or support and piping.
J. Place a hanger within 1-foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.
K. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inch (38.1 mm) minimum after piping is erected. Provide and tighten tap locking nut on each hanger.
L. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height but at not more than 15-foot intervals for steel and 10-feet for copper.
M. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze hangers.
N. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
O. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides shall be securely anchored to the building structure.
P. Install all couplings with torque wrench, torqued to inch-pounds as specified by the manufacturer.
Q. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the following: 1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is
considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice the actual load.
2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after the construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than six (6) inches) in undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly installed, the Contractor shall test load any fifty (50) successively driven fasteners. If 10 percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Hangers for piping and ducts shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks with steel plates and bolted rod conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span the number of floor deck attachments required.
4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.
3.4 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Minimum Sizes:
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1. Up to 30-Inch Wide: 1-inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing. 2. 31-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge at 10-foot spacing. 3. Over 48-Inch Wide: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods spaced not more
than 8-foot on centers. 4. Up to 20” round: 1-inch x 20 gauge at 10-feet spacing. 5. Up to 60” round: I-inch 18 gauge at 10 foot spacing.
B. Horizontal Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes: 1. Up to 18-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge or 1-inch x 1-inch x 1/8 inch at 8-foot
spacing. 2. 19-Inch to 40-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle at 4-foot spacing.
C. Vertical Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes: 1. At 10-foot spacing. 2. Up to 24-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 16 gauge; 25-inch to 36-inch wide: 1-inch x 1-inch x
1/8-inch angle. 3. 37-Inch to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/4 inch x 1-1/4 inch x 1/8-inch angle.
D. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes: 1. Riveted or screwed to duct. 2. Up to 60-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle. 3. Over 60-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 1/8-inch.
E. Provide sway bracing on all ductwork in accordance with local codes and regulations.
3.5 SPIRAL LOCK SEAM DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Round Duct Hangers Minimum Sizes: 1. At 10-foot spacings. 2. Up to 18-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 16 gauge. 3. 19-Inch to 36-Inch Diameter: 1-inch x 12 gauge. 4. 37-Inch to 50-Inch Diameter: 1-1/2 inch x 12 gauge. 5. 51-Inch to 84-Inch Diameter: Trapeze hangers with angle iron and 1/2-inch rods spaced
not more than 8-foot on center.
B. Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes: 1. Rivet to duct and tie angles together with road, angles or cinch band. 2. Up to 48-Inch Wide: 1-1/2 inch x 1-1/2 inch x 1/8-inch angle. 3. Over 48-Inch Wide: 2-inch x 2-inch x 3/16-inch angle.
C. Additional Hanger Requirements: 1. 2-Inch to 24-inch from flexible connections of fans. 2. 2-Inch to 24-inch from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing
boxes. 3. 12-Inch to 36-inch from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4. 2-Inch to 12-inch from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5. 2-Inch to 24-inch from fire or fire/smoke damper break-away joints. 6. Hangers at throat and heal of round or square elbows 48-inch or greater in width.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 230529
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 7
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 230529 - 8
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Mechanical Identification Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.
B. Types of Identification Devices specified in this section include the following: 1. Plastic Duct Markers 2. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs 3. Plasticized Tags 4. Lettering and Graphics
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for Identification Requirements at Central-Station Mechanical Control Center; not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division 26 sections for Identification Requirements of Electrical Work; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shutoff and similar special uses, such as valve to isolate individual system risers, individual floor branches or building system shut-off valves. In include in Operation & Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 1.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Division 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 4. Seton Name Plate Corp. 5. Holbi.
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.
2.3 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, duct markers.
B. For Hazardous Exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.
C. Nomenclature: Include the following: 1. Direction of air flow 2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.) 3. Duct origin (from) 4. Duct destination (to) 5. Design CFM
2.4 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2 inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6-inch, 2-1/2 inch wide tape for larger pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
2.5 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, Black with White core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated,
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
B. Thickness: 1/8-Inch, except as otherwise indicated.
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.
2.6 PLASTICIZED TAGS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4 inch x 5-5/8 inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording (As examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).
2.7 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the drawings or schedule as well as service.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in Black or White (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color). Existing building identification shall match the existing method which exists in the building.
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into concealed
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50-foot spacings along exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at Installer's option.
3.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install minimum 2-inch x 4-inch engraved plastic laminate equipment marker on each individual items of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment. 1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and
hazardous units such as gas outlets. 2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats. 3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption chillers. 4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units. 5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment. 6. Fans and blowers. 7. HVAC units. 8. Tanks and pressure vessels. 9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment.
B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch high lettering for name of unit.
C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION 230553
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 230553 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 1 and 23 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This section covers Testing and Balancing of Environmental Systems including but not limited to air distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and the equipment and apparatus connected thereto. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall be the responsibility of one (1) testing, balancing and adjusting firm. 1. Test, Adjust, and Balance all of the following mechanical systems:
a. Supply Air Systems; b. Return Air Systems; c. Exhaust Air Systems;
2. Report any systems for excessive sound and vibration levels.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR
A. Procure the services of an independent testing and balancing Agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental systems to perform the above mentioned work. An independent agency is defined as an organization that is not engaged in engineering design or is not a division of a mechanical contractor entity that installs mechanical systems. It shall be an agency certified by NEBB or TABB. Testing and balancing work shall be directly supervised by a NEBB certified Supervisor or Professional Engineer on the Testing and Balancing Agency's staff. The Supervisor shall represent the Testing and Balancing Agency in progress meetings as requested, and shall be available for interpreting all material found in the Balance Report. 1. All field work shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently certified by
either NEBB or TABB Test and Balance Certification Agencies.
1.4 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS REVIEW
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall submit the name of the Testing and Balancing Agency to the Architect within thirty (30) days of contract award to ensure that the Testing and Balancing Agency is on the project from the outset of construction.
B. Any testing and balancing agency desiring to offer their services for this Work shall submit their qualifications to the Architect, not less than seven (7) working days before the bid date. Review and recommendations to Owner will be given on each request and action on the recommendation will be given in writing prior to bidding the work. Agencies meeting the qualifications of the Specification are those Agencies approved by the Owner.
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Acceptable TAB Agencies are: 1. Griffith Engineering Service 2. JPG Engineering, Inc. 3. TAB Services 4. L.H. Finn & Assoc. 5. Complete Mechanical Balancing, Inc. 6. Double T Balancing Company 7. Superior Balance and Commissioning, Inc.
1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook 2011, Applications Volume, Chapter 36, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
B. SMACNA: “Tab Procedure Guidelines”.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the name of the Test and Balance Agency who will be performing the work. The submittal shall include a complete list of all technicians who will be performing the field work and include a photocopy of their current certification by either NEBB or TABB Certification Agencies.
B. Only those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. Any personnel or staff used to perform the work who are not included in the submittal shall be grounds for rejecting the Test and Balance Report and the Project in whole.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Air and water testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full working order.
B. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. Preliminary Testing and Balancing requirements shall be ascertained prior to the commencement of work through a review of the project plans and specifications. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices, that they are being installed properly, and in an accessible location for the need. Report in writing any deficiencies to the Contractor and Mechanical Engineer immediately.
C. Before any air balance work is done, the system shall be checked for duct leakage, assure filters are installed, see that filters are changed if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, equipment vibration, and check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and outlets shall be wide open at this time.
D. Before any hydronic balancing work is done, the system shall be checked for plugged strainers, proper pump rotation, proper control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
static pressure to assure a full system, proper flow meter and check valve installation. All throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate scheduling of Work with the Contractor. 1. Schedule TABB work to coincide with testing and verification of the temperature control
systems where practical. 2. Coordinate system start-up and performance verification with the Engineer as TABB
work is in progress.
B. Provide written notification to the Project Manager five (5) working days prior to commencing TABB and a schedule for completing the work.
C. Provide written notification to the Contractor within twenty-four (24) hours of an equipment failure preventing TABB work from proceeding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUMENTS
A. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standards and recommendations and requirements of NEBB.
B. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
A. Operate all temperature control systems with the Temperature Control Contractor's representative for proper sequence of operation and calibration. Report in writing any deficiencies to the Engineer immediately.
3.2 REQUIREMENTS OF WORK
A. Provide all necessary fan belts and sheaves to balance all fans to the specified air delivery for the actual field conditions.
B. Balance all air and water flows at terminals within +5 percent to -5 percent of design flow quantities for individual terminals. And +5 percent to –10 percent of individual air outlets or inlets. Measure and record the following data:
C. Air Balance: 1. Air supply, return and exhaust systems with air quantities for each air device; air
handling units including supply, return, mixed, and outside temperatures and fan data
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
including CFM, static pressure, fan RPM, voltage, rated motor amperage, motor running amperage before and after final balance, listed motor power factor and motor running power factor reading. Air diffusion patterns shall be set to minimize objectionable drafts, noise, and local smoke detection device ratings.
2. The supply, return and exhaust fan static pressure shall be set by the balancing firm and the Control Contractor if the systems have fan volume control. The duct static shall be confirmed both through the instrumentation installed on the job and by the Balancing Agency. The system shall be tested in all operating modes (including minimum outside air with full return air, full outside air, modulated damper position, and full cooling with the design diversity). System static pressure and fan motor amperages shall be recorded in all modes. The fan speed resulting in satisfactory system performance shall be determined at full design delivery, inlet or outlet fan. Volume control dampers shall be in the wide open position and variable frequency drive is at 100 percent of design RPM and one (1) path presenting the greatest resistance to flow shall be fully open and unobstructed.
3. Provide full pitot traverse and CFM measurements at each fan in addition to terminal device measurements.
4. Air volume and air temperature rise or drop across each coil, filter, dampers, etc., of air handling section.
5. Measure, adjust, set, balance and record outside air, return air and exhaust/relief air quantities for all air handling systems and supply fans.
Air quantities shall be determined by direct airflow measuring procedures wherever possible, where duct/inlet conditions do not allow for accurate direct measurement of outside air the following method shall be used:
Outside Air CFM = Supply Fan Total CFM -Return Fan Total CFM
In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and record outside air, return air and mixed air temperatures, determine thermal/mass energy balance and provide calculations to verify measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting the outside air quantity as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable.
D. Final adjustments shall include but not be limited to the following:
ITEM ADJUSTMENT Fan: Belt Drive RPM. Include sheave and belt exchange to deliver air flow
within limits of installed motor horsepower and mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for predicted filter loading and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM regulators.
Fan: Direct Drive RPM with speed taps. Set fan speed on tap which most
closely approaches design CFM. Report tap setting on equipment data sheet as high, medium or low. RPM with speed control rheostat. Set output of fan at design
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
ITEM ADJUSTMENT CFM by adjusting the SCR. After adjustment, check fans ability to re-start after powering down. Increase setting if required for proper starting. CFM with variable pitch blades. Variable fixed pitch fan blades and variable in motion pitch fan blades shall be adjusted by the manufacturer at pitch required to provide design output. Pitch angle adjustment shall not exceed recommended maximum to prevent "stall."
Air Devices All diffusers and registers shall be measured and balanced. Motor Starter Thermal Heaters
Division 23 Furnished Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper motor protection. Division 26 Furnished Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters. Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical Contractor of discrepancies. Existing Magnetic and Manual Starters. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for motor protection.
E. Electric Heat: 1. Full load amperage and voltage of all electric heating elements. 2. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall check staging of heating devices and reset if
required for proper operation.
F. When necessary as determined by the Mechanical Engineer, the Test and Balance Agency shall provide additional testing and measurements as required by the Mechanical Engineer including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Static pressure gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/or piping systems. 2. Temperature gradient profiles throughout ductwork and/or piping system. 3. Miscellaneous electrical measurements. 4. Smoke tests of room pressure relationships.
This work shall be done immediately upon request with complete cooperation and in an expedient schedule at no additional cost to any other party.
3.3 REPORT OF WORK
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final Testing and Balancing Report at least five (5) calendar days prior to the Contractor's request for final inspection. All data shall be recorded on applicable reporting forms. The report shall include all operating data as listed in Paragraph 3.2 above, a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work, and shall be signed by the Supervising Registered Professional Engineer and affixed with their registration stamp, signed and dated in accordance with State Law. Final acceptance of this project will not take place until a satisfactory report is received.
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. When deemed necessary by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer, the Testing and Balancing Agency shall run temperature and/or humidity recordings and shall read any of the report quantities in the presence of the Engineer for verification purposes.
C. When all air balancing is done and all dampers are set, all test holes shall be plugged and all dampers shall be marked with paint. The following information shall be recorded for each fan system in the final report: Design fan and air device inlet or outlet size, actual inlet or outlet size, design and actual CFM and velocity through the orifice, for each terminal in the system. The pitot tube traverse method used and location of pitot tube traverse for determining CFM shall be recorded.
D. After all balancing is complete and all coordination with the Contractor and the Engineer is complete, the balancing firm shall furnish aforementioned bound report which shall contain the following information: 1. RPM, drive sheave information (as installed and as changed), fan nameplate information,
motor nameplate information, motor amperage, motor voltage and power factor to all motors (in all operating modes).
2. Static pressure across all components of the system. 3. Required and final balanced CFM at each system terminal. Include the terminal size,
reading orifice size, and velocities read to attain the CFM. 4. Thermal protection for all motors shall be recorded; also power factor for all motors
drawing 1,000 watts or more. Starter brand, model, enclosure type, installed thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters, required thermal heaters and the rating of the heaters if different than installed shall be recorded. Starter heaters shall be changed to the correct size and so noted in the report. If the starters were furnished by the Division 26, the correct heater sizes shall be noted in the report and the Contractor shall be advised.
5. The report shall include a sheet which shall report the method of balance, project altitude, and any correction factors.
6. A complete reduced set of the Black-line Mechanical Contract Drawings which shall be included in the report with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (VAV boxes, outlets, inlets, coils, unit heaters, fintube loops, radiant panel loops, schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated.
E. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall respond and correct all deficiencies within seven (7) days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the Balancing Report. Failure to comply will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.4 GUARANTEE OF WORK
A. The Testing and Balancing Agency shall guarantee the accuracy of the tests and balance for a period of ninety (90) days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report. During this period, the Testing and Balancing Agency shall make personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become apparent in the system balance.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 230593 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes: 1. Ductwork Insulation and Jackets
B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for Shields, Inserts, and Mechanical Identification.
C. Insulation thickness based on ASHRAE 90.1 recommendations. Ductwork insulation thickness is based on Table 6.2.4.2B, Envelope Criteria Table 5-16 through 5-19 for Exterior, Unvented Attic With Roof Insulation, Unconditioned Space and Indirectly Conditioned Spaces. Piping insulation thickness is based on Table 6.2.4.5.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years successful installation experience on projects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.
C. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics and insulating cements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions and schedule listing materials, thickness, K-value, density, and furnished accessories for each service or equipment specified.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of the products, name of manufacturer, and brand.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following: 1. Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (flexible elastomeric) b. Johns-Manville Products Corp. (fiberglass, calcium silicate) c. Knauf Fiber Glass (fiberglass) d. Manson Insulation Co. (fiberglass, calcium silicate) e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (fiberglass) f. Rubatex Corp. (flexible elastomeric) g. Aeroflex (flexible elastomeric)
2. Jacketing, Coatings, Adhesives, Sealants and Covering Products: a. Childers b. Foster c. Ceel-Co. d. Johns-Manville Products Corp. e. Knauf Fiber Glass f. Venture Tape Corporation g. Design Polymetrics
2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: ASTM C 553, Type II, 3/4 lb/cu ft density, 1-1/2 inch thickness, 0.27 "K" value at 75 degree F mean temperature at compressed thickness, maximum service temperature 250 degree F, moisture sorption less than 0.2% by volume, aluminum foil facing reinforced with fiberglass scrim laminated to UL rated Kraft paper. Composite 25/50-flame spread/smoke developed rating (ASTM E 84, UL 40, and NFPA 90A). 1. Secure with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinched expanded staples
and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
B. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Round Ducts and Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Adhere flexible insulation to ductwork with adhesive applied in 6-inch wide strips on 16-inch centers. Butt insulation and seal joints and breaks with 2-inch lap of foil adhered over joint.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions where mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Flexible Fiberglass Blanket: 1. Concealed supply ductwork without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. (IECC R5 min) 2. Return ductwork in unconditioned spaces without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
(IECC R5 min) 3. Exhaust ductwork within 10 ft. of exterior opening without liner: 1-1/2 Inch thickness. 4. Unit housings that are not factory insulated: 1-1/2 Inch thickness.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Install insulation products according to manufacturer's written instructions, building codes, and recognized industry standards.
B. Do not insulate fiberglass ductwork or lined ductwork.
C. Clean ductwork to remove foreign substances and moisture prior to applying insulation.
D. Apply insulation to ductwork with all joints tightly fitted to eliminate voids
E. Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Coat all seams, breaks, tape patches and penetrations with vapor barrier coating.
F. Secure insulation to the underside of duct 24-inches or greater with mechanical fasteners or speed clips spaced 18-inches on center. Cut off protruding ends of fasteners after speed clips are installed and seal penetration of vapor barrier.
G. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar penetrations, except where fire-stopping materials are required.
H. Install corner angles on all external corners of insulation in exposed finished spaces before covering with jacketing.
I. Adhere flexible elastomeric sheets to ductwork by compression fit and full coverage of adhesive. Seal butt joints with same adhesive. Apply the same sheet thickness on standing metal duct seams as installed on the duct surface.
J. Jacket outdoor rigid insulation with Flexible Jacketing Membrane as specified. All longitudinal and circumferential seams must be overlapped a minimum of 3” (75mm). Ensure complete contact at the laps and to the substrate using a tape squeegee or roller applying firm pressure throughout. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines.
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.4 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, damaged during this construction period and within 3 ft of new connections.
B. Provide unit price to repair existing mechanical insulation on piping.
END OF SECTION 230700
MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 231123 - NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This Section includes Distribution Piping Systems for natural gas within the building and extending from the point of delivery to the connections with gas utilization devices. Piping materials and equipment specified in this section include: 1. Pipes, Fittings, and Specialties 2. Special Duty Valves
B. Gas pressures for systems specified in this section are limited to 5 psig.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
B. Gas Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building, which conveys gas from the point of delivery to the points of usage.
C. Gas Service Piping: The pipe from the gas main or other source of supply including the meter, regulating valve, or service valve to the gas distribution system of the building served.
D. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service regulator (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of natural gas systems products, of types, materials, sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization equipment or accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified is defined as experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has complied with the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.
C. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, "Welding and Brazing Qualification".
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components, gas piping
installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems. 2. Local Building Code.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with Local Gas Utility Company.
4. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with "International Mechanical Code".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1.
B. Welders' qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply with the quality requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Division 1.
B. Spare Parts: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed.
C. Test Reports specified in PART 3 below.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from drips in existing gas piping and handle cautiously to avoid spillage or ignition. Notify the gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by the installer with proper precautions, and do not leave on the premises from the end of one (1) working day to the beginning of the next.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Except in the case of an emergency, notify all affected users when the gas supply is to be turned off.
B. Work Interruptions: When interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are being made to an existing piping system, leave the system in safe condition.
C. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Above Grade Exposed Locations: 1. Pipe 2-Inches and Smaller: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Type E, Schedule 40 black steel pipe,
electric resistance welded. a. Fittings:
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; (Class 125 and 300). 2) Malleable Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.30, Class 150, 250 or 300;
selected by Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass).
3) Forged Steel Socket-Welded and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4-inch pipe size).
2. Pipe 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Type S, Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe. a. Fittings:
1) Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. a) Material Group: Group 1.1 b) End Connections: Butt-weld c) Facings: Raised-face
2) Forged Steel Socket-Welded and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4-inch pipe size).
3) Wrought Steel Butt-Welded Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.
B. Above Grade Concealed Locations: 1. Piping all sizes: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Type S, Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe.
a. Fittings: 1) Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolting and gasketing of the
following material group, end connection and facing, except as otherwise indicated. a) Material Group: Group 1.1 b) End Connections: Butt weld c) Facings: Raised-face
2) Wrought Steel Butt-Welded Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.
2.2 VALVES
A. Special Duty Valves are specified in this section by their generic name. Refer to PART 3, "VALVE APPLICATION", for specific uses and applications for valve specified.
B. Gas Cocks 2-Inch and Smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square head, threaded ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lunkenheimer, Nibco, Powell, Stockham.
C. Gas Cocks 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends. Acceptable Manufacturers: Lunkenheimer, Nibco, Powell, Stockham.
D. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous duty molded coil; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils; normally closed; UL and FM approved and labeled.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
E. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: Single-stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2-inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Precautions: Before turning off the gas to the premises, or section of piping, turn off all equipment valves. Perform a leakage test as specified in "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL" below, to determine that all equipment is turned off in the piping section to be affected.
B. Conform to the requirements in NFPA 54, for the prevention of accidental ignition.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
B. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Design locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing, flow direction, slope of pipe, expansion, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.
C. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in an airtight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless Black steel with welded joints. Vent conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap. 1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling spaces
(subject to the approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. Valves shall not be located in such spaces.
2. Piping In Partitions: Concealed piping shall not be located in solid partitions. Tubing shall not be run inside hollow walls or partitions unless protected against physical damage. This does not apply to tubing passing through walls or partitions.
3. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct, dumb waiter or elevator shaft. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above. Piping shall not be installed beneath slab on grade floors.
D. Install pipe sleeve and seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations.
E. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers.
F. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may collect, at the outlet of the gas meter, and in a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install drips where condensate is likely to freeze. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or
capped. Use a minimum of three (3) pipe diameters in length for the drip leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connected pipe.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
G. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
H. Install gas piping at a uniform grade upward to risers, and from the risers to the meter, or service regulator when meter is not provided, or the equipment.
I. Connect branch outlet pipes from the top of horizontal lines, not from the bottom or sides.
J. Refer to “Supports and Anchors” specification section.
3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements.
B. Shutoff Duty: Use gas cocks.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied.
B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two (2) gas pressure regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the second regulator.
C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to determine if the valve is free; so they can be tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate; and examined for leakage when in the closed position. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors.
D. Solenoid valves shall be mounted with the solenoid in the vertical upright position only. 1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26. Coordinate electrical
requirements and connections.
E. Valves shall be installed with unions or other means to facilitate removal or repair without disassembly of connecting piping.
3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Install gas cock upstream and within 6-feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls.
B. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of three (3) pipe diameters in length.
C. Flexible Hose Gas Connectors: U.L. Listed, for use connecting to vibrating equipment; corrugated Type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel braid.
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.6 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING
A. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff valves electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code".
B. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.
C. Conform to NFPA 70 - "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated control devices.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, and Local Utility requirements.
B. Test system before covering underground lines.
C. Submit written results of tests to Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION 231123
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS 231123 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Metal Ductwork is indicated on the drawings, schedules, and by requirements of this section.
Ductwork Construction Table
Service Type Pressure Class
Insulation Seal Class
Supply Air Spiral seam round galvanized steel suitable for painted finish
+1" Lined C
Return Air Galvanized steel, round or rectangular
-3" Lined B
General Building Exhaust Galvanized steel round or rectangular
-3" None B
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful installation experience on projects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project.
C. References to SMACNA, ASHRAE and NFPA are minimum requirements, the Contractor shall fabricate, construct, install, seal all ductwork as described in this specification and as shown on the drawings, in addition to these minimum standard references.
D. Codes and Standards: 1. SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible". 2. SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual". 3. ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook", Chapter 16, Duct Construction. 4. NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scale drawings of ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced. Refer also to specification for 3D coordination drawing requirement.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials and products. Include maintenance data and shop drawings in maintenance manual.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect ductwork and accessories from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside. Where necessary to store outside, enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rectangular Duct Liner:
a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Johns-Manville Products Corp. c. Knauf Fiberglass d. Manson e. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2. Flexible Ducts: a. Flexmaster b. Thermaflex c. Ominair d. JP Lamborn Co.
3. Spin-In Fittings: a. Flexmaster b. Thermaflex c. Ominair d. Hercules Industries
4. Factory-Fabricated Round Ductwork a. Semco Mfg., Inc. b. Hercules Industries c. United Sheet Metal Division, United McGill Corp. d. Sheet Metal Products Co. e. Spiral Pipe of Texas, Inc. f. AccuDuct
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
g. Metco, Inc. 5. Duct Sealants
a. Duct Mate Pro Seal b. Foster 32-19/32-17 c. Childers CP-146/CP-148
6. Adhesives: Comply with ASTM C916 Type II a. Foster 85-60 b. DuroDyne SSG c. McGill Air Seal Uni Grab d. Childers CP-127
2.2 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Exposed Ductwork: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide mill phosphatized finish that is free from visual imperfections, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, dents, discolorations, and other imperfections, including those that would impair painting.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials of types and sizes required to comply with ductwork system requirements.
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15-degree change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45-degree laterals and 45-degree elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90-degree branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.
C. Rectangular Duct Liner: ASTM C1071 fiberglass duct liner with UL approved 25/50 flame/ smoke development. Factory applied edge and air surface coating of acrylic treated with EPA registered ASTM G21 and G22 anti-microbial agent. 1. K Value: ASTM C 518, 0.25 at 75 degree F mean temperature. 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: ASTM C 423, 0.70 based on Type A Mounting. 3. Maximum Velocity: 5000 fpm. 4. Adhesive: Meeting ASTM C919. 5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins, welded or mechanically fastened. 6. Interior Ductwork: 1-Inch thick.
D. Round Duct Liner: 1-Inch thick rigid preformed round liner with air surface coated with acrylic coating treated with EPA registered ASTM G 21 and G22anti-microbial agent and UL approved 25/50 flame/smoke development. 1. K Value: ASTM C 518, 0.23 at 75 degree F mean temperature. 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: ASTM C 423, 0.70 based on Type A mounting. 3. Maximum Velocity: 5,000 fpm.
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
E. Duct Sealant: UL 181 Listed, Class 1, flame spread 0, fuel contributed 0, smoke developed 0, water-based sealant, non-toxic, non-combustible, and non-flammable. Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork. Sealant shall meet LEED IEQ 4.1 (meeting VOC tables published by SCAQMD #1168 Criteria for Low Emitting Materials. 1. Service temperature -20°F to 200°F. 2. Mold and Mildew resistant 3. VOC: Maximum 50g/l (less water and exempt solvents).
F. Adhesives: Water based; suitable for bonding fibrous duct wrap and duct liner insulation to galvanized duct work. Install evenly and secure with mechanical fasteners in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard for Metal and Flexible Duct. Adhesive shall meet LEED EQ 4.1 (SCAQMD Rule #1168 VOC tables) low emitting materials. LEED for Schools 2009 IEQ Credit 4.1 – Fiberglass adhesives shall meet California Dept. of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method Ver. 1.1, 2010 Small Scale Chamber Test for VOC’s for CA Specification 01350. 1. Non-Oxidizing 2. Meets FDA, USDA and EPA Standards 3. Meets Requirements of UL 723, ASTM E-84 NFPA 90A & 90B and ASTM C-916 Type
II.
G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork. 1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials. 2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
H. Flexible Ducts: Flexible air ducts shall be listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct Material and shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Minimum operating pressure rating shall be 6-inch w.c. through a temperature range of -20 degree to 150 degree F; maximum working velocity rating shall be 4,000 fpm. Contractor shall assume responsibility for supplying material approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. All insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed on an all metal, CPE, or aluminum
laminate inner core, fiberglass insulation with minimum R-Valve of 4.0 or greater and an outer jacket made exclusively of fire retardant reinforced material.
2. Non-insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed from dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral corrugated, or aluminum construction over a steel spring helix.
I. Spin-in Fittings: Provide spin-in fittings between flexible and round sheet metal duct takeoffs and air devices from main ducts. Spin-in fittings shall include bell mouth and butterfly type manual volume damper with bearings, regulator and locking device.
J. Rectangular-to-Round Taps: Where the round branch take-off will not permit a spin-in fitting, provide a rectangular to round tap. Include manual volume damper with locking devices.
K. All fasteners and hardware for stainless steel ductwork shall be made of stainless steel.
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" and ASHRAE "Systems and Equipment Handbook", Chapter 16, Duct Construction.
B. Elbows – Rectangular 1. For low pressure systems use 1.0 radius smooth elbows. (From focal point to centerline
of duct). 2. For medium pressure systems use 1.5 radius smooth elbows. (From focal point to
centerline of duct). 3. If radius elbows cannot fit, use mitered elbows with turning vanes.
C. Limit angular tapers to 30 degree for contracting tapers and 20 degree for expanding tapers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices that will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8-inch misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type that will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent buckling, popping or compressing. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as required to avoid delays in work.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs vertically and horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by drawings, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2-inch where furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1-inch clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four (4) sides by at least 1-1/2 inch. Fasten to duct only.
F. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
G. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
H. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts that are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering that will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to be completed.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER
A. Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of adhesive.
C. Mechanical fasteners should be of length sufficient to limit compression of liner.
D. All exposed edges of the liner must be factory or field coated.
E. Repair liner surface penetrations with adhesive.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Do not exceed 6'-0" for any flexible duct run.
B. Install in accordance with Chapter 3 of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted, clean and prepare surface for painting.
B. Balancing: Seal any leaks in ductwork that become apparent in balancing process.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTWORK 233113 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 233300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Types of Ductwork Accessories required for project include the following: 1. Manual Volume Dampers 2. Turning Vanes 3. Duct Hardware 4. Duct Access Doors 5. Flexible Connections
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
C. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers" and UL Standard 555S "Motor-Driven Fire/Smoke Dampers".
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.
E. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide" for the installation of fire, smoke, and fire/smoke dampers.
F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet the latest local building code requirements.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components. Include details of construction equipment and accessories being provided.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Submittals for all damper types specified in this section shall include a schedule for each damper indicating net free area, actual face velocity and pressure drop (at sea level) based on net free area and the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the damper. Submittals without this information will be rejected.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dampers:
a. American Warming and Ventilating b. Air Balance, Inc. c. Arrow Louver & Damper; Division of Arrow United Industries, Inc. d. Louvers & Dampers, Inc. e. Penn Ventilator Co. f. Dowco Corp. g. Air Stream h. Cesco-Advanced Air i. Ruskin j. Vent Products Inc. k. Greenheck l. Pottorff
2. Turning Vanes: a. Aero Dyne Co. b. Airsan Corp. c. Barb-Aire d. Duro Dyne Corp. e. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs. Koppers Co., Inc. f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co. g. Hercules
3. Duct Hardware: a. Ventfabrics, Inc. b. Young Regulator Co.
4. Duct Access Doors: a. Flexmaster (Inspector Series) b. Cesco-Advanced Air c. Duro Dyne Corp. d. Ventfabrics, Inc.
5. Flexible Connections: a. Duro Dyne Corp.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
b. Ventfabrics, Inc. c. General Rubber Corp. (Process and Exhaust Only)
2.2 DAMPERS
A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (Less than 2,000 FPM and Under 4-Inch W.C. S.P. Differential): 1. For 12-inch in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to ducts.
16 Gauge galvanized steel frame and blades with carbon steel shaft mounted with stainless steel oil impregnated bronze bearings, stainless steel aluminum jamb seals and silicone dual durometer vinyl blade edge seals. Linkage shall be in-jamb fixed type located outside the airstream made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates, with stainless steel pivots. on-blade fixed type located within the airstream made of galvanized steel interconnect with plated steel brackets and pivots. Maximum damper panel width is 48-inch. Provide jack shafting when duct size required is greater than 48-inch wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper position, locking quadrant to fix damper position and handle. For flat oval and round ductwork, provide Type C housing.
2. For ducts less than 12-inch in height, use 16 gauge frame and 20 gauge blade galvanized steel, steel axle with nylon bearings, locking quadrant handle and notched shaft end indicating damper position.
B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (Less than 1,500 FPM and Under 1-Inch W.C. S.P. Differential): 1. For Dampers 4-inch diameter through 18-inch diameter use 18 gauge galvanized steel
frame and the following blade construction:
4-Inch thru 12-inch diameter 22 gauge galvanized steel 13-Inch thru 18-inch diameter 20 gauge galvanized steel
2. Carbon steel axle shaft with retainers mounted on stainless steel bearings with notched end shaft indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle.
2.3 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 22 gauge, single blade 4-1/2 inch radius, 3-1/4 inch spacing turning vanes and Type 2, 4-1/2 inch wide runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" Fig 2.3.
B. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes.
2.4 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following: 1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated, duct
test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each manual volume damper, quadrant lock device on one
(1) end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12-inch. Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. General: Provide access doors, whether shown or not, at all fire dampers, smoke dampers, temperature control dampers, branch balancing dampers, outside air plenums, inlet of fans, upstream of all duct smoke detectors and all other equipment requiring service and/or access.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. All access doors shall have gasket and will be air-tight. Provide one (1) side hinged, other side with one (1) handle-type latch for doors 12-inch high and smaller, two (2) handle-type latches for larger doors. For spiral ductwork, use United McGill combination access section type ARF-SD for non-insulated duct systems and type ARF-ID double wall insulated door for insulated ducted systems (all supply ductwork).
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make air-tight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life shall be verified to not exceed six (6) months. Any sign of cracking on interior or exterior shall be cause for replacement immediately.
B. Use the following product types for each application accordingly: 1. Indoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with
DuPont's NEOPRENE, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 ounce per square yard, capable of operating at –10 degree F to 200 degree F, waterproof, air tight, 6-inches wide, complies with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. "Ventglas" Model as manufactured by VentFabric, Inc.
2. Outdoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems (Exposed to Weather and Sun): Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with DuPont's HYPALON, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating with superb resistance to sunlight, ozone and weather which has documented 20-year-old exposure tests. Fabric shall be 26 ounce per square yard, capable of operating at –10 degree F to 250 degree F, waterproof, air tight, 6-inches wide, complies with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. "Ventlon" Model as manufactured by VentFabrics, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to the Engineer.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in supply, return and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.
E. Provide duct access doors whether shown or not for inspection and cleaning before and after all filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers (minimum 16-inch x 24-inch in ducts larger than 18-inch), fire/smoke dampers, upstream of duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide adequate reach to equipment.
F. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
G. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing.
H. Provide balancing dampers on high pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter dampers only where indicated on Drawings.
I. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided.
J. Where fire and smoke dampers are installed in fire and smoke rated construction, provide firestopping between fire and fire smoke damper sleeve and substrate.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
B. Test every fire and fire/smoke damper for proper operation, provide letter to the Architect/ Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning properly.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification".
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing".
D. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one (1) link for every ten (10) installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt.
END OF SECTION 233300
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 233413 - AIR HANDLING FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Handling Equipment Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. This Section includes the following types of Air-Handling Equipment: 1. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control; control system; sequence of operation; testing, adjusting and balancing.
D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connections at air handling units.
E. Refer to Division 23 section "Mechanical/Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment".
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. Fans Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed.
3. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 805 "Power Ventilators".
4. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA Standards.
5. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data". Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating". Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term "NRTL" shall be defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
7. Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for air handling equipment including specifications, capacity ratings, sound data, dimensions, weights, materials, operating and service/access clearance accessories furnished, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to air-handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one (1) additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators:
a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. b. Bridert Co. c. Broan Mfg. Co., Inc. d. Carnes Company, Inc. e. Loren Cook Co. f. Greenheck g. Jenn Co Fan. h. Penn Barry.
2.2 FANS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. 1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than 70
percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation. 1. Service Factor: 1.4.
D. Belts: Oil-resistant, non-sparking, and non-static.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 15 HP; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide premium energy efficient motor. 1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan
cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" AFBMA L10 of 100,000 hrs calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required: 1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly. 2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
H. Vibration: Provide vibration isolators as scheduled and specified in other Division 23 sections.
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.3 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. General Description: Centrifugal fan designed for installation in ceiling, wall, or concealed inline applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Stainless steel, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.
F. Remote Fan Speed Control: Solid state, capable of controlling fan speed from full speed to approximately half speed.
G. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack, wall cap, and transition fittings as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of fans.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support units using vibration control devices as indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls". 1. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel
rods and vibration isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct connections on inlet and outlet duct connections with flexible connections.
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal
and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with centrifugal fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to Centrifugal Fan Installer.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23. 3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
B. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following: 1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork and
electrical connections. 2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.
3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Start-up, test and adjust air handling equipment in presence of manufacturer's authorized representative.
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.6 PRE-STARTUP CHECK
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up: 1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting Procedures for Fans: 1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust
fan to indicated RPM. 2. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions. 3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following: 1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing,
preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts. 2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements".
B. Schedule training with at least seven (7) days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION 233413
AIR HANDLING FANS 233413 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 233713 - AIR OUTLETS & INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Air Outlets and Inlets Work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Air Outlets and Inlets required for project include the following: 1. Diffusers 2. Registers and Grilles
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork, duct accessories; testing and balancing; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650
"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE
70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets". 3. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under
requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal. 5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA 500L-99
"Laboratory Method of Testing Louvers for Rating". 6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal. 7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A
"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following: 1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location, number
furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished. 2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:
a. Anemostat Products Division; Dynamics Corp. of America b. Carnes Co.; Division of Wehr Corp. c. Krueger; Division of Philips Industries, Inc. d. Titus Products Division; Philips Industries, Inc. e. Metal-Aire f. Nailor Industries, Inc. g. E.H. Price.
2.2 AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Surface (Wall or Ceiling) compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into surface with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of systems which will contain each type of air diffuser.
D. Types: Provide diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on Air Device Schedule.
2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible with adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each type of wall register and grille.
D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as listed on air device schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.3 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, three (3) operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.
END OF SECTION 233713
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS 233713 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 237414 - ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Packaged Rooftop Heating and Cooling Units Work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for metal ductwork, air devices, automatic temperature controls not factory-installed, and required for conjunction with packaged heating and cooling units; not work of this section.
C. Electrical Work: Refer to Division 23 section "Electrical Provisions of Mechanical Work" for requirements.
1.3 REFRIGERANTS
A. All refrigerants used for each condensing unit shall be on the latest EPA list of approved refrigerants and environmentally friendly.
B. No CFC or HCFC based refrigerants shall be used.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated, dimensions, required clearances, sound power characteristics , weights, furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings detailing the manufacturer's electrical requirements for power
supply wiring for rooftop heating and cooling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
2. Submit shop drawings detailing the mounting, securing, and flashing of the roof curb to the roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in accordance with requirements of Division 1. Markup Drawing Schedule for installed equipment data.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For split-system air-conditioning units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each rooftop heating and cooling unit, control, and accessory, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data in operation and maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of rooftop heating and cooling units, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. Gas-fired furnace section construction shall be in accordance with CSA Safety Standards.
Furnace section shall bear the CSA label. 2. Testing and rating of rooftop units of 135,000 BTU/Hr capacity or over shall be
in accordance with ARI 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment".
3. Testing and rating of rooftop units under 135,000 BTU/Hr capacity shall be in accordance with ARI 210 "Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment", and provide Certified Rating Seal. Sound testing and rating of units shall be in accordance with ARI 270 "Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment". Units shall bear Certified Rating Seal.
4. Refrigerating system construction of rooftop units shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
5. Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of rooftop units shall be equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".
6. Provide rooftop units which are UL listed and labeled. 7. Rooftop units shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL
requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle units and components carefully to prevent damage. Replace damaged rooftop units or components with new.
B. Store units and components in clean dry place, off the ground, and protect from weather, water, and physical damage.
C. Rig units to comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading units, and moving them to final location.
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.7 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING
A. Coordinate installation of roof mounting curb with roof structure.
B. Coordinate roof opening locations and for mechanical and electrical connections.
1.8 SPECIAL WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and reinstallation. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of substantial completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each rooftop heating and cooling unit: 1. One (1) set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan. 2. One (1) set of filters for each unit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rooftop Units:
a. Aaon b. Carrier Air Conditioning; Division of Carrier Corp. c. Lennox Industries, Inc. d. Daikin/McQuay Air Conditioning Group; Daikin Inc. e. Trane (The) Co; Division of American Standard Inc. f. Johnson/York; Division of York International
2.2 ROOFTOP UNITS LESS THAN 20 TONS
A. General Description: Units shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab installation, and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, condenser coil guards and dampers. Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Casing: Manufacturer's standard casing construction, having corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels or access doors for inspection and access
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
to internal parts, a minimum of 1/2-inch thick thermal insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections and an exterior condensate drain connection and lifting lugs.
C. Roof Curbs: Manufacturer's standard construction, insulated and having corrosive protective coating, complete with factory-installed wood nailer and drain nipple. Construction shall be in accordance with NRCA Standards.
D. Evaporator Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves or direct-driven fans; and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
E. Condenser Fans: Propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
F. Coils shall be constructed with a minimum of two rows.
G. Coils: 1. General: Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars
drawn, belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes. No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end connections accessible for service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the roof or through the piping enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.
2. Refrigerant Cooling Coils: Have an equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure each coil circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be proof (450 psig) and leak (300 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed with a holding charge of nitrogen.
H. Compressors: Serviceable, semi-hermetic, or fully hermetic compressors, complete with integral vibration isolators and crankcase heaters.
I. Safety Controls: Manual reset type for: 1. Low pressure cutout; 2. High pressure cutout; 3. Compressor motor overload protection.
J. Provide water detection device (safe-t-switch or similar) in the drain pan to shut unit down if primary drain becomes blocked.
K. Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard construction for gas-fired heat exchangers and burners. 1. Controls:
a. Redundant gas valve; b. Intermittent pilot ignition; c. Electronic spark ignition system; d. High limit cutout; e. Forced draft proving switch.
L. Economizer Control: Return and outside air dampers, outside air filter, fully modulating electric control system with enthalpy control, and adjustable mixed-air thermostat. System shall have 100 percent outside air intake and relief capability. Provide automatic changeover through adjustable enthalpy control device.
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 4
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
M. Air Filtration Section: 1. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
a. Comply with NFPA 90A. b. Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV-A [MERV]
according to ASHRAE 52.2. c. Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors
on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.
2. Disposable Panel Filters: a. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. b. Thickness: 1 inch. c. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. d. Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side,
and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.
N. Accessories: Units shall include the following accessories as indicated or scheduled: 1. Anti-Recycling Control: Furnish anti-recycling control to automatically prevent
compressor restart for five (5) minutes after shutdown. 2. Thermostat: Assembly shall provide for staged heating and cooling with manual
or automatic changeover on standard sub-base.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Support: Install and secure roof curb to roof structure, in accordance with National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations and shop drawings. Install and secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing.
C. Electrical Connections: Refer to Division 26 for final connections to equipment and installation of loose shipped electrical components.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Start-Up Services: 1. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up rooftop
units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 5
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Operating and Maintenance Training: 1. Provide services of manufacturer's service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in
operation and maintenance of rooftop units. Training shall include start-up and shutdown, servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and troubleshooting procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance. Review operating and maintenance data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1.
2. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least seven (7) day prior notice to the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION 237414
ROOFTOP HEATING & COOLING UNITS 237414 - 6
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 238200 - TERMINAL HEAT UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of Terminal Unit Work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of Terminal Units required for project include the following: 1. Electric Cabinet Heaters
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing of terminal units; not work of this section.
D. Refer to Division 1 section for the following work; not work of this section. 1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units. 2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with
requirements of Division 26 sections: a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and terminal
unit control panels. 1) Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature
Controls is work of that section.
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed, required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this section.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. Codes and Standards: 1. I=B=R Compliance: Test and rate baseboard and finned tube radiation in accordance
with I=B=R, provide published ratings bearing emblem of I=B=R. 2. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI Standard 410 "Forced-
Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils". 3. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33 "Methods
of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils". 4. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan-coil units in accordance with ARI Standard 440
"Room Fan-Coil Air Conditioners". 5. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan-coil units in compliance with UL 883 "Safety
Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units". 6. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components for terminal units which have been listed
and labeled by UL.
TERMINAL HEAT UNITS 238200 - 1
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
7. ARI Compliance: Test and rate ventilators in accordance with ARI Standard 330 "Unit Ventilators".
8. Electric Heating Equipment: All equipment with a heating coil capacity exceeding a 48 amp rating shall have the heating elements subdivided and protected by an overcurrent protection device rated at not more than 60 amps. Equipment not exceeding 48 amps shall also have overcurrent protection. Overcurrent protection devices shall be factory wired and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. All equipment shall be factory assembled and wired in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association and shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, for terminal units showing dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials, and installation-startup instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating terminal unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection details and methods of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions, filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new.
B. Store terminal units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal units, and moving them to final location.
TERMINAL HEAT UNITS 238200 - 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Electric Cabinet Heaters:
a. Airtherm b. Q Mark c. Trane (The) Co. d. Berko e. Markel f. Singer
2.2 ELECTRIC CABINET HEATERS
A. General: Provide electric cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation.
B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged.
C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.
D. Cabinet: 16 Gauge removable front panel, 8 gauge top and side panels. Insulate front panel over entire coil section. Provide access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with standard factory color selected baked enamel finish.
E. Electric Element: Electric resistance element with manual-reset thermal overload protection, unit mounted thermostat.
F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of non-corrosive, molded, fiberglass-reinforced thermoplastic material. Construct fan scrolls of galvanized steel.
G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over-load protection, and motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit.
H. Filters: Provide 1-inch thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.
I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled. 1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect screen. 2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18 gauge steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into wall
or ceiling. 3. Sub-Bases: Provide 18 gauge steel sub-base for vertical units, height as indicated.
TERMINAL HEAT UNITS 238200 - 3
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal
and installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.
C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.
3.4 START-UP
A. Start-up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's published start-up instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable.
END OF SECTION 238200
TERMINAL HEAT UNITS 238200 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Description: Work shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies, and materials, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of complete electrical systems as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The Work shall also include the completion of those details of electrical work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of all electrical systems.
B. Certain labor, materials, and equipment may be furnished under other Sections of these specifications, by Utility Companies or by the Owner. When this is the case, the extent, source and description of these items will be as indicated on the drawings or as described in the specifications.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 26 Sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. Latest editions of the following: 1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 2. ANSI/IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. 3. NECA - Standard of Installation. 4. Other references as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. "Furnish" or "Provide": To supply, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular operation of particular work unless specifically otherwise noted.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. "Install": To erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
C. "Supply": To purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related accessories.
D. "Work": Labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories, and other items required for proper and complete installation.
E. "Wiring": Raceway, fittings, wire, boxes and related items.
F. "Concealed": Embedded in masonry, concrete or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces, or in enclosures.
G. "Exposed": Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
H. "Indicated," "Shown" or "Noted": As indicated, shown or noted on drawings or specifications.
I. "Similar" or "Equal": Equal in materials, weight, size, design, construction, capacity, performance, and efficiency of specified product.
J. "Reviewed," "Satisfactory," "Accepted," or "Directed": As reviewed, satisfactory, accepted, or directed by or to Engineer.
K. "Related Work" includes, but is not necessarily limited to, mentioned work associated with, or affected by, the work specified.
L. Refer to Article 100 of the currently adopted National Electrical Code for other definitions as applicable to this project.
1.6 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1 where applicable.
1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of circuits and outlets, locations of switches, panelboards and other work. Information shown on the drawings is schematic, however, recircuiting will not be permitted without specific acceptance. Drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as planning can determine, but accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, locations, levels, etc., to suit field conditions is directed. Review all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and Specifications; adjust all work to conform to all conditions shown therein. The Architectural drawings shall take precedence over all other drawings.
B. Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the job and ascertain all conditions affecting the proposed installation and adjust all work accordingly. Make provisions for these costs.
C. Discrepancies between different plans, between plans and specifications, between specifications, or regulations and codes governing this installation shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing before the date of bid opening. In the event such
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
discrepancies exist, and the Engineer is not so notified, the adjudication of responsibility shall be solely at the discretion of the Engineer.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Prior to fabrication or installation of any electrical work, participate in detailed coordination planning meetings with all other building utilities system trades, under the direction of the General Contractor, so as to completely establish routings, elevations, space requirements, and coordination of access, layout, and suspension requirements in relationship to the building structure and the work of all other trades.
1.9 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Division 1)
A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with provisions of Division 1.
B. Prior to submission, shop drawings, material lists and catalog cuts or manufacturer's printed data shall be thoroughly checked for compliance with contract requirements, compatibility with equipment being furnished by the Contractor or Owner, accuracy of dimensions, coordination with work of other trades, and conformance with sound and safe practice as to erection of installation. Each submittal shall bear Contractor's signed statement evidencing such checking.
C. Clearly mark each shop drawing as follows for purposes of identification: 1. Shop Drawing 2. Equipment Identification Used on Contract Drawings 3. Date 4. Name of Project 5. Branch of Work 6. Engineer's Name 7. Contractor's Name
D. Clearly mark printed material, catalog cuts, pamphlets or specification sheets, and shop drawings with the same designation shown on the contract document schedules. Identify specific item proposed, showing catalog number, recess openings, dimensions, capacities, electrical characteristics, etc. Submittals which are incomplete will be returned to the Contractor without review.
E. Contractor agrees that submittals processed by the Engineer are not change orders; that the purpose of submittals is to demonstrate to the Engineer that the Contractor understands the design concept; and that the Contractor demonstrates this understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions (which he shall confirm and correlate at the job site), fabrication processes and techniques of construction, and coordination of his work with that of other trades. The Contractor shall check and verify all measurements and review shop drawings before submitting them. If any deviations from the specified requirements for any item of material or equipment exist, such deviation shall be expressly stated in writing and incorporated with the submittal.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
G. Maintain one copy of shop drawings at the project field office until completion of the project, and make this copy available, upon request, to representatives of the Engineer and Owner.
H. No equipment or materials shall be installed or stored at the jobsite until submittals for such equipment or materials have been given review action permitting their use.
I. Shop drawings and manufacturer's published data shall be submitted for: 1. All panelboards 2. Luminaires (catalog cuts) 3. Fire alarm system
1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain a contract set of electrical drawings at the site. Neatly mark all changes, discoveries and deviations from the original drawings. Use a color which contrasts with the prints. This shall be a separate set of drawings, not used for construction purposes, and shall be kept up to date as the job progresses and shall be made available for inspection by the Engineer at all times. Upon completion of the contract, this set of record drawings shall be delivered to the Engineer. Record documents to be provided by the Contractor shall clearly and accurately show the following: 1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of
control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.
2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.
3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.
1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to those editions of the following as currently adopted by the local code enforcement authority: 1. ANSI/NFPA 70. 2. ANSI/IEEE C2. 3. Denver Building Code, and applicable requirements of the Fire Prevention Bureau. 4. Comply with requirements of the utility and telephone companies furnishing service to
this installation. 5. Other requirements as listed elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Obtain electrical permits, plan review, and inspections from authority having jurisdiction in accordance with Division 1.
C. The drawings and specifications take precedence when they are more stringent than codes, statutes, or ordinances in effect. Applicable codes, ordinances, standards and statutes take precedence when they are more stringent than, or conflict with the drawings and specifications.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended, except where more stringent requirements are indicated by the Contract Documents.
B. Compatibility with Available Space: Equipment layouts shown are based on use of equipment as specified. If the Contractor chooses equipment available from any other manufacturer listed as an acceptable manufacturer, or offers equipment under the provision for substitutions, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for first ascertaining that the offered equipment can be installed in the space available with ample clearances for maintenance. Include coordination drawings, as specified herein, when required.
C. All equipment and materials installed shall be new, unless otherwise specified.
D. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced or repaired, prior to final acceptance, in a manner acceptable to the Engineer or Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. All electrical materials shall be acceptable for installation only if labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory and if accepted by local authorities.
F. All major equipment components shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number permanently attached in a conspicuous location.
2.2 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
C. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.
2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers without a Provision for Substitutions: Products of named manufacturers meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions allowed.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.4 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 30 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement, submit complete list of major products required for submittal under these specifications, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
2.5 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Refer to Division 1.
2.6 GUARANTEE
A. The entire electrical system installed under this Contract shall be left in proper working order. Replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, any work, materials, or equipment which evidences defects in design, construction, or workmanship within two years, or as specifically noted elsewhere in these specifications, from date of final acceptance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
A. Install work using procedures defined in NECA Standard of Installation.
B. Workmanship shall conform to highest industry standards for each trade involved in erection of the work.
C. Contractor's personnel and subcontractors selected to perform the work shall be well versed and skilled in the trades involved.
D. Any changes or deviations from the drawings and specifications must be accepted in writing by the Engineer. All errors in installation shall be corrected at the expense of the Contractor. All specialties shall be installed as detailed on the drawings. Where details or specific installation requirements are not provided, manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed.
E. Upon completion of work, all equipment and materials shall be installed complete, thoroughly checked, correctly adjusted, and left ready for intended use or operation. All work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all residue shall be removed from surfaces. Exterior surfaces of all material and equipment shall be delivered in a perfect, unblemished condition.
F. Contractor shall provide a complete installation, including all required labor, material, cartage, insurance, permits, and taxes.
3.2 CHASES, OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Carefully lay out all work in advance so as to eliminate where possible, cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings and roofs. Any damage to the building, structure, piping, ducts, equipment or any defaced finish shall be repaired by skilled mechanics
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Any necessary cutting, channeling, drilling or welding as required for the proper support, concealment, installation or anchoring of raceways, outlets, or other electrical equipment shall be performed in a careful manner, and as approved by the Engineer.
B. All openings made in fire-rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be patched and made tight in a manner to conform to the fire rating for the surface penetrated.
C. All penetrations required through completed concrete construction shall be core drilled at minimum size required. Precautions shall be taken when drilling to prevent damage to structural concrete. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Engineer before proceeding with drilling.
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. If equipment of a different size is furnished by the Contractor, the Contractor shall furnish and install the proper motor starter, fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch, wire and conduit required for the equipment furnished, at no additional cost to the Owner and shall be approved by the Owner.
3.4 PROGRESS OF WORK
A. Order the progress of electrical work to conform to the progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as the condition of the building will permit. Any cost resulting from defective or ill-timed work performed under this Section shall be borne by this Contractor.
3.5 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform all trenching and backfilling required by work performed under this Section in accordance with the excavating and grading specifications and as herein specified.
B. Excavate trenches to the depth required for the utilities involved. The trench bottom shall be graded true and free from stones or soft spots, bottom of trenches must be compacted.
C. After installation of electrical work, backfill, tamp, and compact to insure against the possibility of differential settling, in conformity with Division 2 Specifications. Verify location of existing or new utilities and, if damaged by this Contractor, replace or repair.
3.6 ELECTRICAL COMPLETION
A. Indoctrination of Operating and Maintenance Personnel: Furnish the services of a qualified representative of the supplier of each item or system itemized below who shall instruct specific personnel, as designated by the Owner, in the operation and maintenance of that item or system. 1. Instruction shall be given when the particular system is complete, and shall be of the
number of hours indicated and at the time requested by the Owner. A representative of the Contractor shall be present for all demonstrations.
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
System Hours Of Instruction Fire Alarm System 4 (1 4-hour sessions) Electrical Distribution Equipment (under 600 volts) 4 (1 4-hour sessions)
B. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists: Deliver three (3) complete operating & maintenance manuals and parts lists to the Owner at the time of the above required indoctrination. Fully explain the contents of the manuals as part of required indoctrination and instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct procedure in obtaining service, both during and after the guarantee period. 1. The operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists shall give complete information as
to whom the Owner shall contact for service and parts. Include address and phone number. Furnish evidence that an authorized service organization regularly carries a complete stock of repair parts for these items (or systems), and that the organization is available for service. Service shall be furnished within 24 hours after requested.
C. Operating and Acceptance Tests: Provide all labor, instruments, and equipment for the performance of tests as specified below and elsewhere in these specifications. Submit three copies of a typewritten test report to the Engineer for his approval. 1. For a seven-day period after building has been placed into normal service, record the full
load current in each phase or line at the main service entrance and submit to the Engineer. 2. Perform a careful inspection of the main switchboard bus structure and cable connections
to verify that all connections are torqued to manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Clean-Up: Remove all materials, scrap, etc., relative to the electrical installation, and leave the premises and all equipment, lamps, luminaires, etc. in a clean, orderly condition. Any costs to the Owner for clean-up of the site will be charged against the Contractor.
E. Acceptance Demonstration: Upon completion of the work, at a time to be designated by the Engineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate for the Owner the operation of the entire installation, including all systems provided under this contract.
F. Final acceptance by the Owner will not occur until all operating instructions are received and Owner's personnel have been thoroughly indoctrinated in the maintenance and operation of all equipment.
END OF SECTION 260500
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260500 - 8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260510 – ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical remodeling.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1: Alteration project procedures.
B. Division 1: Minor demolition for remodeling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment for Patching and Extending Work: As specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field verify measurements and circuiting arrangements.
B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. Maintain electrical continuity to remaining wiring and equipment.
C. Removal Drawings are based on casual field observation and/or existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall field check all existing conditions prior to bidding and shall include in his bid an allowance for the removal and relocation of existing conduits, wires, devices, luminaires, or other equipment as indicated on the plans or as required to coordinate and adapt new and existing electrical systems to all other work required on this project.
E. Beginning of removal means installer accepts existing conditions.
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations.
D. Existing Electrical Service, Fire Alarm System and Telephone System: Maintain existing systems in service until new systems are accepted or as otherwise indicated. Disable systems only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least 36 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.
3.3 REMOVAL AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Remove and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Divisions 1 and 2, and this Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.
D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed.
F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
G. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed.
H. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaries. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories.
I. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. Provide modifications to assure that circuits or systems wiring shall not pass through outlet or junction boxes which may be rendered inaccessible by changes made to the building.
J. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate.
K. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified.
L. Where the reuse of existing conduits, outlets, junction boxes, etc. is permissible, make certain that the wiring for them is continuous from outlet to outlet.
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
M. Connect new work to existing work in a manner that will assure proper raceway grounding throughout in conformance with the National Electrical Code.
N. Existing conduits, wire, devices, luminaires, etc. which shall be removed shall become the property of the Contractor unless otherwise noted.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, channeling, chasing, drilling, etc. as required to install or remove electrical equipment in areas of remodeling. This work shall be performed so as to minimize damage to portions of wall finishes, surfaces, plastering, or the structures which are to be reused, resurfaced, plastered, or painted under another division of these specifications.
B. Carefully coordinate with the required remodeling work, cutting and patching, etc. performed by other trades. Remove or relocate existing electrical conduits, wires, devices, luminaires, and other equipment as necessary.
END OF SECTION 260510
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
ELECTRICAL REMODELING PROVISIONS 260510 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260519 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Building Wire and Cable.
B. Metal Clad Cable.
C. Wiring Connections and Terminations
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 260532 - Conduit
B. Section 260534 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
C. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices and Seals
D. Section 260553- Electrical Identification
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. NEMA WC 70 – Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
C. NEMA WC 70 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under the provisions of Section 260500.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Conductor sizes are based on copper.
C. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is appropriate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions.
D. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Determine required separation between wiring and other work.
C. Determine routing to avoid interference with other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Thermoplastic-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 70.
B. Rubber-Insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 70.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Copper, 600 volt, insulation, THHN/THWN, or XHHW. Conductors #10 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Conductors smaller than #10 shall be solid.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THHN/THWN, or XHHW.
2.2 METAL CLAD CABLE
A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type MC.
B. Conductor: Copper.
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C.
E. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic and thermosetting.
F. Armor Material: Steel or Aluminum.
G. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape.
H. Jacket: PVC jacket when installed in damp and wet locations.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
I. Cable to be provided with a separate equipment grounding conductor sized per NEC.
2.3 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A. Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket.
B. Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed.
C. Plenum Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket; UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.
D. Install all remote control and signal cables in cable tray, raceways, or supported every 4'-0" on bridal rings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than No. 16 AWG for control wiring.
B. Use No. 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.
C. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
D. Splice only in accessible junction or outlet boxes.
E. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. Make temporary connections to panelboard devices with sufficient slack conductor to facilitate reconnections required for balancing loads between phases.
F. Damaged conductors during installation shall be replaced.
G. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger wires.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. When approved install in interior partitions only and for flexible connection to luminaires. (Flexible connection not to exceed 6'-0".)
B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
C. Cable shall not be installed below windows in exterior walls.
D. Cable shall not be used for branch circuit homeruns. Branch circuit homeruns shall be building wire in raceway.
E. Run concealed cable parallel and perpendicular to building elements at right angles. Parallel cable runs shall be run together. Run high and tight to structure. Coordinate cable runs with other trades.
F. Support cable every four feet and within 12 inches of every outlet box, junction box, cabinet, or fitting.
G. Cable shall not be used in emergency circuits.
H. Cable shall not be used as flexible connection to motors, transformers or other vibrating equipment.
I. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
J. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
3.4 WIRING CONNECTION AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice only in accessible junction boxes.
B. For No. 8 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps.
C. Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, No. 6 AWG and larger. Tape un-insulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor.
D. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
E. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible temperature rise.
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
F. Terminate up to #10 AWG spare conductors with wire nuts. Use electrical tape for spare conductor #8 AWG and larger.
G. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated, aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor.
H. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors.
I. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.
J. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Division 1.
B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommended values.
D. Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Verify proper phasing connections.
3.6 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways or cable as approved herein. 1. If specified, cables may be used for luminaire connections and in interior partitions for
branch circuits.
B. Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceways or cable as approved herein.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceways.
F. Underground Locations: Building wire in raceways.
3.7 WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODING
A. Wires No. 6 AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire No. 4 AWG and larger shall be color-coded with color tape 6-inch length of exposed ends, and at every accessible junction box on the branch circuit or feeder.
120/208 Volts
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
A = Black B = Red C = Blue Neutral = White Ground = Green
B. Maintain the color coding throughout the system from panel to the last device on the branch circuit.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prior to energizing, all feeders from transformers, switchboards, and building service cables, are to be tested with a 500-volt insulation megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled. All field test data is to be recorded and submitted. Test is to include meggering for one minute between conductors and between each conductor and ground. Cables are to be meggered after installation with cables disconnected at both ends. The values must be not less than as follows:
Conductor Size (AWG or MCM)
Resistance Megohms 1000 ft.)
#16 AWG to #8 AWG 200 #6 AWG to #2/0 AWG 100 #3/0 AWG to 500 KCMIL 50
END OF SECTION 260519
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLES 260519 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Power System Grounding
B. Communication System Grounding
C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
B. NFPA Compliance: NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code (NEC).
C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment," and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment," pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, require compliance with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors". Grounding and bonding products which are to be UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage.
D. IEEE Compliance: Applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic cold water service, building steel and to supplementary grounding electrodes, as indicated on drawings.
B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest metallic cold water pipe 2-inch diameter or larger, building steel and where present to the referenced ground bar as shown on drawings.
C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to nearest referenced ground bar as shown on drawings.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Indicate layout of ground ring, location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductors.
C. Submit all field test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ground Rods: Copper or copper-clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter, minimum length 10 feet.
B. Mechanical Grounding Connectors: For all grounding connections above grade. 1. Manufacturer: Burndy Electrical 2. Material: Copper. 3. Compression Type: Irreversible. 4. UL listed under Standard UL467.
C. Wire: 1. Material: Copper. 2. Size: As indicated on the drawings. When size is not indicated, size per Article 250 of
NEC requirements.
D. Grounding Connection Accessories: 1. Electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding
straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type service required.
2.2 Field Welding: Exothermic welded connections are required where grounding conductors connect to underground grounding conductors and to underground grounding electrodes, and for bonding to steel. All underground connection shall be exothermic welded.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each ground conductor to the bushing and ground lug.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.
C. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use grounding mats, or driven ground rods, where indicated. Install ground rods in suitable recessed well; fill with gravel after connection is made.
D. Use minimum No. 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10-feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet.
E. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, connections are to be tightened to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.
F. Provide code-sized ground cable bonding jumpers, installed with ground clamps, across all conduit expansion couplings and fittings.
G. Route grounding connections, conductors to ground, and grounding conductors to protective devices in the shortest and straightest paths possible to minimize transient voltage rises.
H. Provide a corrosion-resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic bonding products, and where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, where subject to corrosive action.
I. All continuous runs of cable tray and all isolated sections of cable tray shall be grounded at intervals not to exceed 20 feet.
J. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits.
K. Provide an equipment grounding conductor in all flexible metallic conduits.
L. Grounding conductor in feeders and branch circuits extend ground conductor to switches, receptacle, equipment enclosures, equipment, and panels etc. and ground as required.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, the ground resistance shall be tested with an earth ground resistance tester in accordance with IEEE 81, "Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System". Where tests show resistance-to-ground is over values in Table 1 below, Contractor shall take appropriate action to reduce resistance to the values in Table 1, by driving additional ground rods; and then retest to demonstrate compliance. All results shall be recorded and submitted.
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
Table 1 Earth Ground Resistance to Equipment Equipment (Ohms) Pad Mount Transformer 5 Secondary Neutrals and Other Ground 10
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526- 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260529- SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Fastening hardware.
C. Wall and floor seals.
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 3 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Concrete equipment pads.
B. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with Division 3.
C. Refer to Section 260500 for coordination requirements.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry.
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel for non-corrosive environment.
B. Hardware: Corrosion-resistant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts, or beam clamps. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps; however, caddy fasteners are accepted.
B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.
C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D. Do not drill structural steel members.
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts.
F. Install all free-standing electrical equipment on a 4-inch concrete housekeeping pad.
G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
H. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls.
I. Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls, concrete and/or masonry walls and floors, it shall be sleeved. Seal opening around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound.
J. Where conduit penetrates waterproofed floors or exterior walls subject to entry of moisture, provide pipe sleeves two sizes larger than conduit, suitably flashed or sealed where appropriate. Seal annular space around conduit with UL listed foamed silicone elastomer compound.
K. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket.
L. No suspended conduit or box supports shall be less than 1/4-inch diameter steel rod. Rod used as pedestal support is not acceptable. The contractor shall not use tie wire or wire of any type to support conduits, junction boxes or pull boxes.
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
M. No more than five (5) 1/2-inch conduits, three (3) 3/4-inch conduits or two (2) 1-inch conduits shall be supported on a single 1/4-inch diameter steel rod.
N. All conduits shall be supported by approved hangers. Supports installed and used by other trades such as duct hangers, pipe hangers, ceiling hangers, etc. shall not be used for conduit support. No conduit shall be hung from air handling duct of any type. Electrical conduit systems "shall stand alone."
O. All light luminaires shall be independently supported at opposite corners from structural steel or from trapeze supported from structural steel by electrical contractor.
P. Wall-mounted luminaires shall be supported from building structure with approved backing support to prevent any damage to the wall.
Q. Concrete anchors shall not be used to suspend heavy electrical loads such as electrical switch panels or four-inch and larger conduits. Anchors shall be designed to support conduits and cable tray when full fitted to maximum capacity with cables.
3.2 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Provide equipment pad bases of concrete type, construction, and finish as herein specified. Bases shall be of dimensions indicated or, where not specifically indicated or specified, dimensions shall be 4 inches height with width and length providing 4 inches of projection of base beyond outline dimension of supported equipment. 1. Concrete shall be Class 3000, prepared in conformity with ACI 301, ASTM C 33, and
ASTM C 94, as applicable. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping, using equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. Perform consolidation so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof, as directed or approved.
2. Provide oiled wood forms for concrete placement, adequately braced to ensure straight and vertical sides for bases. Finished bases shall provide a 3/4-inch chamfer at all exposed edges. Except where vibration attenuating base mountings are specified, provide No. 4 dowels (conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60), grouted into place, for anchorage of bases to substrate for all applications for which imposed strains or dynamic forces produced by equipment operation introduce the possibility of displacement of bases. Spacing of dowels shall be not less than 24 inches o.c., with a minimum of 4 dowels for each base.
3. Bases where indicated shall be reinforced by installation of 6 x 6 No. 8 AWG welded wire fabric conforming to ASTM A 185. Apply measures, during concrete placement, to ensure that fabric remains vertically centered in bases.
4. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. Float finish surfaces and provide steel trowel final finish.
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. For all equipment to be installed on concrete bases or other concrete construction, provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories as required. When installing equipment, set equipment into final position, shim equipment bases, skids or rails for level positioning, and install non-shrink grout for uniform support, and securely bolt into final position.
END OF SECTION 260529
SUPPORTING DEVICES AND SEALS 260529 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260532 - CONDUIT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal Conduit
B. Flexible Metal Conduit
C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing
E. Nonmetallic Conduit
F. Fittings and Conduit Bodies
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 - Cutting and Patching.
B. Division 2 - Trenching: Excavation and backfill for conduit and utilities on site.
C. Division 3 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Protective envelope for underground conduit installations.
D. Division 7 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
E. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding
F. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices and Seals
G. Section 260534 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings
H. Section 260553 - Electrical Identification
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
CONDUIT 260532 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NECA - "Standard of Installation".
F. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
G. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80).
H. NEMA TC 3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than two (2) inches or larger, regardless of location (i.e., above ceiling, below slab, etc.). Dimension from building columns.
C. Accurately record actual routing of all conduits installed in and under the slab. Dimension from the building columns.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 260500 and Division 1.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system and to coordinate with the work of other trades.
CONDUIT 260532 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size, unless otherwise specified: 1. Homeruns:
a. 3/4-Inch above accessible ceilings. b. 3/4-Inch above unaccessible ceilings and in concrete slab. c. 1-Inch below grade and below slab on grade.
B. Branch Circuits after the first junction point: 1/2-Inch C unless otherwise specified.
C. Underground Installations: 1. More than 5-Feet from Foundation Wall: Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit,
except as otherwise noted. 2. Within 5-Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel plastic coated conduit. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit. 4. Minimum Size: 1-Inch.
D. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit.
E. In Slab Above Grade: 1. Use PVC Schedule 40 nonmetallic conduit, unless otherwise specified. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4-Inch or as permitted by the Structural Engineer,
based on field conditions.
F. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit if subject to physical damage. Thickwall nonmetallic conduit in areas not subject to physical damage and acceptable to the local authority.
G. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit if subject to damage below 8-feet, otherwise use
electrical metallic tubing.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit.
2.3 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating,20 mil thick.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.
CONDUIT 260532 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel, compression or set screw type.
2.7 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC.
B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel, provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 260529.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
CONDUIT 260532 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to building elements and walls.
L. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. Dimension from building columns.
M. Do not cross conduits in slab except with written approval from the Structural Engineer.
N. Routing conduits parallel in the slab is prohibited except with written approval from the Structural Engineer.
O. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
P. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
Q. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.
R. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
S. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty (20) minutes, minimum.
T. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
U. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.
V. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
W. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints.
X. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
Y. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
Z. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 260526.
AA. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 260553.
BB. Transition from underground nonmetallic conduit to above grade metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall be made in or below the slab. The transition between nonmetallic conduit and above grade conduit shall be made with a rigid steel, plastic coated elbow.
CONDUIT 260532 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using approved materials and methods.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified.
END OF SECTION 260532
CONDUIT 260532 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260534 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes
B. Floor Boxes
C. Pull and Junction Boxes
1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 7 - Firestopping.
B. Division 8 - Access Doors: Wall and ceiling access doors.
C. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices: Service fittings and fire-rated poke-through fittings for floor boxes.
D. Section 260535 - Cabinets and Enclosures.
E. Section 260580 – Equipment Wiring Systems.
1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
B. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10-feet of location shown. Refer to Architectural Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 2-inch male luminaire studs where required.
B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast ferroalloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.
2.2 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1 or NEMA FB 1, fully adjustable.
2.3 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.
B. Sheet Metal Boxes Larger than 12-Inches in Any Dimension: Hinged enclosure in accordance with Section 260535.
C. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 6; flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box. 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance.
C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Division 7.
F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other.
G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas.
H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inch separation. Provide minimum 12-inch separation between back-to-back boxes in acoustic-rated walls.
I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two (2) rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.
O. Use gang box where more than one (1) device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations.
R. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations.
S. Set floor boxes level.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
T. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12-inches in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section 260535. 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast iron box.
U. Minimum junction and pull box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".
V. Minimum outlet box size 4" x 4" x 1-1/2".
W. Minimum telephone outlet box size 4-11/16" x 4-11/16" x 2-1/4".
X. Minimum junction box size for fire alarm pull stations, control module, monitor module, 4" x 4" x 2-3/4". Provide plaster ring at all pull station locations.
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Coordinate installation of outlet box for products furnished under other sections.
B. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Division 8.
C. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
D. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes.
E. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.
B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
C. Install knockout closure in unused box openings.
END OF SECTION 260534
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 260534 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260535 - CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hinged cover enclosures.
B. Cabinets.
C. Terminal blocks.
D. Accessories.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 260529 - Supporting Devices and Seals
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
B. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of products.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two of each cabinet key.
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 260535 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES
A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure.
B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key.
C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with matte white enamel.
D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.
2.2 CABINETS
A. Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls.
B. Box Size: As indicated
C. Backboard: Provide 3/4-inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte white enamel.
D. Fronts: Steel, surface type with concealed hinge, and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel.
E. Knockouts: As required
F. Provide metal barriers to separate compartments containing control wiring operating at less than 50 volts from power wiring.
G. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.
2.3 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4.
B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts.
C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
D. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6.
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 260535 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Provide conduit hubs on enclosures.
C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner.
C. Install cabinet fronts plumb.
END OF SECTION 260535
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 260535 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 260535 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Buried and Duct Bank Warnings
B. Electrical Power, Control and Communication Conductors and Conduit
C. Operational Instructions and Warnings
D. Danger Signs
E. Equipment/System Identification Signs
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 9 - Painting.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Compliance: Applicable requirements of ANSI A13.1, "Piping and Piping Systems".
B. FS Compliance: Applicable requirements of FS L-P-387 "Plastic Sheet, Laminated, Thermosetting (for designation plates)".
C. UL Compliance: Applicable requirements of UL Standard 969, "Marking and Labeling Systems," pertaining to electrical identification systems.
D. NEMA Compliance: Applicable requirements of NEMA Standard Nos. WC-1 and WC-2 pertaining to identification of power and control conductors.
E. Comply with "OSHA" sign standards for danger, caution, warning, etc.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1.
B. Include schedule for all specified applications of electrical identification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: The manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required are to be used for each application.
B. Underground Type Plastic Line Marker: 1. Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape,
intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6-inches wide x 4 mils thick. Printing is required on tape, which most accurately indicates type of service.
2. Color: Yellow
C. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands: 1. For cables smaller than No. 2/0 manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive
cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap are to be used and numbered to show circuit identification.
2. For cables No. 2/0 AWG and larger, heat shrink sleeving is to be used for phase color coding.
D. Plasticized Tags: 1. Manufacturer's standard preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention and
operational tags, on plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4-inch x 5-5/8-inch, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate preprinted wording including large-size primary wording, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE.
E. Baked Enamel Danger Signs: 1. Manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on .40 aluminum; of
standard Red, Black and White graphics; 14-inch x 10-inch size except where 10-inch x 7-inch is the largest size which can be applied where needed; with recognized standard explanation wording, e.g., XXXX VOLTS, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH SWITCH, etc.
F. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs: 1. Engraved stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in sizes and
thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, White face and Black core (Black letters on a White background) except as otherwise required (emergency power and fire alarm shall be Red with White letters), punched for mechanical fastening with a minimum of two (2) screws.
2. Thickness: 1/16-Inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8-inch length; 1/8-inch for larger units.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3. Fasteners: A minimum of two (2) self-tapping stainless steel screws. 4. Minimum letter height shall be as follows:
a. 1/4-Inch: 1) Panelboard name. 2) System control panel name. 3) Voltage rating. 4) Ampere rating. 5) Individual circuit breaker number and load name. 6) Individual switch circuit number and load name. 7) Individual motor starter circuit number and load name. 8) Individual indicating light function. 9) Individual pushbutton function. 10) Individual selector switch functions.
G. Lettering and Graphics: 1. Names, abbreviations and other designations used in electric identification work are to be
coordinated with corresponding designation shown, specified or scheduled. Numbers, lettering and wording as required or as recommended by manufacturer or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.
H. Adhesive Marking Tape for Device Cover Plates: 1. Avery-type or equal with 3/16-inch minimum height letters. Labels shall have black
letters on clear labels. Embossed Dymo-Tape labels are not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements: 1. Regulations: Governing regulations and requests of governing authorities are to be
complied with for identification of electrical work.
B. Underground Conduit and Ductbank Identification: 1. During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground conduit and ductbank, a
continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over conduit or ductbank at 12-inches below finished grade or 4-inches below paving, shall be provided.
C. Cable/Conductor Identification: 1. The application of cable/conductor identification, with circuit number, on each
cable/conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present is required. The identification is to match the marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously established identification for project's electrical work.
D. Junction Box and Pull Box Identification: 1. On the Cover of each junction box and pull box: The circuit number(s) of the enclosed
conductors are to be legibly written with a Black permanent ink broad tip marking pen and the system identified for FA (Fire Alarm) EM (Emergency) PA (Public Address), S (Security) TC (Temperature Control).
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Covers for emergency system junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red. 3. Covers for the Fire Alarm System junction boxes and pull boxes shall be painted Red.
E. Operational Identification and Warnings: 1. Wherever required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical
systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures shall be provided. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
F. Equipment/System Identification: 1. An engraved plastic-laminated sign is to be provided on each major unit of electrical
equipment in the building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/control/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, letter height as specified, black lettering on white field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. The sign shall include unit designation, source circuit number, circuit voltage, and other data specifically indicated. Include signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work: a. Panelboards (include main bus ampacity on sign), electrical cabinets and
enclosures. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities. c. Disconnect switch. d. Push buttons, selector switches, indicating lights. (Circuit number and voltage not
required on sign). e. Telephone cabinets and switching equipment. (Circuit number and voltage not
required on sign.) f. Fire Alarm Control Panel.
2. The installation of signs are required at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. The sign shall be secured to the substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.
G. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules (label all spares and spaces in pencil) with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
H. Provide tape labels for identification of individual receptacles and switches. Locate tape on front of plate and indicate associated source panelboard and circuit number.
END OF SECTION 260553
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260580 - EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, general and special conditions, Division 1 - General Requirements and other applicable technical specifications apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other Sections or furnished by Owner.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 - Owner-furnished equipment.
B. Divisions 22 & 23 - Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
C. Division 21 - Fire Protection.
D. Division 22 - Plumbing Pumps.
E. Division 22 - Water Heaters.
F. Division 23 - HVAC pumps.
G. Division 23- Air Handling Units.
H. Section 260532 - Conduit.
I. Section 260519 – Building Wire and Cable.
J. Section 260534 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Comply with the requirements of the reference standards noted herein, except where more stringent requirements are listed herein or otherwise required by the Contract Documents. A listing of applicable reference standards is contained in Divisions1.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS
A. Hubbell
B. General Electric
C. Pass & Seymour
D. Arrow, Hart & Hegeman
2.2 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Straight-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1.
B. Locking-Blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5.
C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
D. Cord Construction: Oil-resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multi-conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations.
E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Review equipment submittals prior to installation and electrical rough-in. Verify location, size, and type of connections. Coordinate details of equipment connections with supplier and installer.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Use wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat-producing equipment.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in damp or wet locations.
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Install pre-finished cord set where connection with attachment plug is indicated or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
D. Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes.
E. Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.
F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices such as limit switches and temperature switches as indicated. Connect with conduit and wiring as indicated.
3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION SCHEDULE
A. Furnish, set in place, and wire, except as may be otherwise indicated, all heating, ventilating, air conditioning, plumbing, fire protection, and other motors and controls in accordance with the following schedule. Carefully coordinate with work performed under the Mechanical and other Divisions of these specifications.
B. Symbols: SD = Section in which driven equipment is specified. E = Electrical Contractor. M = Mechanical Contractor. C = Controls Contractor
Item
Furnished By Set in Place By
Control Wiring
Equipment Motors, Controls and Integral Disconnect Switches
1. Automatically controlled, with or without HOA switches except as otherwise specified (including integral disconnect if specified).
SD E C/M
2. Automatically controlled with or without HOA switches & which are furnished as part of factory-wired equipment (including integral disconnect if specified).
SD SD C/M
3. Manually controlled (including integral disconnect if specified).
SD
E
E
4. Manually controlled and which are furnished as part of factory-wired equipment (including integral disconnect if specified).
SD
SD
C/M
5. Special duty types (part winding, etc.) (including integral disconnect if specified).
SD
E
C/M
Variable frequency drives
SD
E
C/M
Line voltage thermostats M E
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
Time clocks, remote bulb thermo- stats, motor valves, float controls, etc., which are an integral part of or directly attached to ducts, pipes, etc.
M M M
Environmental control panels
C/M
C/M
C/M
Motor valves, dampers, solenoid valves SD M C/M
Alarm bells SD SD E
Control circuit power supply E E
Low voltage controls, thermostats, valves, actuators, damper motors, EP and PE switches, etc.
C/M C/M C/M
Fire protection controls
M
M
E
Duct-mounted fire and smoke detectors, relays for fan shutdown
E M C/M
Boiler and water heater controls, boiler burner control panels, internally wired
M
M
M
Stand alone disconnect switches, thermal overload switches, manual operating switches
E
E
C. Notes to the Schedule: 1. Not all equipment indicated in the schedule is used in this project. Apply as required. 2. Complete wiring diagrams for installation purposes shall be furnished under the
Mechanical or other Divisions, as applicable. 3. All line and low voltage wiring shall be installed utilizing materials and methods as
specified in the Electrical Division of the specifications. 4. Provide NEMA-rated motors and equipment suitable for operation on the voltage systems
as designated below with tolerances for the allowable voltage variations above and below the nominal:
Rated Motor Voltage
Service Voltage And Phase
!-HP and Smaller 1-Phase
"-HP and Larger 3-Phase
120/208V, 3ph 115V 200V
END OF SECTION 260580
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 260580 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Time switches. 2. Outdoor and indoor photoelectric switches. 3. Indoor occupancy sensors. 4. Outdoor motion sensors. 5. Lighting contactors. 6. Emergency shunt relays.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for low-voltage, manual and
programmable lighting control systems. 2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy
sensors, and manual light switches.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. LED: Light-emitting diode.
B. PIR: Passive infrared.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including luminaires, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Intermatic, Inc. 4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 5. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 8. Square D; Schneider Electric. 9. TORK. 10. Touch-Plate, Inc. 11. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 2. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 3. Intermatic, Inc. 4. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 5. Novitas, Inc. 6. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 7. Square D; Schneider Electric. 8. TORK. 9. Touch-Plate, Inc. 10. Watt Stopper (The).
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Description: Solid state, with DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with UL 773A. 1. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc (16.14 to 108 lx), with an adjustment for
turn-on and turn-off levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light sources from causing turn-off.
2. Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation. 3. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE C62.41.2,
and IEEE 62.45 for Category A1 locations. 4. Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky exposure.
2.3 INDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. Area Lighting Research, Inc.; Tyco Electronics. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc; Cutler-Hammer Products. 4. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 5. Intermatic, Inc. 6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 7. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 8. Novitas, Inc. 9. Paragon Electric Co.; Invensys Climate Controls. 10. Square D; Schneider Electric. 11. TORK. 12. Touch-Plate, Inc. 13. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Ceiling-Mounted Photoelectric Switch: Solid-state, light-level sensor unit, with separate relay unit, to detect changes in lighting levels that are perceived by the eye. Cadmium sulfide photoresistors are not acceptable. 1. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the associated relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit. 2. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
3. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 10 to 200 fc (108 to 2152 lx), with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off levels within that range.
4. Time Delay: Adjustable from 5 to 300 seconds to prevent cycling, with deadband adjustment.
5. Indicator: Two LEDs to indicate the beginning of on-off cycles.
2.4 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 4. Novitas, Inc. 5. RAB Lighting, Inc. 6. Sensor Switch, Inc. 7. TORK. 8. Watt Stopper (The).
B. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit. 1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.
4. Mounting: a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door. 5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor. 6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure. 7. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lx); keep
lighting off when selected lighting level is present.
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm). 2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq.
ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling. 3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted
on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling.
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. 1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12
inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet (27.4 m) when mounted on a 10-foot- (3-m-) high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet (4.3 m).
E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls on-off functions shall be selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. 2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of
any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s).
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. 2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. 3. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 4. GE Industrial Systems; Total Lighting Control. 5. Grasslin Controls Corporation; a GE Industrial Systems Company. 6. Hubbell Lighting. 7. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 8. MicroLite Lighting Control Systems. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric. 10. TORK. 11. Touch-Plate, Inc. 12. Watt Stopper (The).
B. Description: Electrically operated and electrically held, combination type with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation.
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250. 4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA
type specified for the enclosure.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.6 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION
A. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CONTACTOR INSTALLATION
A. Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads, to eliminate structure-borne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators.
3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each sensor.
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been
energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time
delays.
B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls."
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 260943 – NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes manually operated lighting controls with relays and control module.
B. This Section includes manually operated, PC-based, digital lighting controls with external signal source, relays and control module.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. BACnet: A networking communication protocol that complies with ASHRAE 135.
B. BAS: Building automation system.
C. DALI: Digital addressable lighting interface.
D. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks.
E. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling and power-limited circuits.
F. Monitoring: Acquisition, processing, communication, and display of equipment status data, metered electrical parameter values, power quality evaluation data, event and alarm signals, tabulated reports, and event logs.
G. PC: Personal computer; sometimes plural as "PCs."
H. Power Line Carrier: Use of radio-frequency energy to transmit information over transmission lines whose primary purpose is the transmission of power.
I. RS-485: A serial network protocol, similar to RS-232, complying with TIA/EIA-485-A.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For control modules, power distribution components, manual switches and plates, and conductors and cables.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, arrangement of components, and
clearance and access requirements. 2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section
and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.
C. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected monitoring and control devices and systems specified in other Sections. 1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove
compatibility of inputs and outputs. 2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from
manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol.
D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Software licenses and upgrades required by and installed for operation and programming of digital and analog devices.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
D. Comply with protocol described in IEC 60929, Annex E, for DALI lighting control devices, wiring, and computer hardware and software.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components. 1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control
functions. 2. Coordinate lighting controls with HVAC controls. Design display graphics showing
building areas controlled; include the status of lighting controls in each area. 3. Coordinate lighting controls with that in Sections specifying distribution components that
are monitored or controlled by power monitoring and control equipment.
B. Coordinate lighting control components specified in this Section with components specified in Division 26 Section "Panelboards."
1.6 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lighting controls that fail in materials or workmanship or from transient voltage surges within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of software input/output to execute switching or dimming commands. b. Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands. c. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Extended Warranty Period Failure Due to Transient Voltage Surges: Eight years. 4. Extended Warranty Period for Electrically Held Relays: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Electrically Held Relays: Equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 2
relays.
1.8 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revise licenses for use of the software. 1. Provide 30-day notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow
Owner to upgrade computer equipment, if necessary.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Intelligent Lighting Controls, Inc. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Lighting Control & Design, Inc. 4. Lightolier Controls; a Genlyte Company. 5. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. 6. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc. 7. Watt Stopper (The). 8. Douglas Lighting Controls, Inc. 9. Cooper - Greengate
2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Expandability: System shall be capable of increasing the number of control functions in the future by 25 percent of current capacity; to include equipment ratings, housing capacities, spare relays, terminals, number of conductors in control cables, and control software.
B. Performance Requirements: Manual switches, an internal timing and control unit, and external sensors or other control signal sources send a signal to a PC-based programmable-system control module that processes the signal according to its programming and routes an open or close command to one or more relays in the power-supply circuits, or routes variable commands to one or more dimmers, for groups of luminaires or other loads.
2.3 CONTROL MODULE
A. Control Module Description: Comply with UL 916 (CSA C22.2, No. 205); microprocessor-based, solid-state, 365-day timing and control unit. Control units shall be programmable and capable of receiving inputs from indicated sensors and hand-held programmer. Output circuits shall be pilot-duty relays compatible with power switching devices. Output circuits shall include digital circuits arranged to transmit control commands to remote preset dimmers. Modules and their associated control panels shall include the following features: 1. Multichannel output with 40 channels. 2. Multiple inputs and multichannel output arranged for 40 channels. 3. Multiple inputs for occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, and dimming systems with
associated daylight sensors.
2.4 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES
A. Push-Button Switches: Modular, momentary-contact, low-voltage type. 1. Match color specified in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices." 2. Integral green LED pilot light to indicate when circuit is on. 3. Internal white LED locator light to illuminate when circuit is off.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Manual, Maintained Contact, Full- or Low-Voltage Switch: Comply with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
C. Wall-Box Dimmers: Comply with Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
D. Wall Plates: Single and multigang plates as specified in Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices."
E. Legend: Engraved or permanently silk-screened on wall plate where indicated. Use designations indicated on Drawings.
2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG, complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Cables: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable with copper conductors, complying with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 5e for horizontal copper cable and with Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways except where installed in accessible ceilings. Comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).
C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.
E. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
G. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Test for circuit continuity. 2. Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components selected
by Architect.
3.3 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
A. Install and program software with initial settings of adjustable values. Make backup copies of software and user-supplied values. Provide current licenses for software.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors and to assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 260943
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
D. RMS: Root mean square.
E. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed
devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. b. Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. c. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Field quality-control test reports including the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with
requirements.
E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices. 2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective
device.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panelboards and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.
F. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. 2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical
service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's [Owner's]
written permission.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Keys: Six spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards, Overcurrent Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. Eaton Corporation b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Protection Div. c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. d. Square D.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1, Type 1. 1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.
a. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.
4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.
5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat.
7. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted in metal frame, inside panelboard door.
B. Phase and Ground Buses: 1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
C. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material. 1. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 2. Ground Lugs and Bus Configured Terminators: Compression type. 3. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
D. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect switches.
E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.
2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. Omit for fused-switch panelboards.
B. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers. 2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in
circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.
3. Fused switches.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.
B. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
2.6 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level
overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic trip-unit circuit breakers shall have RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; and with the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip. b. Long- and short-time pickup levels. c. Long- and short-time time adjustments. d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5-mA trip sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. 1. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup
and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of
rated voltage. 5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-
adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay. 6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic
circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.
D. Fuses are specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.7 CONTROLLERS
A. Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, combination controller equipped for panelboard mounting and including the following accessories: 1. Individual control-power transformers. 2. Fuses for control-power transformers. 3. Bimetallic-element overload relay. 4. Indicating lights. 5. Seal-in contact. 6. 2 convertible auxiliary contacts. 7. Push buttons. 8. Selector switches.
B. Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, combination controller equipped for panelboard mounting and including the following accessories: 1. Individual control-power transformers. 2. Fuses for control-power transformers. 3. Indicating lights. 4. Seal-in contact. 5. 2 convertible auxiliary contacts. 6. Push buttons. 7. Selector switches.
C. Controller Disconnect Switches: Adjustable instantaneous-trip circuit breaker integrally mounted and interlocked with controller. 1. Auxiliary Contacts: Integral with disconnect switches to de-energize external control-
power source.
D. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held general-purpose controller. 1. Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and secondary
terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection. 2. Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.
2.8 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Furnish accessory set including tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.
B. Furnish portable test set to test functions of solid-state trip devices without removal from panelboard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Mount top of trim 74 inches (1880 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Mount plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers. 1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
F. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.
G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Building Wire and Cable."
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,
and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
C. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.
E. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scanning of each panelboard. Remove panel fronts so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies panelboards
checked and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
3.5 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS 262416 - 8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Wall-box motion sensors. 4. Tamper-resistant receptacles. 5. Weather-resistant receptacles. 6. Toggle switches and wall-box dimmers. 7. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors. 8. Communications outlets. 9. Pendant cord-connector devices. 10. Cord and plug sets. 11. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for workstation outlets.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. SPD: Surge Protective Device.
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. 1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
B. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Heavy duty, straight blade, single-piece, high strength nylon face with finder
grooves and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
C. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Heavy duty, straight blade, single-piece, high strength nylon face with
finder grooves, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system, spring loaded
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
shutters. Nickel-plated, brass mounting strap. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
2.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Heavy duty, straight blade, non-feed-through type, high strength nylon face
and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
C. Tamper-Resistant Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Heavy duty, straight blade, non-feed-through type, high strength nylon face,
spring loaded shutters, and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
D. Weather-Resistant Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Heavy duty, straight blade, non-feed-through type, high strength UV
resistant nylon face and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
2.3 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
B. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Description: Twist-locking, single-piece, high impact nylon face with color coded
voltage indicator and brass heavy duty grounding straps. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.4 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30 percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) 1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
B. Single Pole Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 1. Description: Heavy duty specification grade, with thermoplastic polycarbonate toggle
and heavy duty toggle bumpers for smooth and quiet operation, amperage marking on face. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
C. Three Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
1. Description: Heavy duty specification grade, with thermoplastic polycarbonate toggle and heavy duty toggle bumpers for smooth and quiet operation, amperage marking on face. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
D. Four Way Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. 1. Description: Heavy duty specification grade, with thermoplastic polycarbonate toggle
and heavy duty toggle bumpers for smooth and quiet operation, amperage marking on face. Back and side wired to accept #12 AWG through #10 AWG solid or stranded conductors.
2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.
C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated
when "off."
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 10 percent of full brightness.
2.7 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in we t and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.
2.8 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C. Service Plate: Rectangular solid brass with satin finish.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening
2.9 FINISHES
A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish
materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on
devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last
possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm)
in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device
mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. 10. Install wall switches 42 inches above floor, OFF position down. 11. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 2 inches above counters or
backsplash, grounding pole on bottom. 12. The use of devices with prefabricated wiring termination is [not] permitted.
E. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted
receptacles to the right.
F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G. Dimmers: 1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. Do not group adjacent dimmer switches under multigang wall plate.
I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Receptacles and Switches: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections. 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indi cators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.
B. Spare fuse cabinet.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 9: Painting of spare fuse cabinet.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
B. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Product Data: Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time-current curves.
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 260500.
B. Record actual fuse sizes.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
FUSES 262813 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL and referenced standards as suitable for purpose specified and indicated.
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide two fuse pullers.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide three of each size and type fuse installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman. 2. Littelfuse. 3. Ferraz-Shawmut. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1.
2.2 FUSE REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
C. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
D. Other Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay).
E. Power Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).
F. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 (time delay).
2.3 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified.
B. Doors: Hinged, with hasp for Owner's padlock.
FUSES 262813 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Finish: Prime finish for field painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
C. Install spare fuse cabinet
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES 262813 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
FUSES 262813 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible Switches
B. Nonfusible Switches
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 262813- Fuses.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NECA - Standard of Installation (published by the National Electrical Contractors Association).
B. NEMA FU1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
C. NEMA KS1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (published by the International Electrical Testing Association).
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 260500: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A. Record actual locations of enclosed switches in project record documents.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Eaton Corporation 2. General Electric 3. Square-D 4. Siemens
2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
B. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses.
2.3 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Fabrication: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.
END OF SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 262816 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 264313 – SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Surge Protective Devices (SPD’s) for low-voltage power, control, and communication equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices with integral SPD’s. 2. Division 26 Section "Switchboards" for factory-installed SPD’s. 3. Division 26 Section "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPD’s.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.
C. SPD: Surge Protective Devices.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Product Certificates: For surge protective devices, signed by product manufacturer certifying compliance with the following standards: 1. UL 1283. 2. UL 1449.
C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
D. Field quality-control test reports, including the following: 1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For surge protective devices to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, dimensional requirements, and electrical performance of suppressors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
E. Comply with IEEE C62.41, "IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits," and test devices according to IEEE C62.45, "IEEE Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits."
F. Comply with NEMA LS 1, "Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices."
G. Comply with UL 1283, "Electromagnetic Interference Filters," and UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.
B. Service Conditions: Rate surge protection devices for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: Not less than 115 percent of nominal system
operating voltage. 2. Operating Temperature: 30 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C). 3. Humidity: 0 to 85 percent, noncondensing. 4. Altitude: Less than 20,000 feet (6090 m) above sea level.
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field-mounted surge suppressors to allow adequate clearances for maintenance.
B. Coordinate surge protection devices with Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of surge suppressors that fail in materials or workmanship within five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Replaceable Protection Modules: One of each size and type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Current Technology, Inc. 2. Eaton Corporation. 3. General Electric Company. 4. LEA International. 5. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 6. Liebert Corporation; a division of Emerson. 7. Northern Technologies, Inc. 8. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 9. Square D; Schneider Electric.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS
A. Surge Protection Device Description: Non-modular, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories: 1. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 2. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 3. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status.
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable modules, sine-wave-tracking type with the following features and accessories: 1. Fuses, rated at 200-kA interrupting capacity. 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Integral disconnect switch. 4. Redundant suppression circuits. 5. Redundant replaceable modules. 6. Arrangement with copper bus bars and for bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus,
and ground bus. 7. Arrangement with wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus, and ground bus. 8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 9. Audible alarm, with silencing switch, to indicate when protection has failed. 10. One set of dry contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, for remote monitoring of protection
status. Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system. 11. Surge-event operations counter.
C. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 240 kA per phase.
D. Connection Means: Permanently wired.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for grounded wye circuits with voltages of 208Y/120, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 400 V for 208Y/120. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V for 208Y/120.
F. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, single-phase, 3-wire circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 400 V. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
G. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for 240/120-V, 3-phase, 4-wire circuits with high leg shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 400 V, 800 V from high leg. 2. Line to Ground: 400 V. 3. Neutral to Ground: 400 V.
H. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 240, 480, or 600, 3-phase, 3-wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 1000 V for 240 V. 2. Line to Ground: 1000 V for 240 V.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. NEMA 250, with type matching the enclosure of panel or device being protected.
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES
A. Install devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service entrance ground.
B. Install devices for panelboard and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground. 1. Provide multipole, 60-A circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnect for suppressor, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.2 PLACING SYSTEM INTO SERVICE
A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing. 1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.
B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
C. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing surge protection devices, but before electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance with test parameters.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain surge protective devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 264313
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SURGE-PROTECTIVE DEVICES 264313 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior luminaires, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Luminaire supports. 5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent luminaires.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting,
including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
2. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.
3. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BF: Ballast factor.
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.
C. CU: Coefficient of utilization.
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.
E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
F. Luminaire: Complete luminaire, including ballast housing if provided.
G. RCR: Room cavity ratio.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of luminaire, arranged in order of luminaire designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1. Physical description of luminaire including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including both internal and external emergency power units. 3. Ballast. 4. Lamps including life, output, and energy-efficiency data.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
D. LED Luminaires: For all LED luminaires submit LM 79 testing report.
1.5 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. During the Bidding Process (Prior Approvals): Alternate luminaires will not be reviewed by the engineer during the bidding process.
B. During the Submittal Process: Alternate luminaires will be reviewed by the engineer during the submittal process. Approval of alternate luminaires during the submittal process is at the sole discretion of the engineer. Any luminaires deemed not equal by the engineer at this point shall be resubmitted and any cost difference shall be borne by the contractor.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of luminaires and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
B. Sequence installation of the lighting to minimize the possibility of damage and soiling during the remainder of construction.
C. Coordinate luminaire types with ceiling construction.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.
2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
B. Special Warranty for Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Electromagnetic Ballasts: Three years from date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Special Warranty for T8 Fluorescent Lamps: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by lamp manufacturer agreeing to replace lamps that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
D. Special Warranty for LED lighting modules and/or luminaires: Manufacturer’s standard form, made out to Owner and signed by LED module and/or luminaire manufacturer agreeing to replace modules and/or luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. A typewritten list, including quantities, of all extra materials provided shall be included in the operations and maintenance manual . 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type. 2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish
at least one of each type. 3. Battery and Charger Data: One for each emergency lighting unit. 4. Ballasts: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type. 5. Globes and Guards: 1 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one
of each type. 6. LED Modules: 1 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of
each type. If LED modules are not field replaceable, furnish 1 luminaire for every 100 of each type and rating installed, at least one of each type.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Luminaire Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product
indicated on Drawings. 2. Lamp Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:
a. Phillips Lighting Company b. GE Lighting c. Osram Sylvania d. Venture Lighting e. Ushio
3. LED Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: a. Philips Lumiled b. Nichia c. CREE
4. Fluorescent Ballast Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: a. Advance b. Osram Sylvania c. GE Lighting
5. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Ballast Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: a. Bodine
6. HID Ballast Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following: a. Advance b. Osram Sylvania
2.2 LUMINAIRES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Recessed Luminaires: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed luminaires. Where LER is specified, for commercial downlights, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
B. Incandescent Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.
C. Fluorescent Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
D. HID Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.
E. LED Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598.
F. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
G. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
H. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.
I. Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless different
thickness is indicated. b. UV stabilized.
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. Rated Wattage and Lamp Type: As indicated on luminaire schedule, confirm compatibility between luminaire socket and lamp type.
B. Diffuser: Provide frosted lamps unless noted otherwise.
2.4 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B. Rated Wattage and Lamp Type: As indicated on luminaire schedule
C. Color Temperature: As indicated on luminaire schedule.
D. Color Rendering Index: Minimum CRI of 80.
2.5 LED MODULES
A. Correlated Color Temperature: As indicated on luminaire schedule.
B. Color Rendering Index: Minimum CRI of 80.
C. Minimum Lifespan: 50,000 hours while retaining 70% of lamp life.
D. Binning: LED’s shall be binned according to NEMA standard SSL 3-2010.
E. Replacement: LED module shall be replaceable independent of the luminaire housing.
F. Dimming: Ensure compatibility between dimming switch and/or dimming control system and LED driver. LED’s shall dim from 100-percent to 10-percent.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2.6 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. Ballast shall be provided with integral leads color coded per ANSI C82.11. 2. Ballast shall be type as indicated on luminaire schedule. 3. Ballast shall provide Independent Lamp Operation (ILO) for Instant Start ballasts
allowing remaining lamp(s) to maintain full light output when one or more lamps fail. 4. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without resetting
power. 5. Ballast shall operate from 60 Hz input source voltage of 120V or 277V as applicable with
sustained variations of +/- 10% (voltage and frequency) with no damage to the ballast. 6. Ballast shall be high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency above 42
kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. 7. Ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 0.98 for primary lamp. 8. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor for primary lamp application as follows: 0.75
for Low Watt, 0.85 for Normal Light Output, and 1.20 for High Light. 9. Ballast shall provide for a Lamp Current Crest Factor of 1.7 or less in accordance with
lamp manufacturer recommendations. 10. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% for
when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp. 11. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating. 12. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -18C (0F). 13. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without
damage. 14. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without resetting
power.
B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Luminaires: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system
and lamp type indicated.
2.7 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. Ballast shall be type as indicted on luminaire schedule. 2. Ballast shall contain auto restart circuitry in order to restart lamps without resetting
power. 3. Ballast shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120V through 277V with sustained
variations of +/- 10% (voltage and frequency) with no damage to the ballast. 4. Ballast shall be high frequency electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency above 65
kHz to avoid interference with infrared devices and eliminate visible flicker. 5. Ballast shall have a Power Factor greater than 0.98 for primary lamp. 6. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor of 1.00 for primary lamp application. 7. Ballast shall provide for a Lamp Current Crest Factor of 1.7 or less in accordance with
lamp manufacturer recommendations.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
8. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of less than 10% when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp.
9. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating. 10. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of -18C (0F) for primary lamp. 11. Ballast shall provide Lamp EOL Protection Circuit. 12. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without
damage.
B. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Luminaires: Electronic type. 1. Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system
and lamp type indicated.
2.8 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT
A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting luminaire body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. Emergency Connection: Operate 1 or 2 fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at a total output
total lumen output as indicated on luminaire schedule. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire ballast.
2. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space. a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power
and demonstrates unit operability. b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle. 3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer
relay. 5. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit
initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.
6. The ballast shall be capable of operating fluorescent lamps at the following light output in backup mode for a minimum of 90 minutes: a. (1) F18 PL-T lamp: 900 lumens b. (2) F18 PL-T lamps: 900 lumens (total) c. (1) F26 PL-T or F26 DBX: 700 lumens d. (2) F26 PL-T or F26 DBX: 700 lumens (total) e. (1) F32W/4P or F32 TBX: 1250 lumens f. (2) F32W/4P or F32 TBX: 1250 lumens (total) g. (1) F32T8 lamp: 1350 lumens h. (2) F32T8 lamps: 1350 lumens (total) i. (1) F28T5 lamp: 1250 lumens j. (1) F54T5HO lamp: 1250 lumens
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
B. EXIT SIGNS
C. Description: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.9 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained units complying with UL 924. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type. 2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. 3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power supply circuit voltage drops
to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.
5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
6. [Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and flashing red LED.]
2.10 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 8
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Luminaires: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Support for Luminaires in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each luminaire.
Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from luminaire corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each
luminaire corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling
plans or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting luminaire. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of luminaire at a safety factor of 3.
C. Suspended Luminaire Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
D. Adjust aimable luminaires as directed by engineer.
E. Protect installed luminaires from damage during the remainder of the construction period.
F. Clean lighting of dirt and construction debris upon completion of construction activities, prior to final acceptance by owner. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses and reflectors.
G. Replace any burnt out lamps and non-working luminaire components prior to final acceptance by owner.
H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Building Wire and Cable."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
END OF SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 9
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 10
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
SECTION 265600 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts. 2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.
B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on
exterior surfaces of buildings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CRI: Color-rendering index.
B. HID: High-intensity discharge.
C. Luminaire: Complete luminaire, including ballast housing if provided.
D. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.
E. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected
area, and verification of indicated parameters. 2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories. 3. Details of installation and construction. 4. Luminaire materials. 5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with
indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories. a. For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified
independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 1
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
b. Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
6. Photoelectric relays. 7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data. 8. Lamps, including life, output, and energy-efficiency data. 9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles. 10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved. 11. Anchor bolts for poles. 12. Manufactured pole foundations.
B. Shop Drawings: 1. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. 2. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of
screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power wiring.
C. Samples for Verification: For products designated for sample submission in Exterior Lighting Device Schedule. Each sample shall include lamps and ballasts.
D. Qualification Data: For agencies providing photometric data for luminaires.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 2
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain, perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage. 1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Lamps: Replace lamps and fuses that fail within 12 months from
date of Substantial Completion; furnish replacement lamps and fuses that fail within the second 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type. 2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: 10 for every 100 of each type
and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Ballasts: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each
type. 4. Globes and Guards: 10 for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least
one of each type.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:
B. In Exterior Lighting Device Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
2.2 LUMINAIRES, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support materials.
M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.
N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 4
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. a. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard catalog of colors.
2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS
A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.
B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc (16 to 32 lx) and off at 4.5 to 10 fc (48 to 108 lx) with 15-second minimum time delay. 1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with NEMA C136.10. 2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.
2.4 POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support components. 1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points. 2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, unless stainless-steel items are indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports. 1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the
application and approved by manufacturer.
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 5
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION
A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their mounting provisions on the pole.
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and underground features, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches (1520 mm). 2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet (3 m). 3. Trees: 15 feet (5 m).
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches (100 mm) above finished grade or surface at luminaire location. Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- (0.254-mm-) thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap.
3.5 GROUNDING
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding
system.
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 1. Install grounding electrode for each pole. 2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector. 3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed luminaire for damage. Replace damaged luminaires and components.
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and energizing circuits with normal power source. 1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 6
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
C. Illumination Tests:
1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s): a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting." b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations." c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations." d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas." e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."
D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering devices. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
END OF SECTION 265600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 7
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 265600 - 8
EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 00 - 1
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK Eaton Public Library Expansion P#1328 General Requirements: General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Division. SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES
A. Compaction Test: ASTM D698 Standard Proctor Density B. Colorado Department of Highways Standard Specification. C. Geotechnical Investigation Report No. 173-13, dated October 31, 2013, as performed by Northern
Colorado Geotech, Inc., 2956 29th St #21, Greeley, CO, 80631; 970.506.9244. D. What did the limestone say to the geologist? Stop taking me for granite.
1.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Geotechnical: Work under this Section will be performed under the control of a Geotechnical
Engineer employed by the Owner who will place qualified technical personnel on the site during earthwork operations as required. Comply with the Geotechnical Report.
1.03 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Protect from damage any utility lines or conduits uncovered during the Work until they have been examined by the Architect or Owner. If such lines are found to be abandoned and not in use, remove without extra cost. If such lines are found to be in use, carefully protect and carry on Work around them. If Owner deems it advisable to move such lines, Owner will pay cost of moving.
B. Work regarding site utilities depicted on the Drawings shall be included in Contractor’s bids and the construction contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL
A. Select Fill (Under Foundations, Interior Slabs on Grade): Imported granular, nonexpansive pit run material as approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.
B. Fill Under Paving: On-site excavated or imported fill which is non-expansive, free of rubble or debris and approved by Geotechnical Engineer.
C. Existing asphalt in area of new construction can be rubblized (maximum 2” diameter) and used as base fill in place, upon review of Geotechnical Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate the site as required for walls, foundations, piers, areas, pits, etc., to depths indicated. Excavate so that building foundations shall bear on original undisturbed soil (decomposed granite or bedrock) or new structural fill extending to the undisturbed soil. Trenches for foundations, walls, piers, etc. shall have bottoms of full width. If, through error, trenches are carried deeper than required, fill excess depth with concrete, or earth fill as directed. Exercise care in excavating near existing site features and foundations, so as not to undermine existing elements.
B. Bailing or Pumping: Immediately pump or bail out water found in excavations, whether rain or seepage. Keep excavations free from water at all times.
C. Take measures and furnish equipment and labor necessary to control the flow of drainage and accumulation of water as required to permit completion of the Work and to avoid damage to the Work.
3.02 FILL AND BACKFILL
A. Over-Excavation Fill: Fill back to elevations as required for foundations and slabs. Extend fill to a minimum of 1 to 1 inclined plane extending down and out from the outside edge of perimeter footings.
B. At proper time, fill as required and backfill around walls, piers, etc. to bring the earth to proper levels and grades for subsequent work. Install backfill in even lifts on both sides of foundation walls to prevent excessive pressure on one side.
C. Placing Fill and Backfill: Do not place brush, sod, frozen material or other perishable or unsuitable materials in the fill. Distribute material on the fill to avoid formation of lenses differing substantially from the surrounding material. Deliver materials to the fill surface in a manner to result in a well and uniformly compacted fill. Before compactions, spread fill materials in approximately horizontal layers not greater than eight (8”) inches thick with upper surface approximately horizontal.
EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 23 00 - 2
D. Moisture Control: If, in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, it is not possible to obtain uniform moisture content by adding water on the fill surface, add necessary moisture to the fill material in the excavation. If in the opinion of the Geotechnical Engineer, the material proposed for use in the compacted fill is too wet to permit adequate compaction, dry in an acceptable manner prior to placement and compaction. Place fill and backfill material 2% wet of optimum moisture content.
E. Compaction: When an acceptable, uniform moisture content is obtained, compact each layer by mechanical method acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer to the following densities as determined by ASTM D698:
Fill Under Foundations 95% Interior Fill Beneath Slabs 95% Exterior Fill Under Paving 95% Interior Utility Trenches and Exterior Utility Trenches Under Paving Upper four feet (4’) 95%
Lower portion 90% Trenches Not Under Paving - Full Depth 90% Overlot Fill 90%
The use of free water (puddling ) will not be allowed.
3.03 UNDER-SLAB GRAVEL A. Place, spread and compact under-slab gravel to 95% density as determined by ASTM D698.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Excavation: Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of depth and extent of excavation for
structures before starting filling operations. B. Filling: Obtain the Geotechnical Engineer’s approval of fill and the method of placing and
compaction before starting compacted fill or backfill. Obtain written approval of the completed compacted fill and backfill from the Geotechnical Engineer. Sufficient tests will be made to assure compliance with these Specifications. If, because of unsatisfactory test results it is necessary to retest after corrective work, the cost of all tests other than the initial tests shall be paid by the Contractor.
C. Moisture-Density Determination: Samples of representative fill materials to be placed will be obtained by the Geotechnical Engineer for determination of maximum density and optimum moisture for these materials. Unless indicated otherwise, tests for this determination will be made using methods conforming to requirements of ASTM D698. Copies of the results of these tests will be furnished to the Contractor. These test results will be the basis of control for compactive effort.
D. Density Tests: The density and moisture content of each layer of compacted fill will be determined by the Geotechnical Engineer in accordance with ASTM D698, D4253, D4254. Recompact any material found not to comply with the minimum specified density until the required density is obtained.
E. Field Engineering: The responsibility for lines, grades and levels necessary for proper location and execution of the Work rests upon the Contractor who will retain a competent instrument person for this purpose. Carefully protect bench marks and reference points.
3.05 SITE UTILITIES
A. Contractor to provide all underground utilities as noted on Site Utilities Plan. Verify locations and requirements with utility providers.
B. Contractor to provide relocated gas, electric, water, sewer, storm sewer and fire protection utilities and meters to five (5’) feet outside building. See Site Plan. Verify locations and requirements with utility providers.
C. Coordinate scheduling of underground utility installation, with appropriate agencies. D. Coordinate tapping procedure with appropriate utility and site development contractor. E. Comply with all requirements and standards of all the local governing authorities and utility agencies F. Fill and compact trenches to within two (2”) inches of grade. Provide final topsoil from stockpile or
as required. 3.06 TRENCHING
A. Refer to other provisions of this Section for general specifications on trenching excavation and compaction.
B. Utility trenches outside of area to be landscaped shall have existing asphalt, curbs, sidewalks, sod, landscape and irrigation if applicable, replaced to original condition.
END OF SECTION 31 23 00 - EXCAVATION AND FILL
END OF DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
